Barrister AI
All legislation
ACTRegulation
In force
This is the latest official compilation.Check the official source →
reg 85

Definitions for pt 6

In force

85 Definitions for pt 6

In this regulation:

birdcage scaffolding means independent pole scaffolding used in connection with the interior decoration of buildings or for fixing building ceilings or for other like work in the course of which loads required to be carried by the scaffolding are small in weight when compared with the weight of persons using the scaffolding.

cantilever scaffolding means scaffolding the platform of which is supported by cantilevers.

heavy duty scaffolding means scaffolding used by bricklayers, masons, plasterers and other like tradespeople who in the course of their work require that heavy materials be deposited on the scaffolding.

independent pole scaffolding means scaffolding supported from the base by 2 or more rows of standards independent of support from a wall or other structure.

light duty scaffolding means scaffolding for the use of carpenters, painters, plumbers, electricians and other like tradespeople and that is required to support material of weight greater than that carried by birdcage scaffolding but not so great as that carried by heavy duty scaffolding.

light swinging stage means a scaffolding the working platform of which is suspended from overhead supports and does not exceed 18 feet in length, and whose weight, inclusive of all gear, ropes, tackle, and blocks in addition to all parts integral with the working staging but exclusive of needles, does not exceed 600 pounds, and that is so used that the total load on the working platform including workers and material does not at any time exceed 500 pounds.

run means a stationary incline provided as a means of ascent and descent from one level to another.

single pole scaffolding means a scaffolding supported from the base by but 1 row of standards, the inner edge of the working platform being supported by putlogs fixed to a wall or structure.

suspended scaffolding means a scaffolding the platform of which is suspended from overhead supports by round steel wire ropes and is capable of being raised and lowered by means of winches or like mechanism.

toe board means a board 9 inches in height erected at right angles to a scaffolding platform and tightly against the platform for protection to workers as well as to prevent material or tools falling from the a platform.

General

86 .

Scaffolding construction

(1)

Every scaffolding and every part of scaffolding shall be of sound material, good construction, adequate strength, free from patent defects and be suitable and safe for the purpose for which it is intended.

Timber

(2)

All timber used in the construction of scaffolding shall be an approved Australian hardwood or Oregon pine (Douglas fir) or other approved timber of equivalent strength and characteristics.

(3)

Timber shall be thoroughly inspected before use.

Working platformsdimensions of scaffold planks

(4)

Except as otherwise provided in this section, the cross-sectional dimensions of scaffold planks shall be not less than 9 inches by 11/8 inches if of hardwood or 9 inches by 11/2 inches if of Oregon pine.

Working platformsscaffold planks to be of uniform thickness

(5)

Scaffold planks used in the construction of working platforms shall be of uniform thickness so as not to cause unevenness of surface.

Working platformsscaffold planks to lap

(6)

Except as otherwise provided in this section, scaffold planks shall be lapped 9 inches over supports.

(7)

Unless approved measures are taken to prevent uplift, no plank shall overhang a support more than 9 inches.

Working platformsminimum width of working platforms

(8)

Except as otherwise provided in this section, a working platform shall be not less than 18 inches in width.

Working platformsscaffold planks to be laid full width of frame

(9)

Scaffold planks shall be laid over the full width of the scaffolding frame and, in laying the planks, care shall be taken to avoid traps.

Guardrails and toe boards—where required

(10)

Guardrails and toe boards shall be provided on the outer edges and ends of all scaffolding from which a person or object could fall a distance of 10 feet or more.

Guardrails

(11)

Guardrails shall be of equivalent strength and rigidity to Oregon pine timber of cross-sectional dimensions four inches by 2 inches and shall be 36 inches in height.

(12)

Guardrails of metal piping shall be not less than 111/32 inches external diameter and if of rope not less than 3 inches in circumference.

(13)

All guardrails shall be secured to uprights at intervals of not more than 8 feet.

Toe boards

(14)

Toe boards shall project not less than 9 inches above the top of the platform planks and shall be set up so as to leave no space between the platform planks and the toe board bottom edge.

Fixings

(15)

Fixings shall be steel bolts 5/8 of an inch in diameter with washers and nuts, lashings of round fibre rope or other approved fixing.

(16)

For timbers not more than the dimensions provided in section 87 (3) to (9) and (29) to (55), fibre rope lashing for scaffolding shall be—

(a)

for scaffolding of more than 30 feet in height—18 feet in length by 11/2 inches in circumference; and

(b)

for scaffolding of 30 feet or less in height the lashings—16 feet in length by 11/2 inches in circumference.

(17)

For timbers of greater dimensions the length of fibre rope lashings shall be as approved.

(18)

It shall be an offence to use a fixing that has not been approved or that does not conform to the requirements of subsections (15) to (17).

Pipes for tubular scaffolding

(19)

Pipes for use in the construction of tubular scaffolding shall be straight and free from indentations, corrosion and other defects.

(20)

The ends of all pipes shall be squared to ensure even bearing over the whole area of the section at joints and other connections.

(21)

The pipes shall be of the dimensions and material specified in this section.

Fittings for tubular scaffolding

(22)

Only approved fittings shall be used for connecting the various members of a tubular scaffolding.

(23)

All such fittings shall accurately embrace, over the whole area of their bearing surfaces, the member or members on which they are used.

(24)

If the efficacy of the fittings is dependent on frictional grip, the fittings shall not be used to transmit primary tensile forces.

(25)

Fittings having screw threads in blind bosses or nuts, in which the amount of screw thread within the nut cannot be directly observed, shall not be used.

Electrical hazards

(26)

Scaffolding in which a metal member is used shall not be set up within 15 feet of any overhead electricity transmission line or main or within 15 feet of any electricity transmission apparatus until the transmission line, main, or transmission apparatus has been protected in an approved way by the electricity supply authority.

(27)

Scaffolding built of timber members shall not be set up within 5 feet of any such transmission line, main, or transmission apparatus until the protection mentioned in subsection (26) has been effected.

New types of scaffolding

(28)

All scaffolding for which specifications have not been given in this regulation, and all patented or manufactured scaffolding, parts of scaffolding or scaffolding devices, and all types of scaffolding developed subsequent to 25 May 1950 shall be of an approved type.

Repair of damaged scaffolding

(29)

Any scaffolding that has been damaged or weakened by any cause shall be immediately repaired and workers shall not be permitted on the scaffolding, except for the purpose of effecting repairs, until all repairs have been completed.

Restriction on use of fibre rope

(30)

Fibre rope shall not be used on or in connection with any scaffolding set up in any acid manufacturing plant or in any other plant where acids are generated or released in quantity or in other location where the rope is likely to be detrimentally affected by acid.

Construction of single and independent pole scaffolding

87 .

General arrangement

(1)

Single pole and independent pole scaffolding shall comprise a number of standards to which are fixed horizontal members (ledgers) supporting putlogs on which are laid scaffold planks, the structure thus constituted being braced, both longitudinally and transversely.

Bracing

(2)

This type of scaffolding shall be adequately braced in all directions to form a rigid structure capable of maintaining a wide margin of stability under all possible conditions.

Standards

(3)

The base of every standard shall bear on a firm footing.

(4)

If there is a possibility of settlement of any standard, the standard shall be provided with a foundation of such size and of such strength as to spread the load from the standard over a large enough area to prevent settlement.

(5)

If splices are necessary in round pole standards, butt jointed double poles shall be used instead of single poles and the double poles shall break joint at least 9 feet, poles being secured together with 2 rope lashings at the base and 1 rope lashing on each side of each butt joint.

(6)

When necessary as a protection against the impact of trucks or other heavy moving equipment, the bases of standards shall be protected from displacement by bumpers.

(7)

Sawn timber standards shall be butt jointed with 2 (two) 3-feet lengths of 4 inch by 2 inch timber fixed 1 on each side of the butt joint and bolted through with 4 5/8 inches diameter bolts, fitted with washers and nuts, spaced at 9 inch centres.

(8)

Fish plates and bolts shall be symmetrically arranged at each such joint.

(9)

Joints in the standards of tubular scaffolding shall not be at distances greater than 9 inches from ledgers or other members capable of effectively constraining the joints against lateral displacement.

Ledgers

(10)

Each ledger shall be secured to each standard at each crossing by use of the appropriate fixing prescribed by section 86 (15) to (17).

(11)

Each ledger shall be so fixed that the greater rectilinear dimension of a section of it shall stand vertically.

(12)

Ledgers shall be continuous and kept continuous for the whole length of a scaffolding frame.

(13)

A joint shall not be made in a ledger of a single span.

(14)

Joints shall not be made in ledgers in the vicinity of the end, or outer standards.

(15)

Joints shall not be made in adjacent spans of any ledger.

(16)

If a straight ledger is supported by a row of not less than 3 standards, 1 joint only may be made in the ledger, provided that the joint is not placed at a greater distance than 2 feet 3 inches from the central standard.

(17)

If a straight ledger is supported by a row of 4 or more standards, the ledger joints may be placed at any position but not within adjacent or end spans.

Putlogs

(18)

Putlogs shall be set above ledgers and they shall be securely fixed to ledgers or standards.

(19)

Every putlog shall have not less than 41/2 inches bearing in walls and they shall be securely wedged in position in walls.

(20)

If one end rests on a structure, it shall be effectively secured to the structure.

(21)

A joint shall not be made in the span of a putlog.

(22)

Putlogs shall be arranged so as to provide true and even support to scaffold planks.

(23)

On each ledger at least 1 putlog within 2 feet of each standard shall remain in the scaffolding until the scaffolding is finally removed.

(24)

The spacing of putlogs in scaffolding constructed of timber shall not exceed 6 feet.

(25)

For tubular scaffolding, 1 putlog shall be placed at each side of each standard except the standards at each end of the scaffolding frame, where only 1 need be used.

(26)

The putlogs for tubular scaffolding shall be positioned not more than 9 inches from a standard measured centre-line of standard to centre-line of putlog except as provided in this section.

(27)

The maximum span of a putlog in tubular scaffolding shall not exceed 5 feet 21/2 inches for a mild steel putlog, or 4 feet 81/2 inches for a putlog of high tensile aluminium alloy measured centre to centre of supports.

(28)

If 1 end of a putlog is supported by a wall or by part of a structure, the span shall be considered as the distance between the face of the wall and the centre-line of the ledger supporting the other end.

Heavy duty single and independent pole scaffolding not exceeding 30 feet in heightpermissible loads

(29)

The load due to the weight of people and materials uniformly distributed over the area of a scaffolding platform shall not exceed 35 pounds per square foot of platform area.

(30)

The weight of a concentrated load imposed on any bay of a scaffolding of this type shall not exceed 400 pounds provided that this load and the uniformly distributed load shall not act simultaneously.

Heavy duty single and independent pole scaffolding not exceeding 30 feet in heightpermissible number of working platforms

(31)

Not more than 2 working platforms shall be set up and used on a scaffolding frame at any one time, but short platforms may be set up in different positions on the frame, provided that the total area of these platforms supported by any standard would not exceed that supported when 2 full length platforms are set up.

Heavy duty single and independent pole scaffolding not exceeding 30 feet in heightheight

(32)

For subsections (29) to (31) and (33) to (43), the height of the scaffolding means the perpendicular distance measured from the base from which the scaffolding rises to the top surface of the topmost platform.

Heavy duty single and independent pole scaffolding not exceeding 30 feet in heightstandards

(33)

All standards shall be effectively tied to the building or structure or be otherwise braced at points not more than 12 feet apart in the length of each standard, and shall be—

(a)

of sawn timber 4 inches by 3 inches sectional dimensions; or

(b)

of timber poles not less than 3 inches diameter at the small end; or

(c)

for tubular scaffolding only—of round metal pipes, steam quality, mild steel, or pipes of an approved high tensile aluminium alloy or other approved alloy, all such pipes being of an outside diameter of not less than 129/32 inches, a nominal bore of 11/2 inches and a wall thickness of not less than 0.192 inches for pipes of mild steel and 0.176 inches for pipes of an approved alloy; or

(d)

of the other material, construction and dimensions that may be prescribed in this section or that may be approved.

Heavy duty single and independent pole scaffolding not exceeding 30 feet in heightspacing of standards

(34)

Sawn timber and pole standards shall be spaced not more than 10 feet apart measured from the centre-line of one standard to the centre-line of the adjacent standard in the same row.

(35)

Pipe standards in tubular scaffolding shall be spaced not more than 7 feet 6 inches apart in any row measured as mentioned in subsection (34).

(36)

If 2 or more rows of standards are used, the rows shall be spaced so as to be not more than 5 feet apart for scaffolding constructed of timber or of mild steel pipes and not more than 4 feet 6 inches apart for scaffolding constructed of pipes made of an approved aluminium alloy.

Heavy duty single and independent pole scaffolding not exceeding 30 feet in heightledgers

(37)

Ledgers shall be spaced not more than 6 feet apart, provided that if circumstances so necessitate, the distance measured from the base of a scaffolding to the first ledger may be increased to not more than 10 feet, and shall be—

(a)

of sawn timber not less than 6 inches by 11/2 inches sectional dimensions if of hardwood and not less than 6 inches by 2 inches sectional dimensions if of Oregon pine; or

(b)

of timber poles not less than 21/2 inches diameter at the small end; or

(c)

for tubular scaffolding only—of round metal pipes of the description and dimensions mentioned in subsection (33) (c); or

(d)

of the other material, construction and dimensions that may be prescribed in this section, or that may be approved.

Heavy duty single and independent pole scaffolding not exceeding 30 feet in heightputlogs

(38)

Putlogs shall be—

(a)

of sawn timber not less than 3 inches by 3 inches sectional dimensions if of hardwood and not less than 4 inches by 3 inches if of Oregon pine; or

(b)

for tubular scaffolding only—of round metal pipes of the description and dimensions mentioned in subsection (33) (c); or

(c)

of the other material, construction and dimensions that may be prescribed in this section or that may be approved.

Heavy duty single and independent pole scaffolding not exceeding 30 feet in heightspacing of putlogs

(39)

Sawn timber putlogs shall be spaced at not more than 6 feet apart.

(40)

For scaffolding constructed of metal pipes, a putlog shall be placed at each side of each standard except the standards at each end of the scaffolding frame, where 1 only need be used.

(41)

The putlogs for scaffolding constructed of metal pipes shall be positioned not more than 9 inches from a standard, measured centre-line of standard to centre-line of putlog.

(42)

The maximum span of a mild steel pipe putlog shall not exceed 5 feet 21/2 inches and the maximum span of a putlog of high tensile aluminium pipe shall not exceed 4 feet 81/2 inches.

Heavy duty single and independent pole scaffolding not exceeding 30 feet in heightbracings

(43)

Bracings shall be—

(a)

sawn timber not less than 9 square inches in sectional area; or

(b)

timber poles not less than 21/2 inches diameter at the small end; or

(c)

for tubular scaffolding—round metal pipes as mentioned in subsection (33) (c); or

(d)

of the other material, construction and dimensions that may be prescribed in this section or that may be approved.

Heavy duty single and independent pole scaffolding exceeding 30 feet but not exceeding 150 feet in height—general

(44)

The requirements of subsections (29) to (32) shall also apply to this type of scaffolding.

Heavy duty single and independent pole scaffolding exceeding 30 feet but not exceeding 150 feet in heightstandards

(45)

Standards shall be—

(a)

of sawn timber not less than 4 inches by 4 inches sectional dimensions; or

(b)

of timber poles not less than 3 inches diameter at the small end; or

(c)

for tubular scaffolding—round metal pipes of the description and dimensions mentioned in subsection (33) (c); or

(d)

of the other material, construction and dimensions that may be prescribed in this section or that may be approved.

Heavy duty single and independent pole scaffolding exceeding 30 feet but not exceeding 150 feet in heightspacing of standards

(46)

Sawn timber and pole standards shall be spaced not more than 9 feet apart measured from the centre-line of one standard to the centre‑line of the adjacent standard in the same row.

(47)

Pipe standards in tubular scaffolding shall be spaced not more than 7 feet 6 inches apart in any row measured as mentioned in subsection (46).

(48)

If 2 or more rows of standards are used the rows shall be spaced so as to be not more than 5 feet apart for scaffolding constructed of timber or of mild steel pipes and not more than 4 feet 6 inches apart for scaffolding constructed of pipes of approved aluminium alloy.

Heavy duty single and independent pole scaffolding exceeding 30 feet but not exceeding 150 feet in heightledgers

(49)

Ledgers shall be spaced not more than 6 feet apart, provided that if circumstances so necessitate, the distance measured from the base of a scaffolding to the first ledger may be increased to not more than 10 feet, and shall be—

(a)

of approved sawn hardwood timber not less than 6 inches by 2 inches sectional dimensions or of Oregon pine timber not less than 6 inches by 21/2 inches sectional dimensions; or

(b)

of timber poles not less than 3 inches diameter at the small end; or

(c)

for tubular scaffolding only—of round metal pipes of the description and dimensions mentioned in subsection (33) (c); or

(d)

of the other material construction and dimensions that may be prescribed in this section or that may be approved.

Heavy duty single and independent pole scaffolding exceeding 30 feet but not exceeding 150 feet in heightputlogs

(50)

Putlogs shall be—

(a)

of sawn hardwood timber not less than 3 inches by 3 inches sectional dimensions; or

(b)

for tubular scaffolding only—of round metal pipes of the description and dimensions mentioned in subsection (33) (c); or

(c)

of the other material, construction and dimensions that may be prescribed in this section or that may be approved.

Heavy duty single and independent pole scaffolding exceeding 30 feet but not exceeding 150 feet in heightspacing of putlogs

(51)

Sawn timber putlogs shall be spaced at not more than 6 feet apart.

(52)

For scaffolding constructed of metal pipes, 1 putlog shall be placed at each side of each standard, except the standards at each end of the scaffolding frame where only 1 putlog need be used.

(53)

All putlogs for scaffolding constructed of metal pipes shall be located not more than 9 inches from a standard measured from the centre-line of the standard to the centre-line of the putlog.

(54)

The maximum span of a mild steel pipe putlog shall not exceed 5 feet 21/2 inches and the maximum span of a putlog of high tensile aluminium pipe shall not exceed 4 feet 81/2 inches.

Heavy duty single and independent pole scaffolding exceeding 30 feet but not exceeding 150 feet in heightbracings

(55)

Bracings shall be—

(a)

sawn timber, not less than 9 square inches in sectional area; or

(b)

timber poles not less than 21/2 inches diameter at the small end; or

(c)

for light duty scaffolding—round metal pipes mentioned in subsection (33) (c); or

(d)

of the other material, construction and dimensions that may be prescribed in this section or that may be approved.

Light duty single and independent pole tubular scaffoldingpermissible loads

(56)

This type of scaffolding shall be used only by painters and decorators and other like tradespeople in building work of such description that the scaffolding is subjected only to small loads from the combined weight of workers and materials.

(57)

The total load due to the weight of workers and material on the platform of a light duty scaffolding shall not exceed the equivalent of a uniformly distributed load of 10 pounds per square foot of platform area.

(58)

This loading equals the combined weight of 4 workers plus material weighing 50 pounds.

Light duty single and independent pole tubular scaffoldingheight

(59)

The height of the topmost platform shall not exceed 100 feet, such height being the distance measured from the base from which the scaffolding rises to the top surface of the platform.

Light duty single and independent pole tubular scaffoldingpermissible number of working platforms

(60)

Not more than 2 working platforms shall be set up and used on a scaffolding frame at any time, but short platforms may be set up in different positions on the frame provided that the total area of these platforms supported by any standard would not exceed that supported when 2 full length platforms are set up.

Light duty single and independent pole tubular scaffoldingstandards

(61)

Standards shall be of round metal pipes, steam quality, mild steel, or pipes of an approved high tensile aluminium alloy, or other approved alloy, all such pipes being of an outside diameter of not less than 129/32 inches, a nominal bore of 11/2 inches and a wall thickness of not less than 0.192 inches for pipes of mild steel and 0.176 inches for pipes of an approved alloy.

(62)

All standards shall be effectively tied to the building or structure or be otherwise braced at points not more than 12 feet apart, measured centre to centre.

Light duty single and independent pole tubular scaffoldingspacing of standards

(63)

Standards shall be spaced not more than 12 feet apart measured from the centre-line of one standard to the centre-line of the adjacent standard in the same row.

(64)

If 2 or more rows of standards are used the rows shall be spaced so as to be not more than 6 feet apart measured from the centre-line of one row to the centre-line of another row.

Light duty single and independent pole tubular scaffoldingledgers

(65)

Ledgers shall be of round metal pipes of the description and dimensions mentioned in subsection (61).

(66)

Ledgers shall be spaced not more than 10 feet apart.

(67)

For this type of scaffolding the distance of a joint in a ledger from a vertical shall not exceed 1 foot 9 inches.

Light duty single and independent pole tubular scaffoldingputlogs

(68)

Putlogs shall be round metal pipes of the description and dimensions mentioned in subsection (61).

Light duty single and independent pole tubular scaffoldingspacing of putlogs

(69)

A putlog shall be placed at each side of each standard except the standards at each end of the scaffolding frame, where 1 only need be used.

(70)

The distance measured between the centre-line of a putlog and the centre-line of a standard shall be 2 feet.

(71)

The span of a putlog shall not exceed 6 feet 41/2 inches.

Light duty single and independent pole tubular scaffoldingbracings

(72)

Bracings shall be round metal pipes of the description and dimensions mentioned in subsection (61).

Tubular birdcage scaffoldingpermissible loads

(73)

The total load on the platform in any bay at any time of this type of scaffolding shall not exceed the weight of 2 workers plus material weighing 50 pounds.

Tubular birdcage scaffoldingarrangement and construction

(74)

The general arrangement, construction and materials shall be as mentioned in subsections (56) to (72) subject to the following:

(a)

platform planks may be spaced not more than 7 inches apart;

(b)

the span of a mild steel putlog may be increased to 8 feet and the span of a high tensile aluminium putlog may be increased to 6 feet;

(c)

standards shall be spaced not more than 10 feet apart in any row, unless additional putlogs are provided to support cantilevered ends of platform planks;

(d)

not more than 1 working platform shall be set up on a scaffolding frame at any time.

Light duty single and independent pole scaffolding of 1 inch internal diameter steel tubeuses of scaffolding

(75)

This type of scaffolding shall only be used by painters, repairers, decorators, electric welders and other like tradespeople.

Light duty single and independent pole scaffolding of 1 inch internal diameter steel tubetubes

(76)

Tubes shall be mild steel round pipes of steam quality, not less than 111/32 inches outside diameter, having walls not less in thickness than 0.16 inch.

Light duty single and independent pole scaffolding of 1 inch internal diameter steel tubefittings

(77)

The fittings or devices used for connecting the various members of the scaffolding shall be only those that have been approved.

Light duty single and independent pole scaffolding of 1 inch internal diameter steel tubeheight

(78)

The height of the topmost platform above the surface on which the scaffolding is erected shall not exceed 15 feet for scaffolding having 1 or 2 rows of standards and shall not exceed 24 feet for scaffolding having 3 or more rows of standards.

Light duty single and independent pole scaffolding of 1 inch internal diameter steel tubestandards

(79)

Standards shall be spaced not more than 5 feet apart measured horizontally centre to centre along any row.

(80)

If 2 or more rows of standards are used, the rows shall be spaced 3 feet 9 inches apart measured horizontally centre to centre.

Light duty single and independent pole scaffolding of 1 inch internal diameter steel tubeledgers

(81)

Each ledger shall be supported by and at each standard.

(82)

The vertical distance of one ledger to the next adjacent in the height of a standard shall not exceed 6 feet.

(83)

The lowest ledger shall be fixed at a height not exceeding 18 inches above the feet of the standards.

Light duty single and independent pole scaffolding of 1 inch internal diameter steel tubeputlogs

(84)

Putlogs shall be connected directly to the standards and the fittings employed shall be set together as closely as is practicable.

Light duty single and independent pole scaffolding of 1 inch internal diameter steel tubebracing

(85)

Diagonal bracings of steel scaffolding tubing shall be so arranged and fixed as to directly and effectively prevent longitudinal movements of all putlogs and of all ledgers.

(86)

Alternatively the putlogs shall be effectively braced from an adjacent building or structure and the bracing shall be at least of equal effect to that otherwise required.

Light duty single and independent pole scaffolding of 1 inch internal diameter steel tubegeneral limitations

(87)

In connection with this type of scaffolding no person shall—

(a)

impose or cause to be imposed on any putlog a greater total load than 470 pounds weight, inclusive of workers, tools, equipment, materials and platform timbers; or

(b)

impose or cause to be imposed simultaneously on any scaffolding framework a greater number of working platforms than 2, but short platforms may be set up in different positions on the frame provided that the total area of these platforms supported by any part of the framework shall not exceed that supported when 2 full length platforms are set up; or

(c)

use or cause to be used in connection with the scaffolding any connector, clip, socket, fitting, jack, base, finial, fastening, wheel or caster, unless it has been approved; or

(d)

use or cause to be used any such connector, clip, socket, fitting, jack, base, finial, fastening, wheel or caster in any way or for any purpose other than that for which it has been approved, or for any greater loading than that for which it has been so approved; or

(e)

fix or use or cause to be fixed or used any putlog of greater span than 3 feet 9 inches measured horizontally centre to centre of the standards or from the centre of a standard to the nearest face of the other support; or

(f)

load or cause to be loaded any member of the scaffolding framework in any way other than that mentioned in this section.

Cantilever scaffolding

88 .

General arrangement

(1)

The general arrangement of cantilever scaffolding shall be as shown in schedule 7, plate 2.

Platform width

(2)

The platform width for this type of scaffolding shall not exceed 5 feet unless otherwise approved.

Platform planks

(3)

The platform planks shall be spiked, strapped, lashed, or wired in position to overcome creep and to prevent displacement by wind.

(4)

The dimensions of a section of any platform plank shall be not less than 10 inches by 11/2 inches for spans to 6 feet and 10 inches by 2 inches for spans exceeding 6 feet but not exceeding 10 feet.

Guardrails and toe board

(5)

A toe board shall be securely fixed at the open sides of all platforms and guardrails at the open sides and ends of all platforms.

(6)

Guardrails of the dimensions and description provided for by this regulation shall be fixed at the open sides and ends of all platforms.

Cantilevers

(7)

The length of a cantilever inside a building or structure shall not be less than 8 feet measured horizontally from the centre-line of the cantilever support to the centre of the bolt securing the inboard end to its support.

(8)

The dimensions of a section of a cantilever shall not be less than 9 inches by 21/2 inches for Oregon pine timber, or 9 inches by 2 inches for approved hardwood timber if the distance between the centre-lines of adjacent cantilevers does not exceed 6 feet.

(9)

If the distance is more than 6 feet but does not exceed 10 feet, the dimensions of the section shall be 10 inches by 21/2 inches for oregon and 10 inches by 2 inches for hardwood.

(10)

The diameter of a bolt used for fixing the inboard end of a cantilever to its support shall be not less than 5/8 of an inch.

Toms

(11)

If the inboard end of a cantilever is fixed to a tom, the dimensions of a section of the tom shall be not less than 4 inches by 3 inches.

(12)

Each tom shall rise from a pair of fox wedges, which shall be driven tight and then nailed, or it shall be fixed in an equally secure way.

Bracing

(13)

All toms shall be effectively braced by the use of 3 inch by 2 inch timber diagonal braces as indicated in schedule 7, plate 2.

(14)

Each cantilever shall be braced as shown in schedule 7, plate 2 by 3 inch by 2 inch timber braces.

(15)

All braces shall be fixed by bolts not less than 1/2 an inch in diameter.

Bracket scaffolding

89 .

General

(1)

In this section:

bracket scaffolding means a working platform supported by brackets, either of timber or metal, constructed and erected as mentioned in this section.

(2)

Bracket scaffolding shall be used only by carpenters, painters, tuck pointers, electricians, plumbers and other like tradespeople who do not require their working platform to carry quantities of materials or to withstand the effects of marked physical activity.

General arrangement

(3)

The general arrangement of a timber bracket scaffolding shall be as shown in schedule 7, plate 3, figure 1, provided that the brackets shall not be spaced at a greater distance apart than 14 feet.

Construction of timber brackets—general arrangement

(4)

The general arrangement of brackets shall be as shown in schedule 7, plate 3, figure 2 or 3.

Construction of timber brackets—vertical legs

(5)

The minimum length of the vertical leg of a bracket shall be 4 feet and the minimum cross-sectional dimensions shall be 4 inches by 3 inches for Oregon pine timber and 4 inches by 2 inches for hardwood timber.

Construction of timber brackets—horizontal legs

(6)

The overall length of the horizontal legs shall not exceed 2 feet 6 inches and the cross-sectional dimensions of the legs shall be as set out in subsection (5) for vertical legs.

Construction of timber brackets—connection vertical to horizontal legs

(7)

The inboard end of the horizontal leg shall sit fair and square on the upper end of a vertical leg and one shall be connected to the other either by a 14 inch by 14 inch gusset of 14 gauge mild steel plate, secured by 4 3/8 inches diameter mild steel bolts, 2 in each leg as shown schedule 7, plate 3, figure 2, or by the insertion of a 3/16 of an inch thick mild steel plate connected by 3 (three) 3/8 of and inch diameter mild steel bolts as shown in schedule 7, plate 3, figure 3.

Construction of timber brackets—bracing between vertical and horizontal legs

(8)

If the vertical leg is connected to the horizontal by a gusset, 1 pair of braces of 3 inch by 11/4 inch timber shall be used as shown in schedule 7, plate 3, figure 2, or if a mild steel insert is used for this connection 2 pairs of braces of those dimensions shall be used for the purpose as shown in schedule 7, plate 3, figure 3.

(9)

In both cases the ends of each brace shall be cut to form a shoulder that shall bear against the horizontal and vertical legs of the bracket, respectively.

Construction of timber brackets—handrail brackets

(10)

Handrail brackets constructed of mild steel plate 3/16 of an inch thick shall be fixed to the outer end of the horizontal leg of each bracket by 3/8 of an inch diameter mild steel bolts as indicated in schedule 7, plate 3, figure 5 and the handrail upright shall be bolted to this bracket.

Struts

(11)

The strut used for holding a bracket against a wall shall not be less than 4 inches by 3 inches cross-sectional dimensions for lengths up to and including 20 feet.

(12)

The strut shall be so positioned that the 3 inch face is uppermost.

(13)

For lengths longer than 20 feet, the cross-sectional dimensions shall be so increased that a strut of equal strength is provided.

(14)

The lower ends of the struts shall be effectively secured against movement.

(15)

The angle of the struts with the horizontal shall not be greater than 60° or less than 50°, with the exception that for seasoned brickwork the angle may be flattened to between 40° and 60°.

Bracing between struts

(16)

Struts shall be braced one to the other as indicated in schedule 7, plate 3, figure 1.

(17)

The braces, marked ‘B’ in the figure, shall have cross-sectional dimensions not less than 3 inches by 11/4 inches for both hardwood and Oregon pine, and may be spiked, clamped or bolted in position.

Platform

(18)

The platform may be of Oregon pine or hardwood scaffold planks.

(19)

The overall width of the platform shall not exceed 2 feet 6 inches and the minimum width shall be 1 foot 6 inches.

(20)

The scaffold planks shall be spiked or otherwise effectively secured to the brackets at each end and shall be cleated at mid length in the way shown in schedule 7, plate 3, figure 4.

(21)

If the distance between brackets does not exceed 12 feet, the thickness of the scaffold planks shall be not less than 11/2 inches for Oregon pine timber and 11/8 inches for hardwood timber.

(22)

If the distance between brackets exceeds 12 feet but does not exceed 14 feet the thickness of the scaffold planks shall be not less than 13/4 inches for Oregon pine and 13/8 inches for hardwood.

Handrails

(23)

Handrails shall be fixed at the outer edges and ends of all bracket scaffolding and shall be not less than 3 inches by 2 inches cross‑sectional dimensions.

(24)

Handrail uprights shall be effectively and rigidly attached to the brackets as mentioned in subsection (10).

Metal brackets

(25)

Metal brackets shall be so designed and constructed that they conform to the appropriate design requirements of part 11.

(26)

Working platforms supported by metal brackets shall conform to the requirements of this section.

Suspended scaffolding

90 .

Loading

(1)

Suspended scaffolding constructed and erected in accordance with this section or to an approved design and description shall not at any time be loaded, except in a bona fide test in the presence of an inspector, in excess of the maximum load permitted by this section or specified by the chief inspector in an approval.

(2)

The load on the platform over any one bay of a suspended scaffolding, constructed in accordance with this section, due to the weight of workers and materials shall not exceed 1 200 pounds and the gross weight, that is, the weight of scaffolding platforms, machine, ropes, workers and materials on any one outrigger shall not exceed 1 800 pounds or the load that is approved.

Inspection

(3)

The moving parts of every scaffolding machine shall be inspected at least twice a month and a record shall be kept of the findings of the inspections.

(4)

This record shall be accessible to an inspector at all times.

(5)

The owner of a scaffolding machine shall be notified to at once replace any defective or worn parts and the use of the machine shall be discontinued until the required replacements have been made.

(6)

In addition the owner or lessor of every scaffolding machine shall make a monthly inspection of every scaffolding machine in use and a record of the findings shall be kept.

(7)

This record shall also be accessible to an inspector at all times.

(8)

When a scaffolding machine is removed from a location, it shall be thoroughly inspected and overhauled before again being used.

Platform

(9)

The total width of the working platform shall not exceed 5 feet.

(10)

The working platform shall be formed of scaffold planks laid so that their edges abut and fit tight.

(11)

Scaffold planks shall be of Oregon pine not less than 10 inches wide and 2 inches thick.

(12)

Each scaffold plank shall overlap its support by at least 12 inches but not more than 24 inches at the ends of the scaffolding.

(13)

The ends of the scaffold planks of each unit, comprising 4 machines, shall be cleated and the cleats shall be made of 4 inches by 11/2 inches timber, or of 2 inches by 3/8 of an inch steel placed near the ends of the planks and outside the bearers and be so arranged as to ensure that the ends of the planks cannot lose their bearing on a bearer.

(14)

Each scaffold plank shall be secured to the cleats by bolts not less than 3/8 of an inch in diameter.

(15)

Every such platform shall be supported on bearers made of steel, or other approved metal, having a transverse strength at least equivalent to a 2 inches by 2 inches by 3/8 of a inch Australian Standard steel angle section.

Guardrails and fender boards

(16)

Guardrails constructed in conformity with this regulation shall be effectively secured at a height of not less than 3 feet above the platform surface.

(17)

Fender boards 9 inches high and 11/2 inches thick shall be effectively secured on the outside, inside and ends of each platform.

Prevention of swaying

(18)

Ropes or hooks shall be used and fastened to the platform of the scaffolding and to the building or structure in such way and at such intervals as to prevent the scaffolding swaying away from the building or structure.

(19)

Likewise fenders shall be provided if required to prevent the scaffolding from swinging against the building or structure.

Suspended scaffolding machines

(20)

No scaffolding machine, winch or other like mechanism shall be used as the lifting or lowering mechanism of a suspended scaffolding unless drawings, or a sample of the machine, winch, or mechanism, together with a complete description in writing of how the machine, winch, or mechanism is to be set up, used, and maintained, have previously been submitted to the chief inspector and have been approved.

(21)

All such machines, winches, and mechanisms shall be designed, set up, used and maintained as provided in the section and in accordance with the approved design and description, and while in use shall be kept lubricated and maintained in an efficient state of repair, free from accumulation of dust, dirt or foreign matter.

Wire ropes for suspended scaffolding

(22)

Steel wire ropes of approved flexibility shall be used for suspended scaffolding.

(23)

The terminal ends of every such rope shall be effectively secured to anchorages of ultimate strength at least equal to that of the rope.

(24)

Ropes shall be evenly wound on the drum and not more rope than can be accommodated between the drum flanges shall be wound on the drum.

Platform steel structural members

(25)

The steel structural members of a suspended scaffolding platform shall be so designed, constructed and used that under maximum conditions of loading the stress in each and every part of the members and in the connections of one part or member to another shall not exceed that prescribed by part 11.

Cantilevers supporting a suspended scaffolding

(26)

The cantilevers constituting the overhead supports for a suspended scaffolding shall be rolled steel joist sections at least equivalent in strength to a 7 inches by 31/2 inches by 15 pounds per running foot Australian Standard rolled steel joist section.

(27)

The cantilevers shall be at least 15 feet in length and they shall not project more than 6 feet 6 inches from the outside point of support on a building or structure.

(28)

These cantilevers shall be spaced at not more than 10 feet apart measured from the longitudinal centre-line of one to the longitudinal centre-line of the adjacent cantilever.

Supports for suspended scaffolding cantilevers

(29)

Every such cantilever shall be provided with an adequate and firm support and the support shall be so arranged that the projecting or cantilever part shall be as short as possible.

Fixing of suspended scaffolding cantilevers

(30)

The inner end of each cantilever shall—

(a)

be secured to the building or structure with bolts or other suitable fittings; or

(b)

be counterbalanced with weights in accordance with the provisions of part 11; or

(c)

be shored from a higher floor or steel frame of a building or structure, provided that every shore used is positively secured in its correct position and in such a way that no lateral movement can occur, and provided further that every shore so used is of adequate strength for the purpose and is so placed and fixed that undue load is not imposed on any part of the building or structure supporting the cantilever.

(31)

The bolts or other fittings mentioned in subsection (30) (a), and also the parts of the building or structure to which the cantilever is fixed, shall provide a factor of safety of at least 4 under maximum conditions of loading.

Suspended scaffolding cantilever supports

(32)

Every platform or structure, or beam, bearer, or other structural member used for supporting any such cantilever and the loads from it or from any counterbalance or used for supporting and transferring the weight of counterbalance to cantilever, or used for transferring the loads from a cantilever to part of a building or structure shall be of such construction that a factor of safety of at least 6 shall obtain in all timber parts, taking into consideration the resultant loads from the cantilever when the suspended scaffolding is fully loaded, and also, when the scaffolding is unloaded.

(33)

Every such platform, or structure, or beam, bearer, or other structural member shall be so constructed and fixed and secured that lateral movement cannot occur in any direction.

Bolt diameters

(34)

Every bolt used for anchoring a cantilever or used in connections in the structure supporting a cantilever or for securing a shore in position, or for securing bracing or other structural member shall not be less than 5/8 of an inch in diameter and shall be provided with standard washers.

Weight of cantilever counterbalance

(35)

The net weight of the counterbalance on any cantilever shall not be less than 3 times that necessary to balance the load on the projecting part of the cantilever when the scaffolding is fully loaded.

Suspended scaffolding rope anchors

(36)

A fitting of mild steel stock having sectional dimensions not less than 2 inches by 3/8 of an inch shall be fitted at the outer end of every suspended scaffolding cantilever for the purpose of anchoring the scaffolding suspension rope or rope block.

(37)

Every such fitting shall fit snug at the top and sides of the cantilever.

(38)

Each leg shall be so forged as to make an angle of not less than 75° with the bottom surface of the cantilever, until the inside faces of each leg are 1 inch apart.

(39)

Each leg shall then be forged so as to assume a vertical position.

(40)

The legs are to be of such length that the vertical portions are parallel for not less than 21/2 inches.

(41)

The vertical part of each leg shall then be drilled to take a 3/4 of an inch diameter steel bolt, the centre of the bolt hole being not less than 1 inch distant from the lower bend.

(42)

A steel bolt not less than 3/4 of an inch in diameter shall be inserted in the holes in the vertical legs, the bolt nut then being screwed on and the end of the bolt riveted over, or alternatively a split pin may be fitted in a hole drilled through the bolt end outside the nut.

(43)

Every such fitting shall be secured to the cantilever by a bolt through the sides of the fitting and through the mid-section of the cantilever web or by a bolt passing through the cantilever web nearer the end of the cantilever than the spot where the fitting is positioned.

Use of suspended scaffolding machines

(44)

No person under 18 years old and no person unless specifically authorised by his or her employer so to do, shall work a machine, winch, or mechanism used for raising or lowering a suspended scaffolding and no person shall in any way interfere with it.

(45)

No person shall employ, instruct or direct any person under 18 years old to act in contravention of this provision.

(46)

The handles of the scaffolding machine, winch, or mechanism shall be left in that position that will prevent the platform from descending when the machine, winch, or mechanism is not actually in use for raising or lowering the platform.

Platform to be kept level

(47)

The process of raising and lowering a suspended scaffolding shall be such as to ensure that the working platform shall remain substantially level.

Restrictions on use of suspended scaffolding

(48)

Suspended scaffolding shall not be used if in the opinion of an inspector—

(a)

the position of the scaffolding and the conditions under which the scaffolding is or would be used are dangerous to human life or limb; or

(b)

the building or structure to which the scaffolding is attached or is proposed to be attached is not suitable for safely supporting a suspended scaffolding; or

(c)

the scaffolding is not suitable for the work contemplated.

Light swinging stages

91 .

Designs to be submitted

(1)

If it is impracticable to construct and use a light swinging stage of a type conforming to the requirements of this section, completely detailed working drawings together with a full description of the proposed methods of use of the light swinging stage proposed to be erected and used shall be submitted to the chief inspector and be approved before any person is allowed on the stage.

Working platform

(2)

The working platform of a light swinging stage shall be not less than 20 inches nor more than 24 inches wide and shall be formed of straight grained oregon scaffolding planks not less than 11/2 inches thick, running the full length of the platform.

(3)

These planks shall be stiffened with strong cleats fixed at the centre and immediately adjacent to each hanger.

(4)

The total length of the working platform shall not exceed 18 feet and the span of the scaffold planks from the centre-line of one hanger to the centre-line of the other shall not exceed 12 feet.

(5)

The overhang of the scaffold planks at each end shall not exceed 1/4 of the distance between the centre-lines of the hangers.

Guardrails and toe boards

(6)

A guardrail of straight grained Oregon pine having sectional dimensions not less than 3 inches by 2 inches or of galvanised steel water pipe of 1 inch internal diameter, or of a section and material ensuring equivalent strength and stiffness for the span, securely fastened to the hangers at not less than 30 inches above the surface of the working platform shall be provided on the outer side of the platform, and also, if in the opinion of an inspector it is necessary in the interests of safety to human life and limb, on the inside and ends of the platform.

(7)

A toe board of not less than 6 inches by 1 inch sectional dimensions shall be provided and securely fixed on edge on the other side of the platform in all cases and if material or tools are to be loosely placed on the platform, a toe board of like section is to be provided on both sides and ends.

Hangers

(8)

The hangers supporting the working platform of a light swinging stage shall be constructed of steel bar 2 inches by 1/2 an inch sectional dimensions or of steel rod 1 inch in diameter.

(9)

Each hanger shall pass under the platform planks and shall be securely fixed to them.

(10)

The distance measured between the vertical legs of a hanger shall not exceed that necessary to accommodate the full width of the platform scaffold planks.

(11)

An anchorage of approved design shall be incorporated in the construction of each hanger, such anchorage to be used for the purpose of attaching the bottom block of the rope tackle used for raising and lowering the platform.

Tackle for raising and lowering light swinging stagesrope

(12)

The fall rope of a tackle used for raising and lowering a light swinging stage shall be constructed of Manila or sisal fibre, shall be not less than 21/2 inches in circumference and shall be reeved through a double and a single block so as to form 4 parts of rope.

(13)

At all times other than when the stage is being raised or lowered the hauling part of the fibre rope is to be made fast with a self-locking hitch to the lower block.

Tackle for raising and lowering light swinging stagesfibre rope blocks

(14)

The carcase of every block for fibre rope, both single and double sheave, used in the tackle for raising and lowering a light swinging stage, shall be constructed of steel and the sheaves of each such block shall be not less than 4 inches in diameter, measured at the bottom of the rope groove.

(15)

The rope groove shall be of such size and shape as to afford ample support for the fibre rope passing over the sheave.

(16)

No such block shall, unless approved, be used in which the rope anchorage or becket is fixed to the block carcase by welding.

(17)

Rope blocks shall be adequately secured to a needle by a steel wire rope lashing or by a steel fitting designed in conformity with the requirements of part 11.

(18)

The mouth of every rope block hook shall be moused to prevent inadvertent displacement.

Needles

(19)

For this section, the cantilevers from which a light swinging stage tackle is suspended shall be known as needles.

(20)

Timber needles of at least equivalent strength to Oregon pine shall in no case be of smaller sectional dimensions than 6 inches by 4 inches and shall be placed on edge.

(21)

If needles of this minimum section are used, the point of suspension of the fall rope top block shall not be more than 2 feet from the point of bearing of the needle on the building or structure.

(22)

If this dimension cannot be kept within this limit, needles of larger sectional dimensions shall be used and the transverse strength of such larger section shall bear the same proportion to a 6 inch by 4 inch section on edge as the longer length of the cantilevered portion bears to 2 feet.

(23)

If timber needles are counterbalanced, their length shall not be less than 12 feet and not less than 9 feet of the length shall be on the counterbalanced side.

Fixing of needles

(24)

Needles shall either be firmly secured to the building or structure with bolts, approved steel fittings, or lashing, designed in conformity with the provisions of part 11 or they shall be counterbalanced with weights in accordance with that part.

(25)

Provision shall be made to prevent needles turning over or moving laterally, and any planking, platform or other structure provided for supporting needles or the counterbalance on needles shall have adequate strength to sustain the maximum weight imposed without undue deflection.

Counterbalance

(26)

The net weight of the counterbalance on any needle shall not be less than 3 times the weight necessary to balance the weight of the load on the projecting part of a needle when the stage is fully loaded.

(27)

In calculating the net weight of counterbalance, due regard shall be given to the points of suspension of the stage, the disposition of the counterbalance, and the point of substantial bearing of the needle between them.

(28)

Every such counterbalance shall be secured to the needles in a way that will prevent it accidentally shifting or being inadvertently removed.

(29)

Sand or liquids shall not be used as a counterbalance.

Use of parapet hooks prohibited

(30)

A parapet hook shall not be used for the purpose of suspending a light swinging stage.

Stage to be kept level

(31)

In raising and lowering a light swinging stage the process shall be carried out in such a way as to ensure that the platform will remain substantially level.

Winches for light swinging stages

(32)

A machine, winch or other mechanism may be used for raising and lowering a light swinging stage provided that—

(a)

a design; or

(b)

a sample together with a written description of how the machine, winch or mechanism is to be set up, used and maintained;

has previously been submitted to the chief inspector and has been approved.

(33)

All such machines, winches and mechanisms shall be designed, set up, used, and maintained as provided in the section and in accordance with the approved design and description, and while in use they shall be kept lubricated and maintained in an efficient state of repair and free from any accumulation of dust, dirt, or foreign matter.

(34)

Ropes shall be wound evenly on the drum of such machine, winch or mechanism and not more rope than can be accommodated between the drum flanges shall be wound on the drum.

(35)

The handles of all such machines, winches and mechanisms when not actually in use for raising or lowering shall be kept in that position that will prevent the stage from descending.

Restrictions of light swinging stages

(36)

Light swinging stages shall not be used where, in the opinion of an inspector—

(a)

the position of the scaffolding and the conditions under which the scaffolding is or would be used are dangerous to human life and limb; or

(b)

the building or structure to which the scaffolding is attached or is proposed to be attached is not suitable for safely supporting the type of scaffolding used or proposed to be used; or

(c)

the scaffolding is not suitable for the work contemplated.

(37)

No person under 18 years old and no person unless specially authorised by his or her employer so to do shall work a machine, winch or mechanism used for raising or lowering a light swinging stage and no person shall interfere with it.

(38)

No person shall employ, instruct, or direct any person under 18 years old to act in contravention of this provision.

Inspection

(39)

Immediately before the erection of a light swinging stage and at frequent intervals afterwards, the person actually responsible for erecting the stage and the scaffolder in charge of the work shall inspect all parts of the stage and its supports and satisfy himself or herself as to its safety and conformity with the section.

Boatswain’s chairs

92 .

Seat construction

(1)

The seat of a boatswain’s chair shall be constructed of timber not less than 1 inch in thickness and the seat shall be so arranged that a person seated in it shall have a seating space of not less than 18 inches by 10 inches.

(2)

Cleats made of timber not less than 3 inches by 1 inch sectional dimensions shall be firmly fixed to the ends of the timber, on the underside, forming the seat.

Slings

(3)

The slings supporting the seat of a boatswain’s chair shall be of fibre rope, not less than 11/2 inches in circumference.

(4)

These slings shall be crossed underneath the chair seat and each leg shall pass through a suitable hole, 1 in each of the 4 corners of the seat and be arranged to form a loop over the seat to take a rope pulley block hook.

(5)

These slings shall be fixed to the underside of the seat to prevent the seat tilting in the slings.

Tackleblocks

(6)

The rope blocks included in the tackle for suspending and raising and lowering a boatswain’s chair shall be 1 (one) 2-sheave upper block and a single sheave lower block.

(7)

The carcase of each block shall be of steel and the rope anchor or becket on the bottom block shall not unless approved be fixed to the block by welding.

(8)

The rope sheaves shall be not less than 4 inches in diameter and they shall be grooved to accommodate the tackle rope.

Tacklerope

(9)

The rope of the tackle suspending a boatswain’s chair shall be of either Manila or sisal fibre.

(10)

The rope shall be so reeved as to form a 4-part rope tackle and shall be not less than 2 inches in circumference.

Support

(11)

All overhead support for a boatswain’s chair shall be safely secured in position and shall be of sufficient strength to sustain not less than 4 times the weight to be suspended from it.

Inspection

(12)

Immediately before the erection of a boatswain’s chair, and at frequent intervals afterwards, the person actually responsible for the erection of the chair, or the person in charge of the work, shall inspect the overhead supports and the tackle to see that it is safe for use and in use.

Scaffolding for use on ships in dock or on slips

93 .

Large flying stagesworking platforms

(1)

The working platform of this type of scaffolding shall be Oregon pine planks not less than 12 inches by 3 inches sectional dimensions and if the distance between the ropes supporting the stage exceeds 18 feet an intermediate supporting rope shall be used.

(2)

Staging planks shall lap at least 4 feet.

Large flying stagesstage ropes

(3)

The stage ropes shall be flexible steel wire ropes not less than 11/2 inches in circumference and shall have a long eye spliced in one end to go round planks, the eye to be not less than 4 feet 6 inches in length.

(4)

A short eye shall be spliced in the other end to take a tail rope.

(5)

Tail ropes shall be flexible steel wire ropes not less than 11/2 inches in circumference and of sufficient length to pass over the bulwarks.

(6)

Stage ropes shall be attached to planks, in the middle of plank laps, with 1 full turn of the large eye.

Large flying stagesguys

(7)

A sufficient number of guy ropes shall be used to secure proper steadiness of every stage.

(8)

The guys shall be of flexible steel wire, not less than 11/4 inches in circumference with fibre tail ropes not less than 2 inches in circumference.

(9)

Guy and tail ropes shall be attached by means of spliced eyes.

(10)

All stages shall have effective end guys.

Large flying stageslife-lines

(11)

All stages shall be provided with life-lines of not less than 21/2 inch circumference fibre rope properly secured to the stage ropes by means of fibre rope lanyards not less than 11/4 inches in circumference at a height of not less than 2 feet 6 inches above the surface of the planks.

Small flying stagesworking platform

(12)

The working platform of this type of scaffolding shall be Oregon pine planks not less than 12 inches by 2 inches sectional dimensions and not more than 14 feet in length.

Small flying stagesstage ropes

(13)

The stage ropes shall be flexible steel wire ropes not less than 1 inch in circumference and shall be attached to planks by making 1 full turn around the plank, seizing the rope beneath the plank and stapling it in position at the sides of the plank.

(14)

The stage ropes shall be attached to flexible steel wire tail ropes not less than 11/4 inches in circumference and of sufficient length to pass over the bulwarks.

Small flying stagesdistance spars

(15)

Small flying stages shall be provided with spars securely fixed to planks, and sufficiently long to ensure effective working conditions.

Small flying stageslife-lines

(16)

When it is necessary for workers to work standing on small flying stages an efficient life-line shall be provided.

Small flying stagesrestriction of use

(17)

A small flying stage shall not be used in any operation in which power operated tools are employed.

Suspended stages for engineers and boilermakers—general

(18)

All suspended stages for the use of engineers and boilermakers shall be so designed and constructed as to bear not less than 3 times the weight of the load to be put on them.

Suspended stages for engineers and boilermakerssuspension

(19)

This type of stage must be suspended from overhead catheads or needles of adequate strength properly lashed or otherwise securely and safely fixed in position.

Suspended stages for engineers and boilermakersworking platform

(20)

The working platform of this type of scaffolding shall comprise Oregon pine planks not less than 12 inches by 3 inches free from knots and shakes.

(21)

It shall be supported at intervals of not more than 14 feet and shall be not less than 2 planks in width.

(22)

Planks shall lap at least 4 feet.

Suspended stages for engineers and boilermakersplatform bearers

(23)

Platform spawls or bearers shall be of Oregon pine or other approved timber not less than 6 inches by 6 inches sectional dimensions.

Suspended stages for engineers and boilermakerssupporting ropes

(24)

The supporting ropes for this type of stage shall be flexible steel wire ropes not less than 11/2 inches in circumference.

(25)

They shall be secured to the overhead needles or catheads and to the plank spawls or bearers.

Suspended stages for engineers and boilermakerslife-lines

(26)

If the use of life-lines will not interfere with the operations being carried on and workers have to work standing on a stage, life-lines of not less than 21/2 inches circumference fibre rope shall be effectively lashed to the supporting ropes or to special stanchions by means of rope lanyards 11/2 inches in circumference.

Suspended stages for engineers and boilermakersguys

(27)

Guy ropes of adequate strength and sufficient in number shall be used to secure proper steadiness of every such stage.

Suspended stages for engineers and boilermakerssmaller stages

(28)

Stages in which the distance between supports is appreciably less than provided for in this section may have planks and spawls of lesser dimensions than provided for in this section subject to the scaffolding having a strength equivalent to the scaffolding covered by this section.

Engineers and boilermakers trestle scaffolds

(29)

Trestles conforming to the requirements of this regulation may be used for supporting a working platform of adequate strength for engineers and boilermakers.

Access to Stages

(30)

Safe means of access shall be provided to all stages used on ships in dock or on slips.

(31)

If a builders’ ladder is used as a means of access, it shall extend to a height of at least 3 feet 6 inches above the place of landing for persons using the ladder.

Runs and ramps

94 .

(1)

All runs, ramps, gangways and similar structures used as a means of communication in building work shall be of sound material, good construction, adequate strength, free from patent defects and be safe for the purposes for which they are intended.

(2)

They shall be constructed of timber planks not less than 10 inches by 2 inches sectional dimensions and shall be not less than 2 feet 6 inches wide.

(3)

When the planks overlap, the plank that runs from below shall be placed so that it laps over the one running from above.

(4)

Such planks shall be positively fixed in position.

(5)

The supports for the planks shall be of adequate strength and shall be effectively braced.

(6)

The construction of runs, ramps and gangways at an incline greater than 1 foot rise in 3 feet is prohibited.

(7)

The planks of runs, ramps and gangways shall be cleated or otherwise fastened together to prevent unequal sagging.

(8)

If runs, ramps and gangways are more than 8 feet in height, the outside edges at least shall be provided with guardrails and toe boards.

Part 7 Safeguards and measures to be taken for securing the safety and health of persons engaged in excavation work

Division 7.1 General

95 .

(1)

An adequate supply of timber of the required dimensions, or other approved material, shall if necessary be provided and used to prevent, so far as is reasonably practicable and as early as is reasonably practicable in the course of the work, danger to any person employed from a fall or dislodgment of earth, rock or other material forming the side of or adjacent to any excavation work.

(2)

In addition to any other examination necessary to ensure compliance with this regulation, every part of an excavation work, other than a part to which subsection (3) (a) applies, shall be specially examined before any person works in it and afterwards at least once in every period of 7 days for the purpose of ensuring compliance with this regulation and in particular to see that timber and other supports are adequate, properly secured and in good condition.

(3)

However—

(a)

subsections (1) and (2) shall not apply if, having regard to the nature and slope of the side of the excavation and other circumstances, no fall or dislodgment of earth or other material so as to bury or trap a person employed, or so as to strike a person employed from a height of more than 5 feet is liable to occur; and

(b)

subsections (1) and (2) shall not apply in relation to a person actually engaged in timbering or other work (including an examination as mentioned in subsection (2)) that is being carried out for the purpose of compliance with subsections (1) and (2), if appropriate precautions are taken to ensure his or her safety as far as circumstances permit; and

(c)

the requirement in subsection (2) as to a special examination once in every 7 days shall not apply until the work has been in progress for a period of 5 working days (whether continuous or not).

(4)

No excavation work that is likely to reduce, so as to endanger any person employed, the security or stability of any part of any building or structure, whether temporary or permanent, shall be begun or continued unless adequate steps are taken before and during the progress of the work to prevent danger to any person employed from collapse of the building or structure or the fall of any part of it.

(5)

Timbering used to retain or support any part of an excavation work shall be of good construction, sound material and adequate strength for the purpose for which it is used.

(6)

If any timbering used to retain or support any part of an excavation work is liable to inward movement at the bottom and bracing or strutting at the bottom is not practicable, the timbering shall be adequately strutted or braced at a higher level so as to prevent such movement.

(7)

All struts, braces and walings in any excavation work shall be properly and adequately secured so as to prevent their accidental displacement or fall.

(8)

Safe means of access shall be provided to every place where persons are employed in an excavation work.

(9)

If there is reason to apprehend danger to persons employed in any excavation work due to rising water or from an irruption of water or material, there shall be provided means to enable every person to reach a position of safety.

(10)

If persons are employed in a shift and other persons are working above them, there shall be provided as early as is reasonably practicable an effective diaphragm to prevent the firstmentioned persons from being struck by tools or other objects falling from the place where the other persons are working.

(11)

The doors in the diaphragms shall be as small as practicable, shall open upwards and shall be kept closed except when necessarily open for the passage of persons and gear.

(12)

Every accessible part of an excavation work into which a person is liable to fall a distance of more than 6 feet shall be provided with a suitable barrier to a height of at least 3 feet and as close as is reasonably practicable to the edge.

(13)

However, subsection (12) shall not apply to any part of an excavation work while (and to the extent to which) the absence of the barrier is necessary for the access of persons or for the movement of plant, gear, or materials or while (and to the extent to which) it has not yet been practicable to erect the barrier since the formation of that part of the excavation work.

(14)

Material shall not be placed or stacked near the edge of any excavation work so as to endanger persons employed below.

(15)

No load shall be placed or moved near the edge of any excavation work where it is likely to cause a collapse of the side of the excavation work and thereby endanger any person.

Division 7.2 Cofferdams and caissons

96 .

(1)

Every cofferdam or caisson and every part of it shall be of good construction, sound material, and adequate strength and shall be properly maintained.

(2)

A cofferdam or caisson shall if necessary be specially secured in position so as to prevent movement in a way dangerous to persons employed.

(3)

The bracings and ties of every cofferdam or caisson shall be properly and adequately secured to prevent their accidental displacement or fall.

(4)

The person in charge of the work of constructing, placing in position, substantially adding to, altering, or dismantling a cofferdam or caisson, and as far as possible every worker employed for any such work, shall possess adequate experience of this kind of work.

(5)

All material for the construction or fixing of a cofferdam or caisson shall be inspected on each occasion before being taken into use for such a purpose, and material that is unsuitable or defective in any respect shall not be so used.

(6)

Safe means of access shall be provided to every place where persons are employed in a cofferdam or caisson.

(7)

Adequate means for persons to reach places of safety shall be provided in every cofferdam or caisson in case of an inrush of water.

Division 7.3 Trenches

97 .

(1)

All trenches of over 8 feet in length and 5 feet or more in depth in hard compact ground shall be braced at intervals not exceeding 6 feet with 6 inches by 11/4 inches hardwood runners or heavier material, placed vertically in the trench opposite each other against the trench walls.

(2)

The runners shall, if possible, extend to the bottom of the trench, otherwise as low as possible to clear the top of the pipe, sewer, conduit, or other material to be placed in the bottom of the trench.

(3)

Runners shall be supported by walings placed horizontally and held in position by screw-jacks or by struts.

(4)

Side and end walings abutting at the corners of excavations shall be joined by halving one to the other so that each waling will sustain its correct proportion of any external load imposed on them.

(5)

The cross-sectional dimensions of hardwood walings shall be not less than 6 inches by 3 inches.

(6)

Walings of other materials or timbers shall be at least of equivalent strength to hardwood walings.

(7)

Walings shall be spaced at not more than 3 feet apart measured vertically from centre to centre of walings.

(8)

Struts or screw-jacks shall be spaced at not more than 6 feet apart except at the joints of walings where they must be closer.

(9)

The cross-sectional dimensions of struts relative to the width of a trench shall be not less than is shown in table 97

Table 97

Width of trenchDimensions of strut
1 foot to 2 feet 11 inches4 inches by 3 inches
3 feet to 4 feet 11 inches6 inches by 3 inches
5 feet to 6 feet 11 inches6 inches by 4 inches
7 feet to 9 feet6 inches by 6 inches
(10)

The timbering of trenches shall proceed as the work of excavation progresses.

(11)

If a mechanical digger is used the timbering shall be kept as close as practicable to the digger but the length of untimbered trench shall not exceed 10 feet, measured from the lower edge of the digger jib.

(12)

Trenches in saturated, filled, or otherwise unstable ground (other than of the nature of wet running sand) shall be close timbered.

(13)

The cross-sectional dimensions of the runners shall be not less than 6 inches by 11/4 inches for hardwood timber runners.

(14)

The cross-sectional dimensions for hardwood timber walings shall be not less than 6 inches by 3 inches and they shall be spaced as required by subsection (7).

(15)

Struts shall be of the cross-sectional dimensions prescribed by subsection (9).

(16)

If running material, as wet running sand, is encountered runners shall be kept 1/2 an inch apart and the spaces thus formed shall be caulked with straw or other suitable material.

(17)

If practicable straw, grass, bags, or other suitable material shall be packed behind the runners.

(18)

Walings and struts shall be of the materials and cross-sectional dimensions and shall be placed as prescribed, respectively, by subsections (5) to (7) and subsections (8) and (9).

(19)

An inspector, should the inspector considers it necessary, may order heavier timbering than that prescribed by this section.

(20)

Excavated material shall not be placed nearer than 1 foot to the edge of a trench.

(21)

For a trench in running material, provided circumstances permit, no material shall be placed nearer than 3 feet to the edge of the trench.

(22)

All trenches 5 feet or more in depth shall be supplied with 1 ladder for each 200 feet of trench or fraction of it, which ladder shall extend from the bottom of the trench to at least 3 feet 6 inches above the top.

Division 7.4 Shafts, wells and tunnels

98 .

(1)

Every shaft and well shall be securely cased, lined or otherwise made safe.

(2)

Every drive and tunnel shall be securely protected and made safe for persons employed in it.

(3)

All entrances between the bottom of every shaft and the poppet head pulley wheel shall be securely fenced, including any entrances from an elevated platform.

(4)

Any fence or cover may be temporarily removed, to facilitate the work that is in progress, if proper precautions are taken.

(5)

If a fence or cover has been removed from any shaft entrance to allow work to proceed, 2 horizontal bars shall be fixed across the entrance not less than 2 feet nor more than 4 feet from the floor.

(6)

If access to workings is by way of a shaft and the shaft is also used for haulage purposes, the shaft shall be divided into 2 compartments, one to be used for a ladder way the other for haulage purposes.

(7)

The ladder way compartment must be securely fenced from the haulage compartment.

(8)

In addition to any mechanical means of ingress and egress, every shaft shall have at least 1 proper ladder or footway communicating from the surface to the workings.

(9)

A ladder permanently used in a shaft for the ascent and descent of persons shall not be fixed in a vertical or overhanging position, except in shafts used exclusively for pumping, and every such ladder shall be inclined at the most convenient angle that the space in which the ladder is fixed allows.

(10)

Every ladder-shaft shall have substantial platforms fixed at intervals of not more than 20 feet.

Part 8 Safeguards and measures to be taken for securing the safety and health of persons engaged in compressed air work

Division 8.1 Diving

99 .

Age limits

(1)

No person under 20 years old or over 55 years old shall dive, and no person shall employ any such person to dive except that the upper age limit of 55 years old may be exceeded for divers with special qualifications who after special medical examination have been certified by a medical officer as being fit to continue to dive after having reached the upper age limit.

Instruction

(2)

No diver and no attendant shall engage or be employed in a diving operation unless the person has received such instruction in the work that the person is capable of carrying out his or her duties safely.

(3)

This instruction shall be such that it will impart a full working knowledge of the safe use of signals, compression and decompression tables, diving dress with its ancillary fittings and gear, of air pumps, pressure gauges and depth gauges.

Appointment of medical officers

(4)

A legally qualified doctor shall be appointed to carry out the duties prescribed by this section as being the duties of a medical officer.

(5)

The chief inspector shall be notified in writing of the name and address of the medical officer so appointed.

Preliminary medical examinations

(6)

No person shall dive or be employed to dive unless on or after such date the person has been examined by an appointed medical officer, and has been certified by the medical officer as being fit to work in compressed air.

(7)

The examination shall include an X-ray examination of the chest.

(8)

The medical officer’s report shall be kept and produced to an inspector on demand.

Supervision of health during diving work

(9)

It shall be the duty of the medical officer to inform each diver at the time of a preliminary medical examination that any attack of ‘bends’ (pains in the joints and limbs or abdomen), giddiness, vomiting or difficulty in breathing, disease of the heart, lungs, kidneys, genital organs, a chill, or any other disease that may come on the person during or after work may have the most serious consequences to his or her health and the person shall be instructed that immediately on noticing any such indisposition the person must report it to the medical officer, or to a medical orderly, or failing either, to the contractor or a responsible representative of the contractor.

(10)

The symptoms and treatment of compressed air illness as set out in schedule 9 shall be exhibited in a conspicuous position in the divers’ change room.

(11)

A contractor shall not allow any person—

(a)

known to be suffering from bends, cold in the head, sore throat, or any other illness or disease; or

(b)

under the influence of intoxicating liquor;

to be employed under water as a diver.

(12)

If divers are employed continuously in diving operations they shall be medically re-examined regularly at the following intervals:

a working at depths less than 60 feet—every 6 months;

b working at depths between 60 feet and 90 feet—every 3 months;

c working at depths in excess of 90 feet—every 4 weeks,

and unless so re-examined and found fit as mentioned in this section no person shall dive or be employed to dive.

(13)

A diver who has been absent from work due to illness of any kind for more than 7 days, or has been absent from work due to any other cause, except for recreation, for a period of more than 3 weeks shall not dive or be employed to dive without first producing a certificate of fitness from the medical officer.

(14)

No person shall dive or be employed to dive after 12 months or any lesser period that the medical officer may determine, has elapsed from the date of the last X-ray examination of his or her chest.

Compressed air workers’ badge

(15)

It shall be the duty of a contractor to supply to every diver in the contractor’s employ a compressed air worker’s badge.

(16)

It shall be the duty of every diver at all times to wear a compressed air worker’s badge.

(17)

A compressed air worker’s badge shall be made of non-corrodible metal and shall be arranged to be worn either in a coat lapel or suspended by a chain or cord placed around the neck.

(18)

The badge shall be in the form of a disc, 11/4 inches in diameter and not less than 1/16 of an inch in thickness.

(19)

The face shall bear the following inscription, arranged in the following way:

Safe diving periods

(20)

Except in case of emergency, no person shall dive or be employed to dive under water in any period of 24 hours for longer than the total times and periods corresponding to the depth of dive set out in table 99.1:

Table 99.1 Safe diving periods for varying depths*

depth of dive
feet
pressure lb. per sq. inchsafe diving period*
hours minutes
0—420—181/260provided that the period of any dive shall not exceed 11/2 hours duration, and that 15 minutes is allowed on the surface after each such period
42—60181/2—261/250provided that the period of any dive shall not exceed 1 hour duration, and that 15 minutes is allowed on the surface after each such period
60—66261/2—291/230provided that the period of any dive shall not exceed 1 hour duration, and that 15 minutes is allowed on the surface after each such period
66—72291/2—3220
72—7832—341/2130
78—84341/2—37115
84—9037—4010
90—9640—421/2. .55
96—108421/2—48. .40
108—12048—531/2. .35
120—132531/2—59. .30
132—14459—641/2. .25
144—156641/2—70. .20
156—16870—75. .16
168—18075—801/2. .14

* Safe diving period means the time spent within any period of 24 hours from the beginning of the first descent to the beginning of the last ascent.

(21)

If, in the case of emergency, it is necessary for a diver to remain under water at a depth of 66 feet or over for a period of time exceeding the limits set out in table 99.1, the decompression of the diver shall be regulated in the way set out in schedule 7, table 7.1.

(22)

When a diver is brought to the surface with stoppages in accordance with schedule 7, table 7.1, the diver shall not dive or be employed to dive again within 12 hours except in case of grave emergency.

(23)

Should it be necessary for a diver to descend a 2nd time to a depth of 66 feet or over with an interval of less than 4 hours between the 2 descents, the following method of calculating the stoppages required shall be observed:

(a)

read from schedule 7, table 7.2 the stoppages for the 2nd dive and from schedule 7, table 7.1, the stoppages required for a dive of duration equal to that of the 2 dives combined; and

(b)

divide the number of stoppages by 2 for those at the greater depth check the diver for the periods shown for the 2nd dive, and for the remainder check the diver for the periods shown for the combined dive, and should there be an odd number of stoppages the greater number shall be used for the dive as combined.

(24)

The tables shall be interpreted to give the diver the maximum time in the minimum depth of water.

(25)

Stoppages at 20 feet and 10 feet are the most beneficial to the diver.

Decompression

(26)

When the prescribed limits of time under water have not been exceeded, the stoppages in ascending shall be as shown in schedule 7, table 7.2.

(27)

The stoppage points shall be determined by the attendant who shall be guided by the depth gauge readings after making due allowance for gauge error.

(28)

The diver shall not be brought up from the bottom to the first stopping place at a rate faster than 1 foot in 1 second, and his or her ascent shall be at once checked if this rate is exceeded.

(29)

While the diver is ascending, the diver must undertake as much gymnastic exercise as possible, especially using those muscles that were in use on the bottom.

Air supply

(30)

The minimum quantity of air supplied to divers at various depths shall be as set out in table 99.2, except that during the descent the pump shall be operated at the maximum revolutions or the air supply shall be considerably increased:

Table 99.2 Quantity of air required by a diver at various depths

depthquantity of air at atmospheric pressure required per minute*number of cylinders needed*revolutions of hand pump per Minute
Fathomsftcu. ft
001.5115
23/4162.2122
51/2333.0130
11664.5222
161/2996.0230
221327.5421
271/21659.0427
33198†10.5

* These figures are based on a double-acting pump with cylinder diameter 4 inches, stroke 71/2 inches, working at 80%, efficiency.

† Handworked pumps are unsuitable at a depth of 180 feet and over.

(31)

Not more than 1 diver shall be supplied from each air line.

Air Pipe

(32)

The air pipe shall be constructed of alternate layers of rubber and canvas and shall be reinforced with steel wire.

(33)

The piping shall have been tested by the manufacturer and shall withstand a test pressure of 200 pounds per square inch without showing any appreciable increase in diameter.

(34)

The manufacturer shall provide a certificate of test for each length of pipe manufactured.

(35)

A length of about 50 feet of floating air hose may be attached to the diver’s helmet to keep weight off the diver.

(36)

No person shall dive or be employed to dive under water unless—

(a)

a sufficient number of suitable and competent persons are also employed in attendance on the diver, so as to ensure his or her safety; and

(b)

there is provided and used suitable and sufficient diving equipment consisting of helmets, corselets, waterproof dresses to completely enclose a diver’s body, and warm clothing; and

(c)

such equipment to include at least 1 diving helmet and dress with its necessary equipment and warm clothing in excess of the number of divers under water at any one time; and

(d)

sufficient and suitable diving plant and equipment, including air pumps, pressure gauges and means of access to and from the water are provided and properly maintained.

Care and testing of equipment—hand pumps

(37)

Pumps shall be maintained in an efficient condition and shall be capable of delivering the necessary quantity of air against pressure for at least 2 divers.

(38)

Particular care shall be given to the condition of the leather piston cups and piston rod glands to prevent leakage.

(39)

Pump delivery shall be measured at least every 3 months and at shorter intervals if the pump has not been performing satisfactorily.

(40)

The pump cylinder walls and pistons shall be lubricated only with olive oil or neatsfoot oil.

(41)

Standby pumps where provided and when not in use shall be turned for a period of 5 minutes at least once in every week.

Care and testing of equipment—gauges

(42)

Gauges shall be calibrated by a method approved by the chief inspector at least every 3 months or at shorter intervals if error is suspected.

(43)

The gauge error, as determined by test, shall be tabulated and a copy of the tabulation shall be displayed inside the pump lid.

Care and testing of equipment—inlet valves

(44)

Inlet valves of helmets in use shall be tested at least once in every 3 months at a pressure of not less than 15 pounds per square inch.

(45)

The springs shall be examined on every occasion before use and at least once in every day while the helmets are in use.

Care and testing of equipment—air pipes

(46)

Air pipes shall be tested at least once a month and immediately before each descent to a pressure equivalent to 25% greater than that at the greatest depth at which a diver is likely to work.

(47)

The air pipe shall be lashed to ring bolts on the pump chest to relieve the connection of the air pipe to the pump nozzle of any undue load from the weight of the air pipe.

(48)

The connection shall be inspected at frequent intervals.

(49)

All air pipe connections shall be effectively lashed to prevent inadvertent disconnection.

Care and testing of equipment—ropes and lines

(50)

Breast ropes, shot ropes and distance lines shall be of tarred hemp or other approved material.

(51)

Ropes shall be carefully handled and shall not be sharply bent.

Care and testing of equipment—dress and equipment

(52)

All diving dress and equipment on the works shall be kept when not in use in a substantially constructed room or locker, and such room or locker shall not be used for the storage of any other gear, tools, or equipment used on the works.

Care and testing of equipment—general

(53)

Air pipes, valves, cocks, corselets, helmets, diving dresses, gauges, ropes, lanyards, and all other apparatus shall be maintained in an efficient condition, cleaned with fresh water after use, drained and dried before being stored in the room or locker provided for the purpose.

(54)

Particular care shall be taken to ensure that air pipes and diving dresses are kept free from condensed moisture and from contact with grease, oil or tar.

(55)

Material for dress repairs shall be provided and made available on the site of the works.

Warm clothing

(56)

Separate sets of warm clothing, woollens or flannels, shall be provided for each diver.

(57)

A diver shall not be required to wear clothing previously worn by another diver unless the clothing has been first thoroughly washed and disinfected.

Diving dress previously worn

(58)

A diver shall not be required to wear a diving dress previously worn by another person unless the inner surfaces of the dress have been first thoroughly washed with hot water and soap and dried in the sun.

Distance line

(59)

A diver working on muddy or dangerous ground shall use a distance line firmly attached to the shot rope about 3 feet above the sinker.

Power driven compressor units—high pressure air supply

(60)

A supply of air at high pressure may be drawn for the use of divers from either the works compressor or a compressor supplying divers equipment only.

Power driven compressor units—compressor

(61)

The compressor shall be capable of delivering air at the required pressure and at a rate sufficient to meet the requirements of all divers, machines, tools and other compressed air equipment supplied from it.

(62)

The compressor shall be of such construction that overheating does not take place, and the lubricant used shall be odourless and shall produce a minimum amount of noxious fumes if overheating should inadvertently take place.

(63)

Provision shall be made at the compressor to prevent undue pressure building up if the delivery pipe from the compressor becomes blocked in any way.

(64)

This provision shall take the form of a safety valve on the air chest of the compressor or on the delivery pipe as it leaves the compressor.

(65)

If the air is supplied by a compressor of such construction, size, or arrangement that, in the event of a breakdown of the power unit, it cannot be instantly worked by hand, the following equipment connected in the order set down in this section shall be used in conjunction with the compressor.

(66)

First, a main air receiver of sufficient capacity shall be connected to supply the maximum number of divers with sufficient air to bring them to the surface in reasonable time in the event of a breakdown of the compressor power unit.

(67)

The pressure maintained in this receiver shall be much higher than that corresponding to the depths of water where the divers are working.

(68)

Every such air receiver shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the Standards Australia, Boiler Code.

(69)

Second, an efficient non-return inlet valve shall be connected on the receiver to prevent back flow of air for failure of the delivery pipe or its fittings.

(70)

Third, a subsidiary air receiver fitted with a spring loaded type safety valve shall be connected.

(71)

Forth, an approved type of pressure-reducing valve fitted in the pipe line between the main air receiver and the subsidiary air receiver shall be connected.

(72)

Fifth, an air filter of approved type shall be connected in the pipe line between the subsidiary air receiver and the air control panel.

(73)

Sixth, an air control panel of robust construction equipped with an air-distributing arrangement of throttle valves, depth gauges and subsidiary receiver pressure gauge, controlling the air supply to the divers shall be connected.

(74)

The throttle valves shall be of the slow acting needle valve type, fitted with graduated dial and pointer and only 1 diver shall be supplied from each such valve.

(75)

The air control panel shall be connected to the air filters by suitable flexible hose and each such hose shall be so supported that undue strain is not imposed on the air filter or air control panel connectors.

(76)

Seventh, emergency air connections and stop valves on the diver’s side of each throttle valve on the air control panel shall be connected.

(77)

Eighth, a manual pump or other reliable source of air supply shall be connected and shall remain connected throughout diving operations.

(78)

The fittings and equipment mentioned in subsections (66) to (77) shall be constructed, used and maintained in accordance with the Standards Australia Code for Work in Compressed Air, Part II—Diving, as at 1 July 1950.

(79)

The control of the air supply shall be in charge of a competent attendant whose duties shall be restricted to the operation of the control panel and attendance on not more than 1 diver.

(80)

When several divers are operating from the 1 air control panel, each diver shall have a separate attendant.

Ladders

(81)

Ladders for divers shall be capable of supporting a safe working load of 4 hundredweights on any one rung.

Signalling system

(82)

No person shall dive or be employed to dive under water unless—

(a)

arrangements are made for a suitable signalling system between the diver and persons on the surface; and

(b)

the diver and all persons in attendance on the diver are conversant with the signalling system.

Meals

(83)

A diver who is to work under water at a depth of over 30 feet shall not have a meal within 1/2 an hour of beginning to dive and the last meal before diving should only be a light one.

Dressing and sending down diver

(84)

The diver shall be dressed by the following routine method:

(a)

air pipe and breast rope connected to helmet;

(b)

telephone tested (if used);

(c)

diver dressed in woollens;

(d)

diving dress and shoulder pads put on;

(e)

corselet placed on diver, care being taken to clear the inner collar of creases and with number marked on the corselet corresponding with the helmet number;

(f)

jock strap, if used;

(g)

boots, with buckles outward, drawn on, and lanyards if used, to be well secured above the boots around the suit;

(h)

helmet, without front glass, to be secured in position;

(i)

air pipe and breast rope to be secured respectively to the left and right side of the body;

(j)

belt, with knife (if used) attached and hanging at left side, to be secured in position;

(k)

pump to be turned to enable diver to check air pipe connections;

(l)

diver to be placed on ladder and breast rope hitched to the ladder;

(m)

weights to be placed in position, back one first;

(n)

helmet front glass to be screwed in position, but before doing so care is to be taken that the diver clearly understands all instructions relating to the work the diver is to undertake.

(85)

When the source of air supply is a power-driven compressor, the following precautions, additional to those mentioned in subsection (84), shall be taken:

(a)

before the helmet is secured in position, the attendant shall test the air lines and valves through their full range;

(b)

if the diver suspects the presence of fumes or other impurities in the air supply—the diver shall report the matter to the contractor or his or her representative.

Undressing Diver

(86)

A suitable room, shed, screen or cover shall be provided for the use of a diver when undressing.

(87)

Procedure, the reverse of that required by subsections (84) and (85), shall be adopted in undressing a diver.

(88)

Each diver should do further light exercise after undressing.

Attendants

(89)

Each diver, while under water, shall have an attendant to hold the breast rope and air pipe.

(90)

A sufficient number of other workers, if warranted, shall be stationed to see that the breast rope and air pipe pay out clear and also to coil down the rope and pipe when required.

(91)

When a diver is working at depths greater than 100 feet, an additional worker shall be available, if warranted, to watch the air pipe.

(92)

Every breast rope and air pipe shall be held clear of the gunwale and shall be kept moderately taut but care shall be taken not to have them so taut as to inconvenience the diver.

(93)

The attendant shall maintain such control of the breast rope as to prevent the diver accidentally falling from staging or from rocks.

(94)

Each attendant shall give his or her whole attention to his or her charge from the time the diver steps onto the ladder until the diver returns to the surface.

(95)

The diver shall keep a close watch on the depth gauge to note changes in depth.

Records

(96)

The times of a diver’s descent and ascent shall be taken by an accurate timepiece and recorded, as also shall be all changes of depth and gauge readings when a diver is working at depths greater than 16 fathoms.

(97)

All records shall be carefully preserved and made available to an inspector as and when required by the inspector.

General Precautions

(98)

The symptoms and treatment of compressed air illness as set out in the schedule 9 shall be kept exhibited in a conspicuous position on the works.

(99)

A diver who has been blown up shall be sent down again to the original depth, but care shall be exercised that the diver has a firm hold of the shot rope or that the attendants have taken in the slack of the breast rope and air pipe, before the valve is opened to allow the diver to descend.

(100)

Special care shall be taken to prevent a diver, who is working under a large flat surface, being blown up.

(101)

If the diver is inadvertently blown up, provision shall be made for the diver to be cleared without risk of injury.

(102)

When an additional pump is to be connected by means of a four-way connection, the additional pump shall be operated against the shut cock until the gauge shows the same pressure as the other pump delivering air for the diver, before the cock may be opened.

(103)

When a pump is to be disconnected with the diver down, the cock on that pump connection shall first be shut.

(104)

The air pipes serving 2 divers shall on no account be joined up to the same junction.

(105)

If 1 hand pump is used to serve 2 divers, each diver’s air supply shall be independently controlled by a suitable air-distributing valve.

(106)

This section shall apply to any diving operation that is a compressed air work within the meaning of the Act.

Division 8.2 Tunnelling

100 .

(1)

This section shall apply to any tunnelling operation that is a compressed air work within the meaning of the Act.

Age limits

(2)

No person shall work or be employed in tunnelling—

(a)

at pressures up to 30 pounds per square inch if the person is over 50 years old; or

(b)

at pressures over 30 pounds per square inch if the person is over 45 years old.

(3)

No person under 20 years old shall work or be employed in tunnelling work in compressed air.

(4)

However, in exceptional circumstances the medical officer may set aside the age limits in individual cases.

Appointment of medical officers

(5)

A legally qualified doctor shall be appointed to carry out the duties that are prescribed by this section as being the duties of a medical officer.

(6)

The chief inspector shall be notified in writing of the name and address of the medical officer immediately after he or she is appointed.

Appointment of medical officers—medical orderly

(7)

When the working pressure exceeds 25 pounds per square inch an experienced medical orderly shall be constantly in attendance for the purpose of recompressing any person who shows symptoms of compressed air illness, and for the purpose of attending to minor injuries.

(8)

The medical orderly shall be a person approved by the medical officer and, preferably, shall be the holder of a St. John Ambulance certificate or equivalent qualification.

(9)

The medical orderly may work on other duties provided these are such that he or she will be readily available for medical orderly duties when required.

(10)

No person shall work or be employed to work in compressed air unless on or after the date the person has been examined by an appointed medical officer, and has been certified by the officer as being fit to work in compressed air.

(11)

The examination shall include an X-ray examination of the chest.

(12)

The medical officer’s report shall be kept and produced to an inspector on demand.

Supervision of health during work

(13)

It shall be the duty of the medical officer to inform each person at the time of a preliminary medical examination that any attack of ‘bends’ (pains in the joints and limbs or abdomen), giddiness, vomiting or difficulty in breathing, disease of the heart, lungs, kidneys, genital organs, a chill, or any other disease that may come on the person during or after work may have the most serious consequences to his or her health and the person shall be instructed that immediately on noticing any such indisposition the person must report it to the medical officer, or to a medical orderly, or failing either, to the contractor or a responsible representative of the contractor.

(14)

The symptoms and treatment of compressed air illness as mentioned in schedule 9 shall be exhibited in a conspicuous position in the workers’s change room.

(15)

A contractor shall not allow any person—

(a)

known to be suffering from bends, cold in the head, sore throat, or any other illness or disease, or

(b)

under the influence of intoxicating liquor;

to enter any compressed air chamber.

(16)

Persons employed continuously in compressed air shall be medically re-examined regularly at the following intervals:

(a)

at pressures not exceeding 25 pounds per square inch—every 6 months;

(b)

at pressures exceeding 25 pounds per square inch but not exceeding 35 pounds per square inch—every 3 months;

(c)

at pressures exceeding 35 pounds per square inch but not exceeding 45 pounds per square inch—every 6 weeks;

(d)

at pressures exceeding 45 pounds per square inch—every 4 weeks.

(17)

Unless so re-examined and found fit as mentioned in this section no person shall work, or be employed to work in compressed air.

(18)

Any employee who has been absent from work for more than 7 days owing to illness of any kind, or who has been absent from work due to any other cause, except for recreation, for a period of more than 3 weeks shall not work or be employed to work in compressed air without first producing a certificate of fitness from the medical officer.

(19)

No person shall work or be employed to work in compressed air after 12 months, or any lesser period that the medical officer may determine, has elapsed.

(20)

Every person not accustomed to work in compressed air shall be tested to the working pressure obtaining at his or her place of work by being subjected to the pressure in the medical or airlock.

(21)

If the employee shows serious symptoms after test, or after the first 2 full working periods, the employee shall not work in compressed air.

Compressed air workers’ badge

(22)

It shall be the duty of a contractor employing persons to work in compressed air to supply to every such person a compressed air workers’ badge.

(23)

It shall be the duty of every person employed or working in compressed air to, at all times, wear a compressed air workers’ badge.

(24)

Every compressed air workers’ badge shall be manufactured and used in the way mentioned in section 99 (17) to (19).

Safe working periodsgeneral

(25)

Except in case of emergency, no person shall work or be employed to work in compressed air for longer in any period of 24 hours than the period corresponding to the pressure in which the work is carried out as set out in table 100:

Table 100

gauge pressure
lb/in2
working periodgauge pressure
lb/in2
working period
0-158 hours40-503 hours
15-256 hours50-552 hours
25-404 hours55-6011/2 hours
(26)

Provided that—

(a)

the 8 hour and 6 hour working periods each include a meal break of 1/2 an hour; and

(b)

the 8 hour working period includes times required for compression and decompression, but the other working periods shown in the table do not include times for those purposes nor time occupied in changing shifts.

Safe working periodsobservation period

(27)

After decompression from pressures between 25 and 40 pounds per square inch, all persons shall be detained for observation for 45 minutes before leaving the site of the work.

(28)

This period of detention shall be increased to 1 hour after decompression from pressures between 40 and 60 pounds per square inch.

Compression

(29)

During compression, the pressure shall be increased gradually and uniformly to ensure that no person is distressed.

(30)

The rate of compression shall not exceed 5 pounds per square inch per minute.

Decompression

(31)

Decompression shall be carried out in accordance with the provisions of schedule 7, table 7.3.

(32)

However, at pressures lower than 18 pounds per square inch, decompression shall be conducted at a rate that will not inconvenience any person, but shall not be completed in less than 5 minutes.

(33)

A copy of schedule 7, table 7.3 shall be posted in the man-lock.

Airlock attendants

(34)

Every airlock shall be serviced only by a reliable, and specially trained and selected person.

(35)

The airlock attendant, if without previous experience of either working in or controlling airlocks, shall be specially trained.

(36)

The airlock attendant shall at no time operate more than 1 man‑lock.

(37)

The airlock attendant shall remain outside the lock near the entrance, and shall not be employed for more than 8 hours in any 24 hours.

(38)

Written instructions about the gauge pressure in the working chamber and compression and decompression times shall be given to each airlock attendant.

(39)

A copy of the instructions shall be suitably exhibited in a conspicuous position near the man-lock.

Airlock records

(40)

A record of workers employed in compressed air shall be kept.

(41)

This record shall show for each employee the period of stay in the working chamber, the gauge pressure and the time taken for decompression.

(42)

When the working pressure exceeds 20 pounds per square inch, automatic recording instruments shall be installed to record the pressure in the working chamber and in the man-locks, and these records shall be carefully kept.

(43)

All the records shall be made available to an inspector on demand at all reasonable times.

Man-locksize

(44)

Each bulkhead shall be provided with 1 operating man-lock and 1 emergency man-lock, each of sufficient size to hold at any one time the entire force of workers engaged in any 2 successive shifts, with a minimum of 3 square feet of floor space per worker.

Man-lockaccess

(45)

The door between the man-lock and the working chamber shall remain open except during compression and decompression and during the procedure of passing material through the lock.

(46)

In tunnels of large diameter the emergency man-lock shall be near the roof and within the protection of the safety curtain, with proper access to it from both inside and outside.

(47)

In tunnels of small diameter if it is not practicable to provide an emergency man-lock near the roof, the emergency chamber with safety door shall be at the end of the operating man-lock nearer the working face, and shall be of the same size as the operating man‑lock.

(48)

The safety door shall never be closed while there is any person in the working chamber.

(49)

Except in an emergency, the workers shall be prohibited from emerging through the material locks, or, when the material lock and the man-lock are one and the same, the material lock valves shall not be used when workers are in the lock.

Man-lockfittings

(50)

Every lock in which persons are compressed or are decompressed shall be fitted with a suitable instrument panel on which shall be mounted the necessary pressure gauges in duplicate, an accurate timepiece and a copy of schedule 7, table 7.3.

(51)

The instrument panel shall be adequately illuminated.

(52)

The man-lock shall have valves both inside and outside the lock.

(53)

The valves to which the airlock attendant has not access shall be covered with a case, the door of which is locked and has a glass panel that may be broken in case of emergency so as to permit the valves to be operated.

(54)

Except in case of emergency, valves shall only be operated by the airlock attendant.

Medical lock

(55)

A medical lock at least 5 feet in diameter shall be provided when work is being carried out at a pressure of 25 pounds per square inch or over.

(56)

Should any case of compressed air illness occur when the working pressure is less than 25 pounds per square inch, it may be dealt with in the man-lock.

(57)

The medical lock shall have 2 compartments, so that entry may be obtained to the inner chamber while it is under pressure.

(58)

The lock shall be adequately ventilated, protected from the direct rays of the sun or adequately heated if required, and shall be adequately lighted.

(59)

The lock and its equipment shall be kept in a clean state.

(60)

The lock shall be provided with suitable equipment including a couch not less than 6 feet in length, clean blankets, dry woollen garments, a food lock and a telephone.

(61)

The medical lock shall be located within the immediate vicinity of the works and arrangements shall be made to ensure that the lock is ready for operation during the 12 hours after the end of any shift.

(62)

The medical lock shall be equipped with a small, glazed aperture so that a patient under treatment in the lock can be kept under observation by the attendant from outside the lock.

(63)

It shall be provided with a pressure gauge and an accurate timepiece for each compartment.

(64)

The timepiece and the pressure gauge for the main compartment shall be in a position that they can be readily seen by the attendant whether the attendant is inside or outside the lock.

Additional bulkhead

(65)

Wherever the gauge pressure in the working chamber exceeds 30 pounds per square inch, a 2nd bulkhead with airlocks shall be provided after the tunnel has been constructed for a reasonable distance.

(66)

The working pressure in the outer section shall be maintained at approximately 1/2 of the absolute pressure in the working chamber.

Communication

(67)

The working chamber and the airlock shall be in telephonic communication at all times with the airlock attendant, who shall also be provided with telephonic or other satisfactory means of communicating with the contractor or his or her representative on the works.

(68)

The contractor shall depute a representative to be at all times available for communication with the airlock attendant.

(69)

In the event of telephone failure, signals shall be transmitted by tapping.

(70)

A suitable code of signals shall be formulated on the job and a copy of this code shall be posted inside and outside the man-lock.

Overhead gangway

(71)

In all tunnels 16 feet and over in diameter or height, an overhead gangway shall be provided from the working face to the nearest airlock.

(72)

An overhead clearance of 6 feet shall be maintained unless otherwise approved.

Safety curtains

(73)

Safety curtains shall be provided in all tunnels if there is the possibility of a ‘blow’ causing an inrush of water or material being excavated.

(74)

The safety curtain shall at no time be distant more than 200 feet from the working face.

Fire precautions

(75)

If danger of fire exists, a fire hose at least 50 feet in length with a suitable nozzle connected, shall be provided on both sides of the tunnel bulkhead.

(76)

Water lines shall extend into the tunnel with a hose connection every 200 feet, and this system shall be maintained ready for use at all times.

Lighting

(77)

All lighting in compressed air chambers shall be by electricity only, except in cases of emergency.

(78)

One worker in the airlock shall be provided with an electric pocket lamp, and candles and damp-proof matches shall be provided in the working chamber and in each man-lock.

(79)

All portable incandescent lamps shall be guarded by a wire cage large enough to enclose both lamp and socket.

(80)

The lamps shall be constructed in accordance with the Standards Australia, Approval and Test Specification No C. 118, Electric Hand Lamps.

Electric installation—voltage

(81)

The voltage used for electric lighting circuits between the last bulkhead and the working face shall not exceed 32V for alternating current and 50V for direct current.

Electric installation—wiring

(82)

Except as otherwise provided in this regulation, all wiring for light and power circuits shall comply with the requirements of the S.A.A. Wiring Rules, for damp or hazardous locations.

Air supply

(83)

A minimum of 25 cubic feet of clean, fresh air shall be supplied each minute to each worker in the working chamber, and a minimum of 10 cubic feet per minute to each worker in the man‑lock.

(84)

In the event of any reduction of the air pressure below a point to be specified from time to time by the engineer in charge of the work, the airlock attendant shall notify the workers in the working chamber, and preparations shall be made immediately for their withdrawal from the working chamber.

Free air intake

(85)

The free air intake shall be so situatedd as to ensure an ample supply of clean, fresh air.

(86)

The utmost care shall be taken to avoid contamination of the air by fumes from the exhausts of compression ignition or internal‑combustion engines and from all other sources.

Purification and refrigeration of compressed air

(87)

An approved oil separator shall be used between the compressor and the air receiver and an air filter of approved type shall be installed between the air receiver and the working chamber.

(88)

The air shall be cooled after compression, if necessary, so that the temperature in the working chamber does not exceed 80° Fahrenheit when measured with a dry bulb thermometer.

Compressed air plant

(89)

If the air compressor, used for supplying air under pressure for the purposes of compressed air work in tunnelling is driven by electric power, stand-by compressor plant shall be provided and shall be of such capacity that, in the event of failure of the electrically-driven units, at least 50% of the air supply may be maintained.

(90)

With other than electrically-powered compressors not more than 50% of the compressor units shall be driven from any 1 power unit and, if practicable, the power units shall be interchangeable.

Air lines and fittings

(91)

Each air line shall be equipped with the following fittings connected in the order shown:

(a)

an air receiver of such capacity as to be capable of delivering at least 2 000 cubic feet of air to the working chamber at normal working pressure, for the purpose of reserve storage in the event of failure of the compressor plant;

(b)

a stop valve;

(c)

a pressure-reducing valve located close to the man-lock;

(d)

a non-return valve located close to the man-lock.

(92)

The air supply shall be through duplicate air lines between the air receiver and the working chamber.

(93)

An adjustable safety valve shall be fitted on the outside of the bulkhead to a separate pipe leading from the working chamber through the bulkhead to the outside air.

Testing of equipment

(94)

All locks and air receivers shall be subjected to test and inspection in accordance with the provisions of the Australian Standard Rules for the Design, Construction, Inspection and Operation of Boilers and Unfired Pressure Vessels and their Appurtenances published by Standards Australia, as revised in May, 1942.

(95)

Pressure gauges shall be installed and tested in accordance with the relevant provisions of the rules mentioned in subsection (94).

Change rooms

(96)

Without prejudice to the requirements of part 10 (which among other things relates to the provision of certain accommodation for the health of persons), there shall be provided and maintained for the use of persons employed in compressed air work in tunnelling—

(a)

properly heated, lighted and ventilated change rooms and drying rooms; and

(b)

bathing accommodation, namely, 1 shower equipped with running hot and cold water for every 8 men employed on the same shift and 1 for every 8 women employed on the same shift, and 1 for any number less than 8 such men or women, as the case requires; and

(c)

suitable and adequate earth or water closets at the rate of 1 closet for every 10 men employed on the same shift and 1 for every 10 women employed on the same shift, and 1 for any number less than 10 such men or women, as the case requires.

Information to be posted in change room

(97)

A copy of the following information shall be posted in the change room for the information and instruction of persons employed in compressed air work in tunnelling:

(a)

subsections (13) to (21) and (98) to (100); and

(b)

schedule 9; and

(c)

the name, address, and telephone number of the medical officer.

Prohibition of smoking and intoxicating liquor

(98)

No person shall smoke in the man-lock or in the working chamber.

(99)

No person shall carry on his or her person any smoking materials while in the man-lock or in the working chamber but shall leave all such materials in the change room.

(100)

No intoxicating liquor shall be brought into the vicinity of the working chamber, provided that the carrying of alcoholic spirits or other stimulants into such places for medical purposes may be approved by the medical officer.

Copy of pt 8 to be available

(101)

A copy of this part shall be kept at the works office and shall be available to every person on the works who is engaged in the compressed air work.

Division 8.3 Caissons

101 .

Age limits

(1)

No person shall work or be employed in compressed air work in caissons—

(a)

at pressures up to 30 pounds per square inch if the person is over 50 years old; or

(b)

at pressures over 30 pounds per square inch if the person is over 45 years old.

(2)

No person under 20 years old shall work or be employed in compressed air work in caissons.

(3)

However, in exceptional circumstances the medical officer may set aside the age limits in individual cases.

Appointment of medical officers

(4)

A legally qualified doctor shall be appointed to carry out the duties prescribed by this regulation as the duties of a medical officer.

(5)

The chief inspector shall be notified in writing of the name and address of the medical officer so appointed.

Medical orderly

(6)

When the working pressure exceeds 25 pounds per square inch, an experienced medical orderly shall be constantly in attendance for the purpose of recompressing any worker who shows symptoms of compressed air illness and for attending to minor injuries.

(7)

The medical orderly shall be a person approved by the medical officer and the orderly shall be the holder of a St. John Ambulance certificate or equivalent qualifications.

(8)

The medical orderly may work on other duties provided these are such that the medical orderly will be readily available for medical orderly duties when required.

Preliminary medical examination

(9)

No person shall work or be employed to work in compressed air unless on or after such date the person has been examined by an appointed medical officer, and has been certified by the officer as being fit to work in compressed air.

(10)

The examination shall include an X-ray examination of the chest.

(11)

The medical officer’s report shall be kept and produced to an inspector on demand.

Supervision of health during compressed air work in caissonsadvice to employees

(12)

It shall be the duty of the medical officer to inform each person at the time of a preliminary medical examination that any attack of ‘bends’ (pains in the joints and limbs or abdomen), giddiness, vomiting or difficulty in breathing, disease of the heart, lungs, kidneys, genital organs, a chill, or any other malady that may come on the person during or after work in a caisson, may have the most serious consequences to his or her health, and the person shall be instructed that immediately on noticing any such indisposition the person must report it to the medical officer, or to a medical orderly, or failing either, to the contractor or to a responsible representative of the contractor.

(13)

The symptoms and treatment of compressed air illness as set out in schedule 9 shall be exhibited in a conspicuous position in the workers’s change room.

Supervision of health during compressed air work in caissonsentry prohibited

(14)

A contractor shall not allow any person—

(a)

known to be suffering from bends, cold in the head, sore throat, or any other illness or disease, or

(b)

under the influence of intoxicating liquor,

to be employed in compressed air work in a caisson.

Supervision of health during compressed air work in caissonsperiodical medical examination

(15)

If persons work continuously in compressed air in caissons they shall be re-examined regularly at the following intervals:

(a)

for pressures not exceeding 25 pounds per square inch—every 6 months;

(b)

for pressures above 25 pounds and not exceeding 35 pounds per square inch—every 3 months;

(c)

for pressures above 35 pounds and not exceeding 45 pounds per square inch—every 6 weeks;

(d)

for pressures above 45 pounds per square inch—every 4 weeks.

(16)

Unless so re-examined and found fit as mentioned in this section, no person shall work or be employed to work in compressed air.

Examination after absence

(17)

An employee who has been absent from work in compressed air in caissons, due to illness of any kind for a period of more than 7 days, or who has been absent from such work due to any other cause, except for recreation, for a period of more than 3 weeks shall not work or be employed to work in compressed air without first producing a certificate of fitness from the medical officer.

New employees

(18)

Every person who is not accustomed to work in compressed air shall be tested to the working pressure in the medical or airlock.

(19)

If any person shows serious symptoms after test, or after the first 2 full working periods, the person shall not work in compressed air.

X‑ray examination

(20)

No person shall work or be employed to work in compressed air after 12 months, or any less a period that the medical officer may determine, has elapsed from the date of the last X-ray examination of his or her chest.

Compressed air worker’s badge

(21)

It shall be the duty of a contractor to supply to every person engaged in compressed air work in caissons in his or her employ a compressed air worker’s badge.

(22)

It shall be the duty of every person engaged in compressed air work in caissons at all times to wear a compressed air worker’s badge.

(23)

A compressed air worker’s badge shall be made of non-corrodible metal and shall be arranged to be worn either in a coat lapel or suspended by a chain or cord placed round the neck.

(24)

Every badge shall be manufactured in accordance with the provisions of section 99 (18) and (19)

Working periodsgeneral

(25)

Except in case of emergency, no person shall work or be employed to work in compressed air for longer in any period of 24 hours, than the period corresponding to the pressure in which the work is carried out as set out in table 101.

Table 101

gauge pressure
lb/in2
working periodgauge pressure
lb/in2
working period
0-158 hours40-503 hours
15-256 hours50-552 hours
25-404 hours55-6011/2 hours
(26)

Provided that—

(a)

the 8 hour and 6 hour working periods each include a meal break of 1/2 an hour; and

(b)

the 8 hour working period includes times required for compression and decompression, but the other working periods shown in table 101 do not include times for those purposes nor time occupied in changing shifts.

Observation period

(27)

After decompression from pressures between 25 and 40 pounds per square inch, all persons shall be kept for observation for 45 minutes before leaving the site of the work.

(28)

This period of detention shall be increased to 1 hour after decompression from pressures between 40 and 60 pounds per square inch.

Compression

(29)

During compression the pressure shall be increased gradually and uniformly to ensure that no person is distressed.

(30)

The rate of compression shall not exceed 5 pounds per square inch per minute.

Decompression

(31)

Decompression shall be carried out in accordance with the provisions of schedule 7, table 7.3, provided that at pressures lower than 18 pounds per square inch decompression shall be conducted at a rate that will not inconvenience any person, but shall not be completed in less than 5 minutes.

(32)

A copy of schedule 7, table 7.3, shall be posted in the man-lock.

Airlock Attendants

(33)

Every airlock shall be served only by a reliable, and specially trained and selected person.

(34)

The airlock attendant, if without previous experience of either working in or controlling airlocks, shall be specially trained.

(35)

The airlock attendant shall at no time operate more than 1 man‑lock.

(36)

The airlock attendant shall remain outside the lock near the entrance, and shall not be employed for more than 8 hours in any 24 hours.

Airlock records

(37)

A record of workers employed in compressed air shall be kept.

(38)

This record shall show for each employee the period of stay in the working chamber, the gauge pressure and the time taken for decompression.

Man-lock—size

(39)

The chambers serving for compression and decompression shall be of such dimensions that the space available to each person using the chambers at any time shall be at least equal to 16 cubic feet with a minimum floor space of 3 square feet per person.

Man-lock—access

(40)

The door between the man-lock and the working chamber shall remain open except during compression and decompression and during the procedure of passing material through the lock.

(41)

A ladder conforming to the requirements of this regulation shall be available for access to and from the working chambers.

Man-lock—fittings

(42)

Every lock in which persons are compressed or decompressed shall be fitted with a suitable instrument panel on which shall be mounted the necessary pressure gauges in duplicate, an accurate timepiece, and decompression tables or charts.

(43)

The instrument panel shall be adequately lighted.

(44)

The man-lock shall be fitted with valves both inside and outside the lock.

(45)

The valves to which the airlock attendant has no access shall be sealed in a box provided with a glass panel that can be broken to permit the use of the valves in case of emergency.

(46)

Except in cases of emergency valves shall be operated only by the airlock attendant.

Regulation of temperature in airlock

(47)

The temperature in every airlock shall be regulated as required by heating or by protection against loss of heat, or by protection against the direct rays of the sun by means of a covering that can be sprayed with water.

Communication

(48)

The working chamber and the airlock shall be in telephonic communication at all times with the airlock attendant, who shall also be provided with telephonic or other satisfactory means of communicating with the contractor or his or her representative on the works.

(49)

The contractor shall depute a representative to be at all times available for communication with the airlock attendant.

(50)

In the event of telephone failure, signals shall be transmitted by tapping.

(51)

A suitable code of signals shall be formulated on the job and a copy of this code shall be posted inside and outside the man-lock.

Height of working chamber

(52)

The height of the working chamber, measured between the roof and the lower cutting edge, shall be at least 8 feet.

Medical lock

(53)

A medical lock at least 5 feet in diameter shall be provided when work is being carried out at a pressure of 25 pounds per square inch or over.

(54)

Should any case of compressed air illness occur when the working pressure is less than 25 pounds per square inch it may be dealt with in the man-lock.

(55)

The medical lock shall have 2 compartments, so that entry may be obtained to the inner chamber while it is under pressure.

(56)

The medical lock shall be adequately ventilated, protected from the direct rays of the sun or adequately heated if required, and it shall be adequately lighted.

(57)

The lock and its equipment shall be kept in a clean state.

(58)

The medical lock shall be provided with suitable equipment, including a couch not less than 6 feet in length, clean blankets, dry woollen garments, a food lock and a telephone.

(59)

The medical lock shall be located within the immediate vicinity of the works and arrangements shall be made to ensure that the lock is ready for operation during the 12 hours after the end of any shift.

(60)

The medical lock shall be equipped with a small glazed aperture so that a patient under treatment in the lock can be kept under observation by the attendant from outside the lock.

(61)

It shall be provided with a pressure gauge and an accurate timepiece for each compartment.

(62)

The timepiece and pressure gauge for the main compartment shall be in such a position that they can be readily seen by the attendant whether the attendant is inside or outside the lock.

Lighting

(63)

All lighting in compressed air chambers shall be by electricity only, except in case of emergency.

(64)

One man in an airlock shall be provided with an electric pocket lamp, and candles and damp-proof matches shall be provided in the working chamber and in each airlock.

(65)

All portable incandescent lamps shall be guarded by a wire cage large enough to enclose both lamp and socket.

(66)

The lamps shall be constructed in accordance with the provisions of Standards Australia, Approval and Test Specification No C. 118, entitled Electric Hand-Lamps.

Electric installationvoltage

(67)

The voltage used for electrical apparatus and lights in compressed air chambers shall not exceed 32V for alternating current supply and 50V for direct current supply.

Electric installationwiring

(68)

Except as otherwise provided in this regulation, all wiring for light and power circuits shall comply with the requirements of the Standards Australia Wiring Rules for damp or hazardous locations.

Air supply

(69)

A minimum of 25 cubic feet of clean fresh air shall be supplied per minute to each worker in the working chamber, and a minimum of 10 cubic feet per minute to each worker in the man-lock.

(70)

In the event of a failure of the air supply exceeding 5 minutes in duration, all workers shall be withdrawn from the working chamber.

Free air intake

(71)

The free air intake shall be so situatedd as to ensure an ample supply of clean, fresh air.

(72)

Care shall be taken to avoid contamination of the air by fumes from the exhausts of compression ignition and internal-combustion engines and from all other sources.

Purification and refrigeration of compressed air

(73)

An approved oil separator shall be used between the compressor and the air receiver and an approved air filter shall be placed between the air receiver and the working chamber.

(74)

The air shall be cooled after compression, if necessary, to ensure that the temperature in the working chamber does not exceed 80° Fahrenheit when measured with a dry bulb thermometer.

Compressed air plant

(75)

If the air compressor, used for supplying air under pressure for the purposes of compressed air work in caissons is driven by electric power, stand-by compressor plant shall be provided and shall be of the capacity that in the event of failure of the electrically-driven units at least 50% of the air supply may be maintained.

(76)

With other than electrically-powered compressors not more than 50% of the compressor units shall be driven from any 1 power unit and, if practicable, the power units shall be interchangeable.

Air lines and fittings

(77)

Each air line shall be equipped with the following fittings connected in the following order:

(a)

an air receiver of such capacity as to be capable of delivering at least 50 cubic feet of air to the working chamber at normal working pressure, for the purpose of reserve storage in the event of failure of the compressor plant;

(b)

a stop valve;

(c)

a pressure-reducing valve located close to the man-lock;

(d)

a non-return valve located close to the man-lock.

(78)

The air supply shall be through duplicate air lines between the air receiver and the working chamber.

(79)

An adjustable safety valve shall be fitted on the outside of the airlock, exhausting to the outside air.

Testing of equipmentgeneral

(80)

All airlocks, shafts and air receivers shall be subjected to test in accordance with the provisions of the Australian Standard Rules recommended for the Design, Construction, Inspection and Operation of Boilers and Unfired Pressure Vessels and their Appurtenances published by Standards Australia as revised in May, 1942.

Testing of equipmentpressure gauges

(81)

Pressure gauges shall be installed and tested in accordance with the relevant provisions of the rules mentioned in subsection (80).

Change rooms

(82)

Without prejudice to the requirements of part 10 (which among other things relates to the provision of certain accommodation for the health of persons) there shall be provided and maintained for the use of persons employed in compressed air work in caissons—

(a)

properly heated, lighted and ventilated change rooms and drying rooms; and

(b)

bathing accommodation, namely 1 shower equipped with running hot and cold water for every 8 men employed on the same shift and 1 for every 8 women employed on the same shift, and 1 for any number less than 8 such men or women, as the case requires; and

(c)

suitable and adequate earth or water closets at the rate of 1 closet for every 10 men employed on the same shift and 1 for every 10 women employed on the same shift, and 1 for any number less than 10 such men or women, as the case requires.

Information to be posted in change room

(83)

A copy of the following information shall be posted in the change room for the information and instruction of persons engaged in compressed air work in caissons:

(a)

schedule 9, concerning the Symptoms and Treatment of Compressed Air Illness;

(b)

section 101 (12) to (17);

(c)

the name, address and telephone number of the medical officer.

Prohibition of smoking and intoxicating liquor

(84)

No person shall smoke in a man-lock or working chamber.

(85)

No person shall carry smoking materials into a man-lock or into a working chamber.

(86)

All such smoking materials shall be left in the change room.

(87)

No person shall bring any intoxicating liquor into the vicinity of the working chamber, provided that the carrying of alcoholic spirits or other stimulants into such places for medical purposes may be approved by the medical officer.

Regulation to be available

(88)

A copy of this section shall be kept on the works so as to be easily accessible to all persons who are responsible for giving effect to its provisions.

(89)

This section shall apply to compressed air work in caissons, being a compressed air work within the meaning of the Act.

Part 9A Explosive-powered tools—safety measures

Application and interpretation

118A .

(1)

This part shall apply to and in relation to the use of explosive‑powered tools in building work, excavation work and compressed air work.

(2)

In this part:

explosive-powered tool means a tool by which a projectile may be driven against, into or through any substance by means of an explosive, and includes every attachment to and accessory of the tool and every device used or adopted or intended to be used with it.

projectile means stud, pin, dowel screw, rivet, spike or other object driven against, into or through any substance by means of an explosive-powered tool, or adapted or intended to be so driven.

qualified operator means a person who—

(a)

is over 18 years old; and

(b)

has been thoroughly trained in the correct use, adjustment, assembly and taking apart of explosive-powered tools; and

(c)

has been fully instructed about the dangers associated with explosive-powered tools and the precautions to be taken in relation to them; and

(d)

has a thorough knowledge of this part.

tool means explosive-powered tool.

work means building work, excavation work or compressed air work.

(3)

For this part, a person shall be deemed to use an explosive-powered tool if the person loads, unloads or fires, or attempts to load, unload or fire, the tool.

Operators of explosive-powered tools

118B .

Operators to be qualified

(1)

No person who is not a qualified operator shall use a tool in any work.

(2)

No person shall employ, instruct or allow any person to use a tool in any work without first ensuring by proper inquiry that the person is a qualified operator and is not because of any infirmity, disability or incapacity unfit to use the tool.

Training of operators

(3)

Nothing in subsection (1) or (2) shall apply to the use of any explosive-powered tool by a person who, under the immediate supervision and control of a qualified operator, is being trained to be a qualified operator.

General requirements for explosive-powered tools and projectiles

118C .

(1)

No person who directly or by his or her servants or agents carries out any work shall directly or by his or her servants or agents—

(a)

use in that work any tool unless—

(i)

the tool has been approved; and

(ii)

there is permanently engraved or embossed on the metal of the tool a clearly legible notice as follows: ‘Do Not Remove Tool From Work Surface For At Least 10 Seconds If Tool Fails To Fire’; and

(iii)

there is permanently engraved or embossed on the metal of the tool a clearly legible serial number by which it can be readily identified; and

(iv)

there is permanently attached to the tool at its muzzle end a protective shield or device designed to arrest the ricochet of projectiles and the free flight of other objects and particles liberated by the firing of the tool; and

(b)

use in that work, in a tool, any projectile that is not capable of undergoing the following test without cracking or breaking:

(i)

smooth shanked projectiles shall be bent through an angle of 60°;

(ii)

knurled shanked projectiles shall be bent through an angle of 30°.

(2)

The test shall be carried out by bending the shank of the projectile about a pin of a diameter equal to that of the shank of the projectile under test.

(3)

The test shall be made by applying a continuous steady load to the projectile until the required deformation has been reached.

Inspection and repair of explosive-powered tools

118D .

Interpretation

(1)

In this section:

authorised person means—

(a)

a maker of tools or a person authorised by the maker to repair tools; or

(b)

a gunsmith; or

(c)

a competent person in the employment of a person referred to in paragraph (a) or (b).

defect means any defect that might impair or affect the safe and normal operation of a tool.

repair means repair, modify, alter or adjust or attempt to repair, modify, alter or adjust; but a qualified operator or a person who under the immediate supervision and control of a qualified operator is being trained to be a qualified operator shall not be deemed to repair a tool only because of his or her making or attempting to make any minor adjustments to it that are incidental to its ordinary operation.

Inspection

(2)

The person who directly or by his or her servants or agents carries out any building work—

(a)

shall cause each tool used in the work—

(i)

to be carefully inspected for defects on each day when it is so used, before it is so used; and

(ii)

after each 7 days use and before it is again used in any work, to be dismantled and thoroughly examined for defects; and

(b)

shall not directly or by his or her servants or agents use in the work a tool that—

(i)

has not been inspected and examined as prescribed by paragraph (a); or

(ii)

has any defect that has been or should have been revealed on the inspection or examination.

(3)

No person shall, knowing that a tool has any defect, use the tool in any work.

Repair

(4)

No person other than an authorised person shall, knowing that a tool is being used or is intended to be used in work, repair the tool.

(5)

No person shall—

(a)

knowing that a tool is being used or is intended to be used in work, employ, instruct or allow any person other than an authorised person to repair the tool; or

(b)

knowing that a tool has been repaired by a person other than an authorised person, use the tool in any work or employ, instruct or allow any person to use the tool in any work, unless it has since been overhauled by an authorised person.

Use of explosive-powered tools

118E .

General

(1)

No person shall use in any work, or employ, instruct or allow any person to use in any work, any tool or other substance or thing contrary to this section, or without the measures and precautions prescribed by this section being taken.

Limitation of usehard substances

(2)

No tool shall be used on high tensile steel, steel hardened by heat treatment, cast iron or other unusually hard or unyielding substance.

(3)

In subsection (2):

high tensile steel means steel the nominal ultimate tensile value of which exceeds 45 tons per square inch.

Readily shattered substances

(4)

No tool shall be used on hard tile, hard terracotta, glazed brick, glass, marble, granite, thin slate or other readily shattered substance.

Use near edges and holes

(5)

No tool shall be used to drive a projectile into any substance—

(a)

at a point so close to an edge of the substance or to any hole in it that, because of the nature of the substance, the size and shape of the projectile or the strength of the charge to be used, there is any appreciable risk that the substance might crack or break or the projectile fly from it; or

(b)

if the substance is steel—within 1/2 an inch of an edge of it; or

(c)

if the substance is brick, concrete or the like—within 3 inches of an edge of it.

Explosive or dangerous atmosphere

(6)

No tool shall be used in the presence of an explosive or inflammable gas, dust or vapour, or in compressed air, or in any place where the explosive charge might be exploded or rendered dangerous by heat.

Strength of explosive charges

(7)

Every reasonable precaution, including if advisable the making of suitable tests, shall be taken to ensure that the explosive charge used in a tool—

(a)

is of no greater strength than is necessary for the purpose for which the tool is being used; and

(b)

is not of such strength that the whole of the projectile might pass through the substance on which the tool is being used, unless the substance is backed by protective material capable of fully absorbing the energy of the projectile.

Use of barrel extensions

(8)

If the muzzle end of the barrel of a tool cannot be brought into contact with any surface at the point where the projectile driven from the tool is to strike or penetrate the surface, an effective barrel extension shall be used to extend the barrel into contact with the surface at that point.

(9)

The length of the barrel extension shall not exceed by more than 1/2 an inch the maximum length that is required to clear the obstruction that renders the use of the barrel extension necessary.

Care in handling of tools

(10)

Every person while using a tool or carrying or handling a loaded tool shall at all times—

(a)

keep all parts of his or her body clear of the open end of the barrel of the tool and keep the end pointed away from himself or herself and all other persons; and

(b)

exercise the utmost care to avoid injury to himself or herself and others.

Firing of tools

(11)

No person shall fire a tool unless—

(a)

the person is in a safe, well-balanced position so that inadvertent tilting or misalignment of the tool at the time of firing will not occur; and

(b)

the person is holding the tool perpendicular to the surface on which the person is using the tool and so that the muzzle end of its barrel or barrel extension is in contact with that surface.

Mechanical failure

(12)

If when any person attempts to use a tool on any surface the tool fails to fire, the person shall continue to hold it perpendicular to and in contact with the surface for at least 10 seconds, and if the tool has not then fired the person shall unload it or place it in such a position that it will do no harm if it fires.

Removing foreign matter

(13)

A person using a tool shall, after each firing, carefully examine it and remove from it all pieces of projectile or cartridge and other foreign matter that may be present.

Flying projectiles

(14)

No person shall intentionally fire a tool in such a way as to cause the projectile to fly free.

Use of suitable equipment

(15)

There shall not be used in or with any tool any projectile, explosive charge, breech plug, barrel extension or adaptor that is not of a type correctly suited to the particular tool and to the purpose for which the tool is being used.

(16)

No tool shall be used for a purpose for which it is not properly adapted.

Manufacturer’s recommendations

(17)

If there appears on the container of any tool or in any printed matter supplied with any tool any instruction, advice or recommendation, not inconsistent with this regulation, about the safe use of the tool or the use with it, for reasons of safety, of any substance or thing, the tool, substance or thing shall be used in accordance with the instruction, advice or recommendation.

(18)

Subsection (17) does not require the use of any particular brand or make of any substance or thing.

Care and storage of explosive-powered tools and cartridges

118F .

Container for tools

(1)

The person who directly or by his or her servants or agents carries out any work in which any explosive-powered tool is used shall keep or cause to be kept each such tool, at all times when it is not required to be removed for use, inspection, repair or other necessary purpose, in the container supplied by the maker of the tool or in an equally suitable container.

(2)

No person shall take or keep any explosive-powered tool out of its container unless the tool is for the time being required for use, inspection, repair or other necessary purpose.

Safekeeping of tools

(3)

No person shall leave unattended on the site of any work, or any cartridge intended for use in a tool, unless effective precautions are taken to ensure that it will not be taken away, handled or used by unauthorised persons.

Loaded tools

(4)

No person shall, elsewhere than at the place where the tool is to be used, load any tool for use in any work.

(5)

No person shall in the course of any work carry or transport a loaded tool from place to place, unless because of mechanical failure the tool cannot be unloaded.

Cartridges

(6)

The person who directly or by his or her servants or agents carries out any work in which a tool is used shall ensure that the cartridges for all such tools are kept in a metal container or metal containers, and shall ensure that each such container—

(a)

is kept clearly marked with the word ‘Explosive’; and

(b)

is kept locked at all times except when cartridges are being placed in it or removed from it; and

(c)

is not, while it is on the site of the work, opened except by a person using a tool or assisting in the use of a tool; and

(d)

contains nothing except cartridges.

Protective devices

118G .

(1)

The contractor shall provide, for the use of each person employed by the contractor in any work who in the work uses or assists in the use of an explosive-powered tool, an effective device of an approved type for the protection of the eyes of the person from missiles and flying particles.

(2)

The device so provided for the use of any person shall not be one that has been used by any other person, unless it is of metal, plastic or other non-absorbent material and has been thoroughly cleaned.

(3)

No person for whose use such a device has been provided in accordance with this section shall in the work use or assist in the use of any tool unless the person is using that device.

Warning notices

118H .

At all times when an explosive-powered tool is being used in any work, the person who directly or by his or her servants or agents is carrying out that work shall cause to be displayed on the site of the work, so as to be clearly legible by all persons who are at or near the place where the tool is being used, a notice or notices as follows:

‘Warning—Explosive-Powered Tool In Use’.

Part 10 Measures to be taken for securing the health of persons in building work, excavation work and compressed air work by provision of first-aid equipment, shelter, change and dining accommodation, sanitary conveniences and washing facilities

Division 10.1 First-aid equipment

119 .

(1)

On every building work, excavation work or compressed air work where not more than 25 persons are employed, there shall be provided a first-aid chest that shall be equipped and maintained to contain at least the following requisites and appliances, unless otherwise approved:

itemsspecifications
Dettol, Melasol, Zephiran, or Solyptol solutions, 4 oz
castor oil, 1 oz with glass rod bulged, pendant
sal volatile, 2 oz
finger dressings (12)To be of gauze 12 inches long × 4 inches wide, with a piece of tape 12 inches long and 1/4 inch wide, securely attached at its middle to 1 end of each dressing. Each shall be sterilised and enclosed in a sealed carton.
adhesive strapping, 1 inch (1 reel)1st quality
cotton wool, 4 ozto be sterile and to be enclosed in 1 oz quantities in sealed cartons
bicarbonate of soda, 2 ozto be sterile and enclosed in 1 oz quantities in sealed cartons
boracic acid, 2 ozto be sterile and enclosed in 1 oz quantities in sealed cartons
plain gauze, 1 yardenclosed in a sealed carton
roller bandages, 1 inch (3)to be enclosed in a sealed envelope
triangular bandages (3)of 1st quality
tourniquet (1)St. John’s
medicine glass, 2 oz (1)to be marked for teaspoon, dessertspoon and tablespoonful doses
eye bath (1)of 1st quality plastic
dressing forceps, 5 inch (1 pr)
splinter forceps, 5 inch (1 pr)
scissors, 5 inch (1 pr)
towels (1)of 1st quality
enamel basin, 71/2 inches diam. (1)of 1st quality
safety pins (12)of 1st quality
enamel drinking mug (1)of 1st quality
first-aid pamphlet (1)Departmental ‘First-aid in Industry’.
(2)

On every building work, excavation work or compressed air work where more than 25 and not more than 100 persons are employed, there shall be provided a first-aid chest that shall be equipped and maintained to contain at least the following requisites and appliances unless otherwise approved:

itemsspecifications
Dettol, Melasol, Zephiran, or Solyptol solutions 8 oz
castor oil, 1 oz with glass rod bulged, pendant
sal volatile, 4 oz
finger dressings (24)To be of gauze 12 inches long × 4 inches wide, with a piece of tape 12 inches long and 1/4 inch wide, securely attached at its middle to 1 end of each dressing. Each shall be sterilised and enclosed in a sealed carton.
adhesive strapping, 1 inch (2 reels)1st quality
cotton wool, 8 ozto be sterile and enclosed in 1 oz quantities in sealed cartons
bicarbonate of soda, 4 ozto be sterile and enclosed in 1 oz quantities in sealed cartons
boracic acid, 4 ozto be sterile and enclosed in 1 oz quantities in sealed cartons
plain gauze (2 yds)in yard quantities each enclosed in a sealed carton
roller bandages, 1 inch (6)to be enclosed in a sealed envelope
roller bandages, 2 inch (6)to be enclosed in a sealed envelope
triangular bandages (4)of 1st quality
tourniquet (1)St. John’s
medicine glass, 2 oz (1)to be marked for teaspoon, dessertspoon and tablespoonful doses
enamel feeding cup (1)of 1st quality
eye bath (1)of 1st quality plastic
dressing forceps, 5 inches (1 pr)
splinter forceps, 5 inches (1 pr)
scissors 5 inches (1 pr)
towels (2)of 1st quality
enamel basin, 9 inches diam. (1)of 1st quality
safety pins (12)of 1st quality
enamel drinking mug (1)of 1st quality
first-aid pamphlet (1)Departmental ‘First-aid in Industry’.
(3)

On every building work, excavation work or compressed air work where more than 100 persons are employed there shall be provided a first-aid chest that shall be equipped and maintained to contain at least the following requisites and appliances unless otherwise approved:

itemsspecifications
Dettol, Melasol, Zephiran, or Solyptol solutions, 12 oz
castor oil, 2 oz with glass rod bulged, pendant
sal volatile, 6 oz
finger dressings (48)To be of gauze 12 inches long × 4 inches wide, with a piece of tape 12 inches long and 1/4 inch wide, securely attached at its middle to 1 end of each dressing. Each shall be sterilised and enclosed in a sealed carton.
adhesive strapping, 2 inches (2 reels)1st quality
cotton wool, 1 lbto be sterile and to be enclosed in 1 oz quantities in sealed cartons
bicarbonate of soda, 8 ozto be sterile and enclosed in 1 oz quantities in sealed cartons
boracic acid, 4 ozto be sterile and to be enclosed in 1 oz quantities in sealed cartons
plain gauze, 4 yardsin yard quantities each enclosed in a sealed carton
roller bandages, 1 inch (12)to be enclosed in a sealed envelope
roller bandages, 2 inches (8)to be enclosed in a sealed envelope
triangular bandages (6)of 1st quality
tourniquet (1)St. John’s
medicine glasses, 2 oz (2)to be marked for teaspoon, dessertspoon and tablespoonful doses
enamel feeding cup (1)of 1st quality
eye bath (1)of 1st quality plastic
dressing forceps, 5 inches (1 pr)
splinter forceps, 5 inches (1 pr)
scissors, 5 inches (1 pr)
towels (3)of 1st quality
enamel basin, 15 inches diam. (1)of 1st quality
safety pins (36)of 1st quality
enamel drinking mug (1)of 1st quality
first-aid pamphlet (1)Departmental ‘First-aid in Industry’.
(4)

First-aid chests provided for this section may be constructed of wood or metal, but each chest so provided and constructed shall be dustproof, fitted with a lock and key, and shall be distinctively marked with a white cross on a green ground.

(5)

First-aid chests shall properly accommodate their contents.

(6)

Nothing except requisites or appliances for first-aid shall be kept in the first-aid chest, which shall always be readily accessible.

(7)

If not more than 100 persons are employed, the first-aid chest shall be fitted with a carrying handle and so constructed and maintained that it can be easily carried from job to job.

(8)

The first-aid chest shall normally be kept in the change room.

(9)

If more than 100 persons are employed, a first-aid post shall be provided in a room set aside for the purpose and equipped with facilities for washing and for boiling water, and with a couch, blankets, a portable stretcher and also a first-aid chest as previously detailed.

(10)

Each first-aid chest and first-aid post shall be placed under the charge of a responsible person or persons, who or 1 of whom shall always be readily available during working hours.

(11)

The person or persons shall, if practicable, be the holder of a St. John’s Ambulance Medallion with current label.

(12)

A notice shall be prominently attached in every change room and first-aid post where the first-aid chest is normally kept.

(13)

This notice shall clearly state the name or names of the person or persons in charge of the first-aid chest.

Division 10.2 Shelter, change and dining accommodation

120 .

(1)

In this section:

work means building work, compressed air work or excavation work.

General—accommodation to be provided

(2)

Immediately on beginning a work, suitable and adequate accommodation where persons employed can keep their clothes and personal belongings safe from damage and theft, eat their meals and shelter from the weather, shall be provided on the site.

General—shelter shed on small works

(3)

On works where less than 10 workers are employed at any one time a small shed of such dimensions as to provide not less than 10 square feet of floor area per person will meet the requirements of subsection (2).

(4)

This shed may also be used for the storage of the workers’s tools but shall not be used for the storage of building material.

(5)

When part of a building in course of construction has been made weatherproof and secure it may be made available to employees for the purposes of this section.

(6)

On works where more than 10 workers are employed at any one time a shed or sheds shall be provided exclusively for the use of the workers.

(7)

Each shed or sheds shall be of such dimensions as to provide in the aggregate not less than 10 square feet of floor area for every worker employed on the work at any one time.

(8)

Any one shed shall not be used for the accommodation of more than 50 persons.

(9)

All sheds shall be absolutely weatherproof, soundly constructed with a sufficient number of openable windows, shall be floored and shall be adequately ventilated and lighted.

(10)

Every shed shall be kept clean and brooms, mops, buckets and cleaning compounds shall be provided for the purpose.

Facilities to be provided in change and shelter shedshat and coat hooks

(11)

Hat and coat hooks spaced not less than 18 inches apart for hanging clothes shall be provided in each change shed.

Facilities to be provided in change and shelter shedsseating accommodation

(12)

Seating accommodation shall be provided in each change shed for the use of workers when changing boots and when sheltering from the rain.

(13)

A bench not less than 16 inches wide and of such length as to provide not less than 18 inches for each worker will meet the requirements of subsection (12).

Facilities to be provided in change and shelter shedsheating

(14)

In wet or cold weather reasonable heating facilities, such as a portable coke stove with flue exhausting outside the shed, a kerosene heater, or electric radiator, shall be provided in every shelter and change shed for warmth and for drying clothes.

Facilities to be provided in change and shelter shedssafekeeping of employees’ tool kits

(15)

Provision for the safekeeping of employees’ tool kits when employees are not on the work shall be made.

(16)

On works where less than 10 workers are employed at any one time this may be achieved by means of substantially constructed locked chests in the supervisor’s office or by provision of suitable accommodation in the change shed.

(17)

On works where more than 10 workers are employed at any one time special storerooms equipped with racks shall be provided.

Dining facilitiestables and seating

(18)

Adequate table and seating accommodation, in the proportion of not less than 22 inches run for each employee for use at meal period shall be provided in the change shed, or in a separate shed, provided that the accommodation need be provided only in relation to employees remaining on the site during meal period.

Dining facilitiesstorage of food

(19)

Hygienic provision, such as a fly-proof ventilated cupboard fitted with shelves, shall be provided for storing employees’ food.

Dining facilitiessupply of boiling water

(20)

An ample supply of boiling water for tea making and for washing utensils shall be provided.

Dining facilities provision of garbage tins

(21)

Garbage tins that are both rat-proof and fly-proof shall be provided and they shall be emptied each day.

Dining facilities—drinking water

(22)

An adequate supply of clean, cool and wholesome drinking water shall be provided on the site.

Division 10.3 Sanitary conveniences and washing facilities

121 .

Meaning of work

(1)

In this section:

work means, building work, excavation work, or compressed air work.

Number to be provided

(2)

One closet shall be provided on every work where not more than 10 men employed at the one time and 1 for every 10 women employed at the one time, and 1 for any number less than 10 such men or women, as the case requires.

Location

(3)

The closet accommodation shall be located so as to be readily accessible from the place where men or women are working, but shall be far enough removed to avoid nuisance.

Construction

(4)

All closets shall be soundly constructed and roofed with weatherproof material.

(5)

The floor of each closet shall be well drained and constructed of concrete, bricks and cement or of other approved material that shall be impervious to water.

(6)

Every closet shall be well lighted by natural or artificial light and shall be well ventilated.

(7)

Each closet shall have a hinged door capable of being fastened both on the inside and on the outside.

Closets to be kept clean

(8)

Closets shall be maintained in a clean condition.

Washing facilitiesnumber of basins

(9)

One wash basin shall be provided on every work where not more than 20 persons are employed at the one time, and 1 additional wash basin for each additional 20 persons or part of 20 persons so employed.

Washing facilitieslocation

(10)

Washing facilities shall be located under cover and conveniently close to the change shed.

Washing facilitieswater supply

(11)

Clean cold and hot water and soap shall be provided on every work.

(12)

Cold water shall be readily available in sufficient quantities from a cock close to the wash basins.

(13)

Hot water may be supplied from the same source as that used for tea making.

Washing facilitiesdrainage

(14)

Drainage shall be provided for the disposal of waste water.

Washing facilitiesduckboards

(15)

Duckboards shall be provided underfoot if necessary or desirable.

Washing facilitieswashing facilities to be kept clean

(16)

Washing facilities shall be kept clean.

Part 11 Basic requirements about design and construction, erection, use, maintenance, inspection and testing with particular reference to cranes, lifts, hoists, scaffolding and plant

122 .

(1)

Every crane, lift, hoist, plant, scaffolding, and all gear shall be so designed, constructed and maintained that after taking into full account the magnitude, incidence, conditions, and way of all loadings and forces, the proportioning of each member, component, part and attachment of it or to it is such that the maximum stress imposed or developed in it is less than 75% of the minimum stress liable by repetition or otherwise to impair its elastic properties.

(2)

Every member, component, part and attachment shall be robust and so proportioned that it functions without excessive elastic action, deflection, vibration, movement, or distortion and without undue or untimely deterioration.

(3)

Subsections (1) and (2) shall not be construed as allowing any greater stress or deflection, or any less provision in relation to wind loads, sideloads or dynamic effects than may be more specifically prescribed in this regulation.

(4)

Unless more specifically prescribed elsewhere in this regulation, the minimum stress liable by repetition or otherwise to impair the elastic properties of a material shall be deemed equal to the least of the following stresses:

(a)

the 1/10 of 1% proof stress for such material when tested in a way productive of the same type and character of stress as that under consideration (namely, tensile, compressive or shearing stress); or

(b)

the stress applied as an average stress by an approved authority during endurance tests, plus 1/2 of the endurance range, coincident to it, as determined by the authority on a 10 million cycle basis, provided that the stress thus determined is of the same type and character as that under consideration (namely, transverse, tensile, compressive or shearing stress) and that, unless the chief inspector specifically approves otherwise, the average stress shall be assumed to be zero.

(5)

If it can be estimated with reasonable certainty that the stress cannot be imposed or developed in whole or in part more than 2 million times during the working life of the material, the stress prescribed by subsection (4) (b) may be disregarded.

(6)

If a material is subject to solely transverse or torsional stress (or both), and if the 1/10 of 1% proof stress is less than 1/2 of the endurance range mentioned in subsection (4), the stress prescribed by subsection (4) (a) may be disregarded.

(7)

For the purpose of estimating the numbers of stress repetitions to which any member, component, part or attachment of any crane, lift, hoist, scaffolding, plant or gear is liable, the working life of the crane, lift, hoist, scaffolding, plant or gear shall, unless the chief inspector otherwise approves, be deemed to be at least 80 thousand hours.

(8)

Except as may be otherwise prescribed in this regulation—

(a)

every crane or hoist and the parts of it and all gear shall be classified numerically in conformity with the following table, according to its working period, effective load and the dynamic effects to which it is subjected taking into consideration all of the circumstances and conditions under which it is to work and to which it is to be exposed, as also all of the functions it is to perform, and, in the event of uncertainty or dispute, the classification may be determined by the chief inspector; and

(b)

every scaffolding shall be deemed to be within classification 3, except that the timbers of it may be deemed within classification 2; and

(c)

every lift and every hoist used for raising or lowering workers shall be deemed to be within classification 4; and

(d)

for the purpose of determining stresses in timbers, cranes and hoists and their supporting structures, they shall be deemed to be within classification 1 if indoor, and classification 2 if outdoor; and

(e)

no person shall cause or effect any change in the circumstances or conditions under which any crane, lift, hoist, scaffolding, plant or gear is to work, or to which it is to be exposed, or in the functions it is to perform, unless after the change the classification of the crane, lift, hoist, scaffolding, plant, or gear would on reconsideration remain unaltered or revert to a numerically lower order; and

(f)

no person shall use a crane, lift, hoist, scaffolding, plant, or gear after such change unless the classification of it would on reconsideration remain unaltered or revert to a numerically lower order; and

(g)

nothing in this subsection shall prevent any person from designing, constructing, erecting or using a crane, lift, hoist, scaffolding, plant, or gear of greater safety, strength, and stability than that prescribed in this subsection.

Table 122.1 Classification of cranes and hoists and gear for purposes of design, construction and use

classificationworking periodeffective loaddynamic effects
1shortlowlow
2long
short
short
low
high
low
low
low
high
3long
long
short
high
low
high
low
high
high
4longhighhigh
(9)

In applying table 122.1 the following subsections apply.

(10)

The working period of any crane, hoist, or gear shall be considered to be short if it operates or may reasonably be expected to operate for less than 500 hours per annum, or long if it operates or may reasonably be expected to operate for more than 500 hours per annum.

(11)

The effective load of any crane, hoist or gear shall be considered to be low unless it lifts or may reasonably be expected to lift loads greater than 2/3 of its safe working load on more than 1 000 occasions per annum.

(12)

The effective load shall otherwise be considered to be high.

(13)

Dynamic effects may be considered low if the speed of travelling of both crab and crane or hoist are each less than 300 feet per minute, or 400 feet per minute if the active surfaces of the respective track rails are uninterrupted by gaps or joints.

(14)

Dynamic effects shall be considered high if the crane, hoist or gear or any part or motion of it is used for any purpose, or in any way likely to produce greater shock effects than those caused by travelling on steel track rails at the speeds mentioned in subsection (13).

(15)

Dynamic effects may be considered low for mobile cranes or mobile hoists having well-sprung road wheels and travelling at moderate speeds on surfaces not less regular than closely laid decking of sawn timber.

(16)

Road wheels having approved pneumatic balloon tyres of the ‘off‑the-road’ type may be considered equivalent to well-sprung road wheels.

(17)

Dynamic effects shall be considered high for other mobile cranes or mobile hoists.

(18)

Reference should also be made to examples given in table 122.2 and table 122.3, in determining the classification of a crane or hoist, or gear, or part of it.

(19)

If any single crane or hoist travelling in relation to its supporting structure, does not cause the major loadings to recur principally on portions only of the supporting structure, the structure if supporting a crane or hoist within classifications 2, 3 or 4, may be deemed to be within the next lower classification to that of the crane or hoist.

(20)

However, this shall not apply to supporting structures constructed of timber.

(21)

Table 122.2 is for reference in classifying crane and hoist frame and supporting structures in the respective groups shown in table 122.1.

Table 122.2

type of craneclassificationexplanatory note
hand cranes (except vehicular types)
conveyors (belt, tyne, slat, scraper, tray, chain, etc, but not bucket)
engine house cranes
cranes for occasional use only, in commission not more than 500 hours per annum
single and twin derrick poles
1
bucket conveyors
*slings, yokes and general lifting gear used in medium factories and workshops for moderate work (but not used in handling hot articles, apparatus or materials, or substances or liquids injurious to human life or limb)
2
tower and portal cranes and hammer-headed cranes
cupola hoists for light and medium foundries
floating cranes
stacking machines
overbraced or underbraced jib cranes (except blacksmiths, boilermakers, welders)
giant cranes and fixed and travelling gantries
ice works cranes
light duty cranes in commission not more than 750 hours per annum
hand cranes mounted on vehicles
derrick cranes
winches or hoists used in building and constructional works
sheerlegs and gallows frames
sprung mobile cranes (other than vehicular used in building and constructional works)
shipbuilding cranes
machine shop secondary cranes
pile-drivers and pile-tilters
monorail runway hoists
2
locomotive cranes
overbraced or underbraced jib cranes used in blacksmithing, boilermaking or welding, or analogous duties
cupola hoists for heavy foundries
cranes used for pulling piles or sheet piling
overhead traveller cranes not elsewhere included
magnet cranes not handling scrap
derrick and other cranes having grabs, lifting magnets, or light skull breaker devices
travelling gantry derrick cranes
caterpillar cranes
(power) vehicular cranes used in building and construction works
concentrates, ore, coal or cargo‑handling cranes
unsprung mobile cranes
Note See ss (13) to (17).
logging cranes and logging winches
back-end and front end-loaders
*slings yokes and general lifting gear used in building or constructional works or on wharfs or in medium foundries
fork-lift trucks
3This classification includes the generality of cranes and hoists in commission not more than 2 500 hours per annum, and not commonly engaged in shift work, or for such arduous duties as are customary in the heavy industries. Appliances within classification 3 may be regarded as designed for normal duties.
*cranes, hoists, lifts, slings, yokes and general lifting gear used in heavy industries, and generally in commission more than 2 500 hours per annum
passenger and goods lifts
hoists for raising or lowering workers
magnet cranes, or hoists, handling scrap
skull breaker cranes (except light duty types)
navvys and excavators
cranes and hoists used in connection with underwater operations
4

* Refer also to s 143 in relation to chains, s 144 in relation to steel wire ropes, and s 147 to s 153 and s 155 in relation to terminal fittings.

(22)

Table 122.3 is for reference in classifying crane and hoist mechanisms in the respective groups prescribed in section 122 (8).

(23)

If not listed in table 122.3, the mechanism should have the same classification as the crane frame structure.

Table 122.3

type of craneclassificationexplanatory note
1
electric or pneumatic hoisting blocks
hand-operated chain blocks used on monorail runways, etc, but not on blacksmiths, boilershop or welders cranes or hoists, or any analogous to it
2
hand-operated chain blocks used for general purposes or with blacksmiths or boilershop or welders cranes or hoists or any analogous to it
crab mechanisms of coal and ore bridges
mechanisms of derrick cranes
mechanisms of vehicular cranes
mechanisms of caterpillar cranes
mechanisms of shipbuilding cranes
mechanisms of hoists used in building and constructional works, including pile-drivers, etc
hand or power winches used in connection with scaffolding
3
crab or other relevant mechanisms of grab, skull breaker, or magnet cranes
mechanisms of coal, ore concentrates, or cargo-handling cranes or hoists
4
(24)

Every crane and every hoist shall have constantly maintained on it a permanent notice, prominently and legibly exhibiting all of the safe working loads of the crane or hoist, together with the information about the conditions, incidence and way in which the loads may be lifted or handled as is necessary or desirable for the safe use or manipulation of the crane or hoist.

(25)

The loads, conditions, incidences and ways shall be those determined by and in conformity with this regulation as limiting values of the loads, conditions, incidences and ways of loadings.

(26)

No other load or conditions of loading shall be marked or exhibited on the crane or hoist, unless first approved by the chief inspector.

(27)

No person shall subject, or instruct, allow, or permit any person to subject any crane, lift, hoist, scaffolding, plant or gear to a greater load, or more adverse incidence or way or condition of loading than that determined by and in conformity with this regulation as a limiting load, incidence or way or condition of loading.

(28)

However, subsection (27) does not prevent the crane, lift, hoist, scaffolding, plant or gear being tested in the presence of an inspector, in the way that the chief inspector may direct.

(29)

No person shall procure, incite, advocate, enjoin or counsel the subjection of a crane or lift or hoist or scaffolding to a greater load or more adverse incidence or condition or way of loading than that mentioned in this section or than has been directed by an inspector.

(30)

No person shall represent a crane or lift or hoist or scaffolding to be capable of lifting or handling a greater load or of sustaining a more adverse incidence or condition or way of loading than that mentioned in this section or than has been directed by an inspector.

(31)

The presence of any load in a position into which it has apparently been placed by a crane, lift or hoist shall constitute prima facie evidence that it has been lifted or handled and so placed by the crane, lift or hoist and that the crane, lift or hoist has been subjected to the load, and to whatever incidence and condition and way of loading is indicated by the position and nature of the load.

(32)

If a crane, lift, hoist or scaffolding has been overloaded by lifting or handling or attempting to lift or handle a load exceeding by more than 100% that determined by and in conformity with this regulation as a limiting load, incidence, way or condition of loading, the chief inspector may require the owner or the person in charge or apparently in charge of the crane, lift, hoist or scaffolding to immediately dismantle it in whole or in part and to clean it together with its mechanisms and gearings and to lay out the parts, members, mechanisms and gearings in a place and way convenient to the chief inspector in order that investigations may be made to ascertain if material damage has ensued.

(33)

If the chief inspector considers necessary, to assure the safety of the crane, lift, hoist or scaffolding, the chief inspector may require the owner, or the person in charge or apparently in charge of it to give the metallurgical or radiographic evidence that the chief inspector may direct.

(34)

No person shall effect or procure or cause to be effected, modifications, alterations, or repairs to or in connection with a crane, lift, hoist, scaffolding, plant or gear in such way or of such nature as to be conducive to conditions of hazard, uncertainty or danger.

(35)

No person shall effect or procure or cause to be effected modifications, renewals, alterations, changes or repairs of the following nature to or in connection with any crane, lift, hoist, scaffolding, plant or gear without first having obtained the approval of the chief inspector:

(a)

peg, dovetail or weld a tooth or teeth to any gear wheel, ratchet or other toothed wheel or clutch;

(b)

repair any such wheel or clutch by welding or by mechanical means;

(c)

repair or rebuild shafts, spindles, pins or axles by welding;

(d)

weld together, members, components, parts or attachments metallurgically different from one another;

(e)

repair iron castings by welding or brazing;

(f)

subject to heat treatment any member, component, part or attachment without first establishing and recording the chemical and physical properties of it;

(g)

subject any member, component, part or attachment to any process of heat treatment that might reasonably be expected to affect it in a deleterious, uncertain or hazardous way;

(h)

reforge any forged or rolled or drawn metal member, component, part or attachment that has become noticeably bent, distorted or cracked;

(i)

renew, replace or substantially alter or interchange or exchange for another, any main structural member of a crane;

(j)

renew, replace or substantially alter or interchange or exchange for another the machinery, mechanism or gearing of any crane.

(36)

However, subsection (35) shall not apply if complete failure of the member, component, or part concerned would not be dangerous or conducive to danger to life or limb.

(37)

Every crane and every hoist shall have constantly maintained on it a permanent brand, plainly and legibly exhibiting the classification of the crane or hoist, determined as prescribed by this regulation, and the brand shall be stamped, engraved, or welded on the crane or hoist at its main driving station.

(38)

No person shall falsely brand any crane or hoist as mentioned in subsection (37), or alter or remove any brand except with the approval of the chief inspector.

Wind loads

123 .

(1)

If cranes or lifts or scaffolding are exposed either in whole or in part to wind loadings they shall have additional strength, stability, and fixity with which to resist the loadings.

(2)

Wind loadings shall be deemed to act normally to resistant surfaces, and to consist of a positive pressure on the windward and a negative pressure on the leeward side of the resistant structure or member.

(3)

The wind load acting on any resistant body shall be determined from the formula—

P = cp .

(4)

In subsection (3):

P means the force exerted in pounds per square foot of area of the body as projected on a vertical plane normal to the direction of the wind.

c means a coefficient selected table 123.1, and appropriate to the form and nature of the resistant body.

(5)

The value of p shall be 16 for bodies between ground level and a height of 60 feet above ground level, 22 for bodies between 60 and 300 feet above ground level, and 25 for bodies at greater heights; provided that water level shall, for floating cranes, floating hoist, or floating scaffolding, be deemed to be ground level.

(6)

If a resistant body is partially sheltered from wind by effective permanent protection, the chief inspector may determine and fix any lesser value for p that the chief inspector considers appropriate.

(7)

The value of p shall be taken at not less than 5 during that period in which an exposed crane or hoist or scaffolding is lifting or handling its safe working load, provided that if a crane or hoist is sheltered by its own supporting structure p shall, in relation to the supporting structure, take the value assigned in this section.

Table 123.1 Coefficient of resistance to wind as dependent on shape or form of resistant body or surface

coefficient of resistance, ‘c’ for—
type of body or surfacewindward surfaceleeward surfacetotal
sheds or simple buildings, or simple prismatic bodies0.8 0.41.2
solid web girders. .. .1.6
plane surfaces normal to direction of wind, or at an angle not greater than 20° to direction of wind
Note See also s 123.
0.660.541.2
cylindrical bodies. .. .0.66
sphere. .. .0.44
lattice girders. .. .0.96
concave surface. .. .1.6
wedge with base to wind and vertex angle of 90°. .. .1.0
wedge with point to wind and vertex angle of 90°. .. .0.75
(8)

The wind load acting normally to sloping surfaces, such as roofs of crane or hoist supporting structures, or roofs of cabins, or machinery houses of cranes or hoists shall be determined from the formula—

R = np.

(9)

In subsection (8):

R means the force exerted in pounds per square foot of sloping surface.

p has the value assigned by subsection (5).

n is a coefficient selected from table 123.2, and appropriate to the slope of the surface.

Table 123.2

coefficient ‘n’’
slope of roof in degrees,
measured from the
horizontal
windward slope, or windward half if
flat roof
leeward slope or leeward half if
flat roof
0
22
30
45
70 and over
—0.1
—0.25
0
0.25
0.66
}—0.5


—0.54
(10)

The wind loads acting on curved roof surfaces shall be taken to be the same as for sloping roof surfaces of the same rise, and shall be assumed to act radially.

(11)

For sawtooth or other multi-span roofs if the windward bay of roofing effectively shelters succeeding bays the following reductions in wind loading may be made so that stability and fixity of the structure as a whole is affected:

(a)

on the bay adjoining the windward bay—50%;

(b)

on the next bay—75%;

(c)

on the remaining bays—87%.

(12)

All projections above the general roof level shall be considered fully exposed to wind.

(13)

If members are so disposed that a windward member shelters a leeward member from wind forces, the forces may be considered effective on only the windward member if—

(a)

the windward member being of solid web construction is not spaced at a distance greater than its own depth from the sheltered member, or

(b)

the windward member, being of perforated, open web or lattice construction, is not spaced at a greater distance than its own width from the sheltered member.

(14)

Parts of leeward members projecting beyond sheltering members as mentioned in subsection (13) shall be deemed fully exposed to wind force.

(15)

If the spacing of members is greater than, but not more than 3 times that mentioned in subsection (13) the wind resistant surface of the leeward member may be considered to be reduced by 40%, provided that parts of it projecting beyond sheltering members shall be deemed fully exposed to wind forces, and provided that the total reduction in surface does not exceed 1/2 of that of the windward member.

Horizontal forces (other than those due to wind)

124 .

(1)

Full allowance shall be made for all horizontal forces including those incidental to operation of the crane or hoist, or lift, or scaffolding.

(2)

The braking force at each braked wheel, arising from deceleration of the travelling or traversing motion of any crane or hoist or lift or scaffolding or relevant part of it shall be deemed equal to 1/7 of the greatest weight borne by the wheel.

(3)

It shall be considered to act at track-rail level.

(4)

Each live load shall be assumed to set up or cause incidentally a lateral horizontal force not less in magnitude than the greatest of the following:

(a)

5% of the live load; or

(b)

120 pounds; or

(c)

whatever more exact force may be determined by approved methods.

(5)

It shall not be necessary to increase the horizontal force so determined in the way otherwise provided by section 125, but the force shall be assumed to act simultaneously with the live load.

(6)

Full allowance shall be made for horizontal forces due to slewing, oscillating, reciprocating, or centrifugal actions, misalignments or settlements, heeling of supporting structure, or operation on sloping, irregular or soft surfaces.

(7)

The rate of deceleration of the slewing motions of derrick or jib cranes shall be deemed to be not less than 1 foot per second, per second, measured at the jibhead, irrespective of its position.

Dynamic and repealed loadings

125 .

(1)

To make allowance for frequently repeated loadings their variable magnitudes, and the effects of shocks, all internal forces or moments caused by live loads shall be increased in the ratio shown in table 125 or as may be in this section more specifically provided as appropriate to the classification of the crane, hoist, lift or scaffolding or part of it that is under consideration.

(2)

However, the following forces or moments need not be so increased:

(a)

those due to braking forces arising from decelerating travelling or traversing live loads;

(b)

those due to inertia and momentum of live loads if those due to wind together with those referred to in the paragraph (a) are so great that they govern the proportion of the member concerned;

(c)

those due to wind.

Table 125 Compensation ratio for live loads

classification of crane or hoist or lift or scaffolding or relevant part of itratio in which internal force or moment must be increasedclassification of crane or hoist or lift or scaffolding or relevant part of itratio in which internal force or moment must be increased
11.231.6
21.441.9
(3)

Table 125 applies if more specific provision is not made in this section.

(4)

To make allowance for shocks caused by travelling or traversing movements of cranes or hoists or lifts or scaffolding, internal forces or moments caused by dead loads shall be increased by 10% if the track rails are interrupted by joints or gaps, and the speed of travel or traverse is 200 or less feet per minute, or 20% if the speed is exceeded.

(5)

If the track rails are not so interrupted, the internal forces or moments shall be increased by 10% if the speed is 300 or less feet per minute or 20% if the speed is exceeded.

Maximum permissible stresses

126 .

(1)

The stresses imposed or developed in any member, component, part, or attachment, of any crane, hoist, lift, scaffolding, plant or gear shall be computed and after inclusion of all relevant increases consequential to section 125 and the other sections as may be applicable shall not exceed the relevant and appropriate maximum prescribed by this regulation.

(2)

If the member, component, part or attachment is of timber, the stress imposed or developed in it shall not exceed the relevant and appropriate maximum shown in table 126.1, or any other stress that may be more specifically prescribed elsewhere in this regulation.

Table 126.1 Maximum permissible stresses for timbers

maximum permissible stress in lb/in2
Douglas firironbark less than 6 inches thickironbark 6 inches or more in thickness†hardwood less than 6 inches in thickness†hardwood 6 inches or more in thickness
nature of stressselectordinary
transverse; timber continually dry2 0001 4506 0004 5004 0003 000
transverse; timber occasionally wet but quickly drying1 7201 2505 7004 2703 8002 800
transverse; timber more or less continually wet or damp1 3309705 7004 2703 8002 800
compression; perpendicular to grain; continually dry4303901 0001 000880880
compression; perpendicular to grain; occasionally wet but quickly drying3002701 0001 000750750
compression; perpendicular to grain; timber more or less continually wet or damp2702401 0001 000750750
*longitudinal shear; in flexural members11286340340300300
shearing; parallel to grain2301701 0001 000750750
tensile; parallel to grainmay be taken to be of the same values as transverse stresses
compression; parallel to grain; continually dry1 4401 2004 0003 0003 6002 700
compression; parallel to grain; occasionally wet but quickly drying1 3201 0803 8002 8003 4002 500

* Generally termed ‘horizontal shear’.

† Hardwood includes only Australian hardwoods of approximately the same strength and reliability as spotted gum.

(3)

Table 126.1 applies if more specific provision is not made in this regulation.

(4)

If the member, component, part or attachment is of any other material, the stress imposed or developed in it shall not exceed that prescribed by section 122 (4) to (23), and amplified in relation to certain commonly used materials by table 126.2:

Table 126.2 Physical properties of materials

1/10 of 1% proof stress (t/in2)1/2 endurance range for average stress zero (t/in2)modulus of elasticity (t/in2)modulus of rigidity (t/in2)minimum nominal ultimate tensile strength (t/in2)
materialtensilesheartransverse*torsional†
mild steel1710.212.56.313 0005 20028
high tensile structural steel conforming to British Standard Specification No 548—19342012157.513 000 5 20037
high tensile structural steel conforming to British Standard Specification No 968—19411810.813.256.613 0005 20033
cast steel (annealed)17.510.5157.513 0005 20035
malleable cast iron (‘black heart’)94.5115.511 2004 48022.3
good grey cast iron32.95.34.256 7002 68010
phospur bronze (89 copper 11 tin)8.75.210.78.55 5402 22015.5
gunmetal (‘admiralty bronze’)7.54.5545 7002 28013.4
cast aluminium bronze (90 copper, 10 aluminium)11.16.711.69.36 7002 68035
phenolic laminated material‡ . . . . 2.68 . .400. .2.9

* As determined by rotating bar test on 10 million cycle basis.

† As determined by reciprocating bar test on 10 million cycle basis.

‡ If approved by chief inspector.

(5)

If the stresses include those due to wind loads, they may exceed the maximum mentioned by 25% provided—

(a)

that the increase is solely due to wind loading; and

(b)

that the strength of the structure so determined will not be less than it would have been if wind loading had been disregarded.

(6)

If a mild steel member of H, T or I section is used as a beam or cantilever, the stress imposed or developed in the tension flange shall not exceed 12 tons per square inch.

(7)

The stress imposed or developed in the compression flange of a cantilever shall not exceed that prescribed for a beam of twice the length of the cantilever; each half length of the beam shall be assumed loaded with identical loading and incidence of loading to that on the cantilever.

(8)

The beam thus loaded will have a central reaction equal in magnitude to twice the algebraic sum of the loads on the cantilever, and the position of the point of application of this reaction shall determine whether the beam load is applied to the compression flange, or tension flange, or centroid of the beam section.

(9)

If the principal external loading is concentrated and is applied to the compression flange of a beam of the section, the stress imposed or developed in the flange shall not exceed the lesser of the following stresses:

(a)

144/10 tons per square inch, or

(b)

that determined by the formula tons per square inch.

(10)

In subsection (9):

b means the least breadth of the compression flange that can be measured within a distance of 1/4 of the span of the beam of the section at which the stress is determined.

d means the overall depth of the section of the beam at which the stress is determined, exclusive of any track rail laid on it.

l means the maximum length of compression flange that is not supported laterally by adequate external means.

t means the thickness of the compression flange measured as provided for flange thickness of Australian Standard Beam Sections by Australian Standard Specification No AI—1940, for structural steel.

(11)

If the compression and tension flanges of a beam are of different sections, or if the beam is of the single plate web girder type, the flange thickness t must be determined from the formula—

t = .

(12)

In subsection (11):

b—see subsection (10).

Iy means the moment of inertia of the cross-section of the beam about its minor rectilinear axis, provided that if the compression and tension flanges are of different section.

(13)

Iy must be taken as equal to twice the moment of inertia of the compression flange about the aforesaid axis, and provided that if the compression flange of an Australian Standard Beam Section is not compounded, t may be determined as prescribed in this section for the standard beam section.

(14)

Track rails need not be included when determining flange thicknesses, t.

(15)

If the principal external loading is concentrated and is applied at the centroid axis of the beam, the formula tons per square inch may be substituted for the formula stated in subsection (9) (b).

(16)

If the principal external loading is concentrated and is applied to the tension flange of the beam, the formula tons per square inch may be substituted for the formula stated in subsection (9) (b).

(17)

These maximum stresses are permissible only for beams or cantilevers of mild steel conforming to Australian Standard Specification No A.I—1940, ‘Rolled Steel Sections for Structural Purposes’.

(18)

For a beam or cantilever of the same type but of steel conforming to British Standard Specification No 548—1934, ‘High Tensile Structural Steel for Bridges, etc, and General Building Construction’, or British Standard Specification No 968—1941, ‘High Tensile (Fusion Welding Quality) Steel for Bridges, etc, and General Building Construction’, the stress imposed or developed in the tension flange shall not exceed 15 tons per square inch, and in the compression flange of the beam, the lesser of the following stresses:

(a)

176/10 tons per square inch; or

(b)

that determined by the formula stated in subsection (9) (b) or the alternative provided in subsection (15) or (16).

(19)

If a member of H, T or I section is used as a beam and the principal external loading is applied to the compression flange, and if the loading is evenly distributed throughout the span of the beam and is greater in magnitude than any concentrated loading that may be simultaneously applied, the stress imposed or developed in the flange shall not exceed the lesser of the following stresses—

(a)

144/10 tons per square inch, or

(b)

that determined by the formula tons per square inch.

(20)

In subsection (19):

b—see subsection (10).

d—see subsection (10).

l—see subsection (10).

t—see subsection (10).

(21)

If the external loading is applied at the centroid axis of the beam, the formula tons per square inch may be substituted for that stated in subsection (19) (b), and if the loading is applied to the tension flange of the beam, the formula tons per square inch may be so substituted.

(22)

These maximum stresses are permissible only for beams or cantilevers of mild steel conforming to Australian Standard Specification No A.I.—1940, ‘Rolled Steel Sections for Structural Purposes’.

(23)

For a beam or cantilever of the same type, but of steel conforming to British Standard Specification No 548—1934, ‘High Tensile Structural Steel for Bridges, etc, and General Building Construction’, or British Standard Specification No 968—1941, ‘High Tensile (Fusion Welding Quality) Steel for Bridges, etc, and General Building Construction’, the stress imposed or developed in the tension flange shall not exceed 15 tons per square inch, and in the compression flange of the beam, the lesser of the following stresses:

(a)

176/10 tons per square inch; or

(b)

that determined by the formula stated in subsection (19) (b) or the alternative provided in subsection (21).

(24)

The computed deflection of a steel beam in the direction of either the major or minor rectilinear axis of any cross-section shall not exceed 1/380 part of the span of the beam.

(25)

The computed deflection at the extremity of a steel cantilever shall not, when measured in the direction of either the major or minor rectilinear axis of any cross-section, exceed 1/190 part of the length of the cantilever.

(26)

For the purpose of computing the deflections, the modulus of elasticity of steel shall be deemed to be 13 000 tons per square inch.

(27)

In computing deflections it shall be necessary to increase the forces producing the deflections in the way provided by section 125.

(28)

Forces shall be considered to act simultaneously, and the horizontal forces referred to in section 124 shall be included.

(29)

The maximum vertical shearing stress in the webs of rolled steel joists, channels or plate-web girders of mild steel conforming to Australian Standard Specification No A.I—1940 ‘Rolled Steel Sections for Structural Purposes’ shall not exceed 6 tons per square inch.

(30)

If the members are of steel conforming to British Standard Specification No 548—1934, ‘High Tensile Structural Steel for Bridges, etc, and General Building Construction’, or British Standard Specification No 968—1941, ‘High Tensile (Fusion Welding Quality) Steel for Bridges, etc, and General Building Construction’, the maximum vertical shearing stresses in the webs shall not exceed 71/4 tons per square inch.

(31)

The shearing stresses mentioned in subsections (29) and (30) are permissible only if the ratio—

does not exceed 83 for the mild steel or 75 for the high tensile steel members.

(32)

For the purposes of web-shearing computations the depth of web of a rolled steel joist or channel may be taken as the full depth of the joist or channel, and the depth of web of a plate girder may be taken as the depth of the girder, measured between the centroid axes of the respective compression and tension flanges.

(33)

If the ratios of depth to web thickness mentioned in subsection (31) are exceeded, the maximum vertical shearing stress shall not exceed that determined by the formula—

(34)

For subsection (33), the value of K shall be selected from table 126.3 in conformity with, and as appropriate to the ratio where d1 is the longer and d the lesser rectilinear dimensions of the panels into which the web is divided by effective stiffeners, measured in the vicinity of the stress assessed.

Table 126.3

ratio 1.01.21.41.51.61.82.02.53.0
K 9.428.07.37.17.06.86.66.36.15.35
(35)

If vertical shearing stresses are low and the depth of web is less than 132 times the web thickness for mild, or 120 times the web thickness for high tensile steels as mentioned in subsections (29) and (30), the following compressive stresses shall not be exceeded at any section of the web:

(a)

for such mild steel—8 tons per square inch;

(b)

for such high tensile steel—9 tons per square inch.

(36)

If relationships of web depths to thicknesses mentioned in subsection (35) are exceeded, the compressive stress in the web shall not exceed that determined by the formula—

(37)

For subsection (36), the value of K shall be selected from table 126.4 in conformity with, and appropriate to the ratio with the same meaning as mentioned in subsection (34).

Table 126.4

ratio 0.40.50.60.670.750.80.91.01.52.03.08
K 23.921.119.819.719.820.121.121.119.819.719.819.7
(38)

The stress at the bottom of the Whitworth thread of a bolt or tie rod or other threaded member of mild steel shall not exceed—

(a)

8 000 pounds per square inch for threads up to and including 1/2 an inch in diameter;

(b)

12 000 pounds per square inch for threads 5/8 of an inch in diameter;

(c)

16 000 pounds per square inch for threads 3/4 of an inch in diameter;

(d)

20 000 pounds per square inch for threads 7/8 of an inch in diameter;

(e)

24 000 pounds per square inch for threads 1 inch in diameter;

(f)

25 000 pounds per square inch for threads 11/8 inches in diameter;

(g)

26 000 pounds per square inch for threads 11/4 inches in diameter;

(h)

27 000 pounds per square inch for threads 13/8 inches in diameter;

(i)

28 000 pounds per square inch for threads 11/2 inches and over in diameter.

(39)

The stress in a compression member, or strut, of mild steel shall not exceed that shown in table 126.5, relevant and appropriate to the ratio of slenderness of the member.

(40)

If the member is of high tensile structural steel, the stress shall not exceed that shown in table 126.6 relevant and appropriate to the ratio of slenderness of the member.

(41)

The ratio shall be determined by dividing the greatest length of member that is not supported effectively against lateral deflection, by the least radius of gyration of any cross-section of the member within the central 1/2 of the length of the member.

(42)

If 1 end of the member is fixed and the other end free, the ratio of slenderness shall be determined by dividing twice the length of the member by the least radius of gyration of any cross-section within 1/2 of the length of the member of the fixed end.

Table 126.5 Maximum stresses permissible in mild steel* compression members or struts subject only to concentric axial loading

maximum permissible stress in t/in2
ratio of slendernessmembers having both ends hingedmembers having 1 end fixed and 1 end hingedmembers having both ends fixed
ABABAB
1014.210.814.212.512.514.3
2013.810.714.012.412.414.2
3013.210.613.612.312.314.0
4012.410.413.012.012.013.6
5011.410.012.311.611.613.2
6010.19.511.411.111.112.7
709.08.810.610.510.512.2
807.87.89.79.79.711.6
906.86.88.98.98.911.0
1005.85.88.08.08.010.3
1105.15.17.37.37.39.5
1204.54.56.66.66.68.7
1304.04.06.06.06.07.9
1403.53.55.45.35.37.2
1503.13.14.94.74.76.4
1602.82.84.54.24.25.6
1702.52.54.13.73.74.9
1802.32.33.83.33.34.3
1902.22.23.53.03.03.8
2002.12.13.32.72.73.4
2102.02.03.12.52.53.1
2201.91.92.92.42.42.9

* Mild steel conforming to Australian Standard Specification No A1—1940, ‘Rolled Steel Sections for Structural Purposes’. Column ‘B’ is applicable to members of angle, tee or tube section, and to members of latticed, battened or other framed construction.

Permissible stresses for intermediate ratios of slenderness should be interpolated.

Table 126.6 Maximum stresses permissible in high tensile* steel compression members or struts subject only to concentric axial loading

maximum permissible stress in t/in2
ratio of slendernessmembers having both ends hingedmembers having 1 end fixed and 1 end hingedmembers having both ends fixed
ABABAB
1017.913.718.016.018.218.2
2017.613.617.815.918.118.1
3016.913.517.415.717.917.9
4016.013.116.715.417.517.5
5014.712.515.814.717.017.0
6012.811.514.413.816.016.0
7010.610.312.512.314.414.4
808.58.510.510.512.612.6
907.07.09.19.111.311.3
1005.95.98.08.010.310.3
1105.15.17.37.39.59.5
1204.54.56.66.68.78.7
1304.04.06.06.08.07.9
1403.53.55.45.37.47.2
1503.13.14.94.76.86.4
1602.82.84.54.26.25.6
1702.52.54.13.75.74.9
1802.32.33.83.35.24.3
1902.22.23.53.04.83.8
2002.12.13.32.74.43.4
2102.02.03.12.54.23.1
2201.91.92.92.43.92.9

* High tensile steel conforming to British Standard Specification No 548—1934, ‘High Tensile Steel for Bridges, etc., and General Building Construction’, of British Standard Specification No 968—1941, ‘High Tensile (Fusion Welding Quality) Steel for Bridges, etc., for General Building Construction’. Column ‘B’ is applicable to members of angle, tee, or tube sections and to members of latticed, battened or other framed construction.

Permissible stresses for intermediate ratios of slenderness should be interpolated.

(43)

If the radius of gyration of the cross-section of a compression member or strut of metal or alloy is less near the ends of the member than in the vicinity of the half-length of the member, the radius of gyration of a cross-section at the half-length shall for the purpose of assessing the slenderness ratios, be reduced in the ratio—

.

(44)

In subsection (43):

K is the least radius of gyration of a section at the half-length of the member.

Kq is the least radius of gyration of the least section that is 1/4 of the length of the member from either end.

(45)

If a steel member is subject to simultaneous axial compression and transverse stress it shall be designed as a beam, or if free at 1 end, a cantilever, in which the maximum transverse stress is determined by the formula—

(+fx + fy)tons per square inch

where, in relation to the section under consideration:

c is a constant, having the value 18 for mild steel, or 22 for high tensile structural steel.

f is the maximum axial compressive stress.

fp is the maximum permissible axial compressive stress as prescribed in this section for the same member if assumed subject solely to axial stress.

fx and fy are the maximum transverse stresses due to external flexural forces acting or resolved about the respective principal rectilinear axes.

(46)

The stress in a compression member or strut of timber shall not exceed that shown in table 126.7, relevant and appropriate to the ratio of slenderness of the member, and to the kind of timber and its sectional dimensions.

(47)

The ratio of slenderness shall be determined by dividing the greatest length of member that is not supported effectively against lateral deflection, by the diameter of the greatest inscribed circle of any cross-section of the member within the central half of the length of the member.

(48)

If 1 end of the member is fixed and the other end free, the ratio of slenderness shall be determined by dividing twice the length of the member by the diameter of the greatest inscribed circle of any cross‑section of the member within half the length of the member of the fixed end.

Table 126.7 Maximum stresses permissible in timber compression members or struts subject only to concentric axial loading

maximum permissible stress in lb/in2
ratio of slendernessironbark less than 6 in2 in sectionironbark 6 in2 or more in section and hardwood* less than 6 in2 in sectionhardwood* 6 in2 or more in sectionDouglas fir (Oregon pine)
0 5 0004 0003 0001 400
5 4 3903 5602 7141 320
10 3 7803 1232 4281 200
15 3 1702 6852 1441 080
20 2 5602 2471 859960
25 1 9501 8081 574850
30 1 3701 3701 290730
35 1 0051 0051 005610
40 770770770490
45 608608608384
50 493493493312
55 407407407262
60 342342342222
65 292292292192
70 252252252168
75 219219219140
80 192192192120
85 170170170113
90 152152152102

Permissible stresses for intermediate ratios of slenderness should be interpolated.

Refer to s 131 about quality of timber.

* Hardwood includes only Australian Hardwoods of approximately the same strength and reliability as Spotted Gum.

(49)

If a timber member is subject to simultaneous axial compression and transverse stress it shall be designed as a beam, or if free at 1 end, a cantilever, in which the maximum transverse stress is determined by the formula—

(+fx + fy)pounds per square inch

where, in relation to the section under consideration:

c is a constant, having the value 8000 for ironbark or other Australian hardwood timbers, or 3600 for Douglas fir (Oregon pine).

f is the maximum axial compressive stress.

fp is the maximum permissible axial compressive stress as prescribed in this section for the same member if assumed subject solely to axial stress.

fx and fy are the maximum transverse stresses due to external flexural forces acting or resolved about the respective principal rectilinear axes.

(50)

If the cross-section of a timber compression member or strut is less near the ends of the member than in the vicinity of the half-length of it, the diameter of the inscribed circle referred to in subsections (47) and (48) shall, for the purpose of assessing the slenderness ratio, be reduced in the ratio—

where:

D is the diameter of the greatest inscribed circle of a section at the half‑length of the member.

Dq is the diameter of the greatest inscribed circle of the least section that is 1/4 of the length of the member from either end.

(51)

The computed early deflection of a timber beam in the direction of either the major or minor rectilinear axis of any cross-section shall not exceed 1/380 part of the span of the beam.

(52)

The computed early deflection at the extremity of a timber cantilever shall not when measured in the direction of either the major or minor rectilinear axis of any cross-section, exceed 1/190 part of the length of the cantilever.

(53)

The computed early deflection of a timber beam used for scaffolding or shoring purposes, shall not exceed 1/150 part of the span of the beam, provided that the computed early deflection of platform planks of bricklayers’ or similar heavy scaffoldings shall not exceed 1/60 part of their span, and that the computed early deflection of platform planks of decorators’ or similar scaffoldings of the lightest type shall not exceed 51/2 inches.

(54)

For the purpose of computing the deflections the modulus of elasticity of the constituent timber shall be deemed to be—

(a)

for ironbark—1 300 tons per square inch; and

(b)

for other hardwoods—1 050 tons per square inch; and

(c)

for Douglas fir (Oregon pine)—715 tons per square inch.

(55)

In computing deflections it shall be necessary to increase the forces producing the deflections in the way provided by section 125.

(56)

Forces shall be considered to act simultaneously and the horizontal forces referred to in section 124 shall be included.

(57)

The thickness of a timber beam or cantilever shall not be less than 1/4 of the depth of the beam or cantilever.

(58)

If 1 bridge beam only of an overhead traveller crane is supported laterally by effective bracings, the other bridge beam may be considered to derive from it a measure of lateral support per medium of the crab frame and its track wheels, provided the wheels have double flanges and together with their supports and fastenings are considered by the chief inspector to be suitable for the purpose.

(59)

In such case the strength of the unbraced beam may be determined by placing the fully-loaded crab at whatever position is productive of the greatest critical stress.

(60)

The maximum stress then resulting at any section of the unbraced beam shall not exceed the maximum stress permissible for the same beam when the laterally unsupported length is deemed to be 3/4 of the actual span.

(61)

The lateral deflection due to all loads other than those applied by the crab wheels shall not exceed 1/2 an inch, when calculated on the assumption that the crane is brought evenly to rest from its maximum travelling speed in a distance of 5 feet.

(62)

Other deflections with the crab at any position shall not, however, exceed those elsewhere prescribed for beams by this regulation.

(63)

The ratio of slenderness of a tension member shall not exceed 300.

(64)

The ratio shall be determined as though the member were a compression member.

(65)

After being increased as prescribed by subsection (67), the torsional stress imposed or developed in any spring made from carbon spring steel shall not exceed the relevant and appropriate maximum stress shown in table 126.8.

(66)

It shall not be necessary to increase the computed forces on, or moments in, a spring in the way otherwise prescribed by section 125, unless alternation occurs, and in such case the provisions of section 122 shall apply.

Table 126.8 Maximum torsional stresses permissible in springs of carbon spring steel (in pounds per square inch)

diameter in inches of greatest circle that may be inscribed within the least section that is relevant of the material of which spring is madeclassification of part of crane, hoist, plant, or scaffolding in which spring is employed
432 or 1
not exceeding 0.08560 00075 00093 000
above .085 and no exceeding 0.18555 00069 00085 000
above 0.185 and not exceeding 0.3248 00060 00074 000
above 0.32 and not exceeding 0.5342 00052 00065 000
above 0.53 and not exceeding 0.9736 00045 00056 000
above 0.97 and not exceeding 1.532 00040 00050 000
(67)

To compensate for errors consequential to computation of only torsional stresses in helical or volute springs, the computed torsional stress in any helical or volute spring shall be increased in the ratio W, the Wahl factor, shown in table 126.9 as relevant and appropriate to the relationship:

R = .

(68)

In subsection (67):

D is the maximum pitch circle diameter of the spring, measured in inches.

d is the diameter in inches of the greatest circle that may be inscribed within the least section that is relevant of the material of which the spring is made.

Table 126.9 Compensating ratios, W, or Wahl factors, for stresses in helical or volute springs

2.02.064.21.387.61.19
2.11.984.31.377.81.19
2.21.904.41.368.01.18
2.31.844.51.358.51.17
2.41.794.61.349.01.16
2.51.754.71.349.51.15
2.61.714.81.3210.01.14
2.71.684.91.3210.51.14
2.81.645.01.3111.01.13
2.91.605.21.3011.51.12
3.01.585.41.2812.01.12
3.11.565.61.2712.51.11
3.21.535.81.2613.01.11
3.31.516.01.2513.51.11
3.41.496.21.2414.01.10
3.51.486.41.2414.51.10
3.61.466.61.2315.01.10
3.71.446.81.2216.01.09
3.81.437.01.2117.01.08
3.91.427.21.2118.01.08
4.01.407.41.2019.01.07
4.11.39

Note See also s (69) and s (70) about limiting values of R.

(69)

Springs in which the ratio R referred to in subsection (67) is less than 6 shall not be used unless specifically approved by the chief inspector.

(70)

If practicable, R shall be made equal to nine.

(71)

The value of G, the modulus of torsional rigidity shall, for carbon spring steel, be deemed to be 5 100 tons per square inch.

General

127 .

(1)

If necessary or advisable for safe and continued operation, the members, components, parts, linkages and attachments of machinery mechanisms and gearings shall be machined.

(2)

Machining shall be such as to ensure accurate fitting, smooth and accurate working and freedom from shocks due to lost motion or to slackness or inaccuracy.

(3)

It shall also ensure truth, precision, correctness and regularity of form and of pitch and alignment.

(4)

‘Lost motion’ shall be eliminated except if it is an essential feature of design.

(5)

Bolts, studs, set bolts, set screws, grub screws, adjusting screws and plain or screwed pins, eyebolts, tie bars, screw clevises and the like shall be prevented by positive means from developing undue longitudinal slackness or becoming displaced when used—

(a)

in connecting or securing members between which relative motion occurs; or

(b)

in positions in which they are required to be longitudinally slack; or

(c)

in positions in which they are liable to become loosened by vibration; or

(d)

in positions in which they are subjected to rapid changes of load; or

(e)

in positions in which they are subjected to alternations of load; or

(f)

in positions in which they are subjected to actions tending to unscrew them.

(6)

Split pins shall not be less in diameter than 1/4 of the thickness of the metal they traverse.

(7)

If split pins or taper pins are used in floating pins, washers shall be provided between the split or taper pins and adjacent rubbing surfaces.

(8)

Except if slackness is an essential feature of design, keys shall be well fitted and tightly driven, and feathers shall be well and tightly fitted.

(9)

Splines shall fit closely.

(10)

Axles, sheave pins, or shafts, pins or spindles carrying revolving or oscillating parts shall, unless designed as lubricated revolving members, be effectively locked against rotation as well as against longitudinal displacement.

(11)

Internal threads and nuts shall be of effective axial length at least equal to 7/8 of the nominal diameter of their thread and shall engage with the male thread for their full length.

(12)

Balance, bias or operating weights of cranks, levers or linkages shall be secured in position by rivets, through bolts, welding or brazing.

(13)

All castings, pressings, stampings, flame cuttings, weldings and forgings shall be of true, correct, precise and regular form, pitch and alignment, well suited to their purpose and free from defects liable to impair their effectiveness or conducive of conditions of hazard, uncertainty or danger.

(14)

Lifting hooks that have opened out at the throat by 5% of their throat dimension shall not be used.

(15)

Lifting rings of which any internal diameter has increased or decreased by 5% shall not be used.

(16)

If members, components, parts, linkages or attachments are unduly loose or slack or unduly worn, deteriorated, or otherwise impaired or if they are so cracked, distorted, eroded, burned, fatigued, strain‑hardened or in any way defective or so damaged as to be productive or conducive to conditions of hazard, uncertainty or danger, they shall be immediately replaced, or all use of them shall be immediately discontinued and all necessary or desirable action immediately taken to ensure that they are no longer productive or conducive to such conditions.

(17)

Members, components, parts, linkages or attachments, particularly operating cords, controls and brakes shall be so arranged and constructed that at all times they fulfil their functions freely and without obstruction.

(18)

They shall be constantly maintained and kept free of obstruction.

(19)

Effective interlocking devices of approved designs shall be provided—

(a)

if machinery or mechanisms are so arranged that they may be driven either manually or by power—to ensure that the means by which the agencies are adapted cannot be simultaneously engaged; or

(b)

if alternative devices are provided for sustaining or controlling any load—to prevent their simultaneous disengagement and consequent loss of control of load; or

(c)

in power cranes or power hoists, if any device other than a brake or friction clutch is provided for sustaining any load—to prevent driving against the load-sustaining device; or

(d)

to prevent loads or lifting gear being lowered through hatchways on, or into the path of travel of, travelling cranes, and to prevent the cranes colliding with the loads; or

(e)

to ensure that trolleys, carriages, or crabs cannot overrun or become otherwise displaced from their tracks, at or near moveable sections of them, or at or near crossovers, switches, turntables, or transfer positions; or

(f)

to prevent the operation of any hoist or lift having a moving platform, cage, hopper, box, cradle, skip, kibble, bucket, vessel, tine, monkey or yoke while any enclosure door is not fully closed and locked; or

(g)

to prevent the unlocking or opening of any enclosure door of any hoist or lift referred to in paragraph (f), except a door relative to which the platform, cage, hopper, box, cradle, skip, kibble, bucket, vessel, tine, monkey or yoke has attained such a position that persons may safely enter the enclosure; or

(h)

as required by subsections (49) and (50) for speed-changing devices.

(20)

Unless the chief inspector so directs, subsection (19) (b) does not require the interlocking of a brake.

(21)

Subsection (19) (f) does not apply to temporary hoists used in building, demolition, excuvation or compressed air work.

(22)

Linkages, including those employing ropes, shall, unless it is an essential feature of design, be so devised and constructed that they cannot attain ‘deadcentre’ or other self-locking or self-neutralising positions.

(23)

If owing to external agency the load supported by a crane or hoist may be subjected to major impact effects, shock absorbers of approved design shall be fixed in approved positions to relieve the crane or hoist of the effects.

(24)

All of the members, components, parts, linkages and attachments of cranes and hoists and lifts and scaffoldings and plant shall be effectively and strongly secured in position.

(25)

All load chains and all hand chains shall be caused to book correctly on their gipsies, sheaves, quadrants or the like by means of chain guides.

(26)

To avoid jamming of the chain, guide rollers shall not be used in proximity to gipsies.

(27)

Chain guides used with gipsies shall, if practicable, be of the fixed type.

(28)

Hand ropes shall be caused to book correctly on their sheaves, quadrants or the like by means of effective rope guides.

(29)

The total force required at the hand chain or hand rope of a crane, hoist, scaffolding or plant to raise, lower, handle or control the working load or for purposes of manipulation shall not exceed 80 pounds.

(30)

However, subsection (29) shall not apply to motions effectively controlled by trailing bandbrakes, weston type brakes, or automatic brakes analogous to them.

(31)

The end carriages or bogies of the following cranes shall be so designed, constructed and maintained that breakage of a track wheel or its axle will not allow the carriage or bogey to become vertically displaced by more than 3/4 of an inch:

(a)

cranes of the overhead traveller type;

(b)

travelling derrick cranes;

(c)

travelling gallows type cranes or gantries;

(d)

overhead runways other than monorail runways;

(e)

travelling portal and semi-portal cranes;

(f)

travelling hammerhead cranes.

(32)

Worm or screw gearing shall not be employed in the machinery, mechanisms or gearings operating the following movements of scaffoldings, cranes, hoists or plant except when used in conjunction with the protective devices that are approved by the chief inspector:

(a)

the slewing movements of jib cranes;

(b)

the power-driven travelling movements, whether longitudinal or transverse, of cranes.

(33)

However, subsection (32) does not apply to the mechanism by which ordinary vehicular or mobile cranes are propelled.

(34)

Scaffoldings, cranes, hoists, plant or gear, including their crabs and trolleys, shall be so designed, constructed and maintained that the loads are distributed between all supporting track or road wheels in a statically determinate way.

(35)

The slewing motions of power cranes having jibs or cantilevered booms shall be controlled by manually operated brakes.

(36)

The travelling motion of the following cranes shall be controlled from and at their main driving stations by manually operated brakes:

(a)

locomotive type power cranes;

(b)

power cranes of the overhead traveller type;

(c)

power cranes of the monorail or double-rail runway type of which the driver rides with or beside the load or lifting mechanism;

(d)

vehicular power cranes;

(e)

power cranes of the caterpillar type.

(37)

Cranes, hoists, lifts, scaffolding, plant or gear shall not be lubricated, tended or cleaned while in motion or while any member, component, part or attachment of them is in motion or while any member, component, part or attachment is in any way connected or liable to be connected with any energised associate, or any weight, load or force capable of causing it to move.

(38)

In addition to shutting off the power, effective and dependable mechanical means shall be taken to render the members, components, parts or attachments immovable and to thereby ensure the safety of persons inspecting, examining, testing, lubricating, tending, cleaning or adjusting the cranes, hoists, lifts, scaffolding, plant, or gear.

(39)

The application of brakes other than those of the screw-down type shall not be deemed to be a dependable mechanical means for subsection (38).

(40)

If it is not practicable to thus render the members, components, parts or attachments immobile and immovable in order that inspection, examination, test or adjustment may be safely carried out, a duly qualified driver shall remain at and in sole charge of the controls during the whole of the time of the inspection, examination, test or adjustment and shall move the members, components, parts or attachments only at and in accordance with each plain and specific direction of the person making the inspection, examination, test or adjustment, but lubricating, tending, and cleaning shall not be carried out in this way.

(41)

This section shall not prevent cranes, engines or gear from being lubricated, tended or cleaned by means equally safe to that of rendering the members, components, parts and attachments immobile and immovable as mentioned in subsection (40).

(42)

Static counterbalance weights of cranes, hoists or scaffolding shall be effectively and strongly secured in position.

(43)

They shall be so devised and fixed that even if raised from their seatings in an emergency they will not become either partly or completely unshipped.

(44)

All suspended weights shall have such additional constraint, or fencing, that in the event of failure of their prime suspension they will not fall to the danger of persons in the vicinity.

(45)

Tapered washers or tapered packers shall be used under the heads and nuts or bolts, pins and tie rods that protect from surfaces not normal to their longitudinal axes to ensure an even distribution of loading on the heads and nuts.

(46)

Pawls shall not be used as load sustaining devices except—

(a)

if so plainly visible to a person standing or sitting at the controls that the person can readily observe the depth to which each pawl has entered the teeth with which it engages; or

(b)

if an approved indicator is provided to enable a person at the controls to ascertain the depth of engagement of the pawl as mentioned in paragraph (a).

(47)

However, pawls with approved accelerating springs or approved linkages may be used in Weston type brakes.

(48)

Pawls in enclosing casings or boxings shall be of the non‑sychronous multiple type.

(49)

If any power-driven mechanism has a speed-changing or adjusting device by means of which load sustaining parts may be disconnected from the motive agency, a brake or other approved means shall be provided to control the disconnected parts.

(50)

The brake or alternative means shall, if the chief inspector so requires, be interlocked with the speed changing or adjusting device to prevent their simultaneous disengagement.

(51)

Brakes of mechanisms that can be reversed either under power or manually shall be fully effective in all directions.

(52)

Automatic brakes other than those of the shoe type or of the Weston (screw or helix) type shall not be used on the mechanisms.

(53)

All dynamically reversible mechanisms that can be energised by the action of gravity, momentum or wind shall have brakes or other approved devices by which all movements can be both controlled and prevented.

(54)

Electrically opened brakes shall be deemed not to fulfil the requirements of subsection (53).

(55)

A brake restraining a metal track wheel that runs on a metal track rail shall not for purposes of design be considered to develop a braking force between wheel and rail in excess of 1/10 of the pressure between the wheel and rail.

(56)

Non-automatic brakes shall have approved means by which they may be locked in the fully engaged position.

(57)

However, the locking devices may be omitted for brakes controlling the hoisting motions of overhead traveller cranes that lift or lower loads through heights not exceeding 30 feet.

(58)

In addition to any electrically-opened brakes, approved semiautomatic brakes shall be provided on power-driven mechanisms handling workers and materials to control the lowering motions.

(59)

The brakes shall function automatically on the manual release of a restraining device.

(60)

All brakes shall be lined with approved brake lining materials and the linings shall be so strongly and effectively fastened in place that they will not become loose or displaced even when so worn that replacement has become advisable.

(61)

Brake bands that are less in width than 1/5 of the diameter of their drums shall have restraining clips or double-flanged drums or other approved devices that ensure against their lateral displacement.

(62)

All ends of brake bands shall be concentric and hinged to ensure that the ends of the bands will not be subject to bending actions.

(63)

The use of rigid or partly-rigid intermediate joints in brake bands shall as far as practicable be avoided but if unavoidable the joints shall be of types that will not subject the bands to bending actions.

(64)

All manual and semiautomatic brakes shall be so devised, constructed and located that in an emergency they can be instantly applied.

(65)

If manual rotation of a screw thread or nut is necessary, brakes shall be so devised, constructed and located that alternative means of instantaneous application are available.

(66)

Effective means shall be provided for limiting the total movement of brake bands or shoes to the least practicable amount.

(67)

The total movement of a brake band in opening and closing shall be limited to an amount that will ensure against its excessive flexure or displacement or mounting.

(68)

Brakes shall open and close evenly to ensure correct action and regular wear of linings, their action shall be entirely smooth and free from chatter and they shall not stick or bind.

(69)

The total angular movement or ‘throw’ of the hand lever of any brake or clutch or the like shall not exceed 50°, and that of any pedal shall not exceed 30°.

(70)

Brakes shall be capable of exerting braking torques 50% greater than those transmitted to them, assuming conditions of static loading and an absence of friction except at the braking surfaces.

(71)

The braking torques shall be exerted by the brakes, if manually actuated, on application of a force not greater than 35 pounds to the hand lever, or, alternatively, 70 pounds to the foot pedal.

(72)

Every Weston (screw or helix) type brake shall be so designed that the holding torque developed by it at all times exceeds by at least 1% the load torque applied.

(73)

Unless specifically designed for operation with lubricated linings, brakes shall, if necessary or desirable, be effectively protected against entry of water or other lubricants.

(74)

Subject to subsection (95), the hoisting motions of cranes or hoists of the following types shall be controlled by automatic (trailing) bank brakes, or by approved Weston (screw or helix) type brakes:

(a)

mobile, caterpillar, and locomotive type cranes;

(b)

hand-operated winches;

(c)

hand-operated derrick cranes;

(d)

hand-operated overhead traveller cranes.

(75)

The following motions of cranes or hoists of the following types shall be controlled by Weston (screw or helix) type brakes:

(a)

the hoisting motions of hand-operated stacking machines, gibbets, gallows, and chain blocks;

(b)

the boom-elevating motion of mobile or portable conveyors;

(c)

the luffing and hoisting motions of power-driven travelling derrick cranes;

(d)

the hoisting motions of cranes and hoists (other than power‑driven hoisting blocks), that raise and lower loads through distances not greater than 10 feet.

(76)

Convenient and readily accessible means shall, unless the design renders them unnecessary, be provided by which brakes may be readjusted from time to time to compensate for wear and to ensure correct functioning.

(77)

Any brake that is closed by springs shall have at least 2 such springs.

(78)

They shall be so devised and arranged that in the event of failure of either, the brake will continue to function and to develop at least 1/2 of the holding torque prescribed by subsections (70) and (71).

(79)

Shoe brakes shall be so devised and constructed that the loads on opposing shoes automatically equalise and balance one another.

(80)

Brake show linkages shall be of the floating type so that appreciable eccentricity of diametral oscillation of brake drums will not cause variation in shoe loads.

(81)

The temperature of the rubbing surface of any brake shall not exceed—

(a)

212° Fahrenheit for brakes lined with wood or fabric; or

(b)

400° Fahrenheit for brakes lined with bonded asbestos or approved non-combustible sintered materials.

(82)

Ropes wrapping round shafts or drums shall not be provided or used as brakes.

(83)

All foot pedals, and all foot rests or steps that accommodate only 1 foot of the user shall have heavily upturned edges or other approved devices to prevent slipping.

(84)

All levers, pedals and control linkages shall be so devised that persons using them cannot be injured by their recoil, backlash, or other movement under power.

(85)

If it is practicable to use trailing type (unidirectional) handbrakes or other approved brakes, pawls shall not be used in mechanisms holding, supporting or sustaining loads.

(86)

Mechanisms for hoisting or holding Proscenium Safety Fire Curtains shall not have pawls.

(87)

Centrifugal brakes or other approved automatic speed regulating devices shall be provided to control the speed of descent of Proscenium Safety Fire Curtains and of other loads that are required to descend unattended.

(88)

Toothed or dog clutches shall not have less than 4 teeth or 4 dogs.

(89)

The teeth or dogs and their mating recesses shall be undercut sufficiently to prevent inadvertent disengagement of clutches.

(90)

Cone and other friction clutches shall be so designed that they will not seize or become locked in engagement.

(91)

The chief inspector may require any cone clutch to be lined with an approved clutch lining material.

(92)

All manually operated clutches shall be actuated by means of levers, pedals, or other approved controls.

(93)

All clutches shall be so designed and constructed that they can not drift or become otherwise inadvertently engaged or disengaged.

(94)

Worm gearings having machined teeth and other worm gearings in which the angle of lead of the worm exceeds 3° shall be deemed incapable of stopping or holding loads, and mechanisms employing the gearings shall have brakes as prescribed by subsection (53).

(95)

If worm gearing or a solenoid brake is employed in connection with any jib or derrick crane for raising or lowering loads, and if the crane depends on gravitational forces for stability, an approved clutch shall be provided in such position that in an emergency the load may, if desired, be released, or alternatively lowered rapidly under the control of an approved brake that shall also be provided for the purpose.

(96)

All hoists and lifts used for raising or lowering workers shall have approved safety gear that shall be so devised and constructed that if the vehicle in which the workers ride becomes separated or detached from its hoisting agency, it will immediately and automatically on seperation or detachment become securely locked to its guides, runners, or supporting structure and remain so locked even if it is reconnected to its hoisting agency and its weight again transferred to it.

(97)

However—

(a)

if the safety gear is entirely self-resetting, it may automatically release its grip on the guides, runners or supporting structure after the weight of the vehicle has again been transferred to the hoisting agency; or

(b)

the safety gear shall not function while the vehicle is ascending; or

(c)

if the distance travelled by the vehicle exceeds 30 feet—the chief inspector may require the safety gear to function if and as the vehicle attains a speed 40% greater than its rated speed; or

(d)

if the rated speed is less than 100 feet per minute—the safety gear shall function if and as it reaches 140 feet per minute.

(98)

The platforms of all hoists for raising or lowering workers shall have sides extending not less in height than 6 feet above the platform flooring, and the sides shall constitute continuous surfaces free from apertures.

(99)

Any side or end not used for loading or unloading or for access shall also be fenced.

(100)

Any side or end that is used for loading, unloading or access shall be enclosed or fenced by approved gates or doors extending to the same height, or if approved, by rails set at a height of 3 feet above the platform flooring, and at a distance of 8 inches back from the platform edge served.

(101)

The hoist platform shall have a robust roof or head cover to prevent persons being struck by falling objects.

(102)

Hand rails or other grips shall be provided overhead, or on the continuous surfaces mentioned in subsection (98) for the use of persons travelling in the hoist.

(103)

If loads are raised or lowered in open topped, open sided or open ended vessels, kibbles, boxes or trays, or in bags, above workers in shafts, well holes, or other confined spaces, monkeys or other approved means shall be employed to prevent them colliding with the sides of the shaft or well hole, or anything in it.

(104)

However, the monkeys or means shall not be deemed necessary if the hoisting rope or chain may be freely displaced in any direction through an angle of 5° from the vertical without the suspended load, vessel, kibble, box, or tray coming into contact with the sides of the shaft or well hole or anything in it.

(105)

If loads guided by a monkey are raised or lowered above workers in confined or partly confined areas, the monkeys shall have approved safety gear so devised and constructed that if the weight of the monkey is removed from the hoisting agency at any position within the limits of its travel it will immediately and automatically on removal become securely locked to its guides.

(106)

The kibble, truck or vessel the monkey is employed to guide shall be so fastened to the monkey that it will only be automatically released after the monkey has attained its lowermost limit of travel.

(107)

If loads are raised, lowered, handled or transported on hooks, or other media, under circumstances in which it is necessary or desirable to prevent them becoming unshipped or displaced from it, approved safety hooks, or other approved means shall be adopted to prevent the unshipping or displacement, or to prevent injury (or both) to any person in the vicinity.

(108)

This subsection applies to the following lifting devices:

(a)

grabs, dogs, clamps and magnets;

(b)

all lifting devices that either—

(i)

function by the agency of friction, fluid pressure, vacuumatic action, magnetism, local indentation of surfaces, or minor irregularities of surfaces, or any combination of them; or

(ii)

are of such a nature that they are liable to become detached from the load or otherwise displaced from it in the event of the slackening of their slings or the sudden movement of any supporting member.

(109)

No lifting device to which subsection (108) applies shall be used to raise, lower or transport loads—

(a)

in any circumstances in which any person might be injured should the load or part of it become detached or fall; or

(b)

in any circumstances in which the device might dislodge or overturn any material, object or stock to the danger of any person; or

(c)

in any way prejudicial to the safety of any person.

(110)

If in conformity with section 128 rail clamps are provided for locking any crane or hoist to its track rails, the clamps shall be so devised and constructed that they function immediately and automatically on the operation of an instantaneous type tripping device set closely adjacent to the main controls of the crane or hoist.

(111)

The energy required to close and lock the clamps shall be derived from a descending weight or from springs set in pairs and so arranged that in the event of failure of either, the clamps will continue to function and to develop at least 1/2 of their previous clamping grip on the track rail.

(112)

If a crane or hoist has 2 or more rail clamps, they shall function simultaneously, and the clamping grip of each on its rail shall be directly proportional to the amount of wind or other loading the clamp is required to resist.

(113)

If the weight of any crane or hoist exceeds 100 tons, the rail clamps shall have an approved safety device that will effectively prevent them from being opened or relaxed while the velocity of the wind exceeds 30 miles per hour in the vicinity of the crane or hoist, and in any direction in which it may travel.

(114)

The rail clamps shall be located in positions in which their sudden application is least detrimental to the stability of the crane or hoist.

(115)

Permanent end stops shall be provided to ensure that travelling cranes or hoists or scaffoldings or any travelling parts of them do not overrun or otherwise exceed their limits of safe travel.

(116)

If the speed of travel of the crane or hoist or relevant part of it exceeds 350 feet per minute, or if the product of its weight in tons and its speed of travel in feet per minute is greater than 3 500, the end stops shall have approved spring or fluid buffers.

(117)

If the weight of the crane or hoist or relevant part of it exceeds 50 tons, the end stops shall be so devised that should collision occur with them at the maximum speed that may be attained in any circumstances, the crane, or hoist or relevant part of it will not overturn, and will be brought steadily to rest.

(118)

If a crane, hoist or scaffolding or any travelling part of it travels on 2 or more tracks or rails, end stops shall be provided at and in relation to each track or rail.

(119)

No travelling crane or hoist or travelling part of it shall be operated or driven or travelling scaffolding used unless all the end stops are in place, or unless approved effective temporary end stops are in place instead of them.

(120)

Except if running in the bosoms of rolled steel joists, channels, tubes, tees, or angles, all track wheels of cranes or hoists or travelling parts of them shall have flanges at each side of each rail or track on which they run.

(121)

Alternatively, approved means shall be employed for locating and retaining the wheels on their rails or tracks.

(122)

However, a wheel running on twin rails or tracks may have 1 or more central flanges, and the wheels of locomotive cranes or railway type trucks or bogies need not have double flanges.

(123)

If a crane or hoist or scaffolding travels on uneven or slightly uneven tracks or surfaces on track or road wheels that are not fully sprung or alternatively shod in an approved way with pneumatic tyres, it shall be designed as though any 1 wheel, or group of wheels if they are arranged in groups, does not carry load.

(124)

The counterbalance and dead loading of a crane or hoist shall be so arranged and disposed that distortion of the frame structure is minimised.

(125)

Jacks used for supporting, levelling, or stabilising cranes or hoists or scaffolding or plant shall have dynamically irreversible screw threads or other approved devices by which can be applied and finely adjusted.

(126)

The jacks shall be so braced or otherwise secured in position that they cannot overturn or become in any way displaced.

(127)

If the load plate or instruction plate of any crane or hoist or plant prescribes or indicates that jacks shall be used, the jacks shall accordingly be used.

(128)

If the plates prescribe or indicate further conditions about the way of use of the jacks, the conditions shall be fully complied with.

(129)

The jibhead sheaves and the jibheads of mobile, caterpillar or walking cranes shall be so designed that if the vertical fall of hoisting rope is diverted or displaced laterally 15° or more from the vertical it will be automatically unshipped from the jibhead sheave immediately hoisting starts.

(130)

If the hoisting motion of a crane or hoist of the following type has a brake (other than an approved Weston screw or helix type automatic brake) the hand crank handles shall have a neutral position into which they shall be placed and kept completely disconnected from the hoisting mechanism while any load is being lowered under the control of the brake:

(a)

hand-operated winches; or

(b)

crabs having hand cranks; or

(c)

hand-operated derrick cranes.

(131)

Subject to section 135 (3) and (4), the specified motions of the undermentioned cranes, hoists and scaffolding, shall, if under power, have approved limiting devices by which overwinding, overluffing, overslewing and overtravelling shall be obviated.

(132)

The devices shall effectively prevent the crane, hoist or scaffolding or relevant part of it, or the load, from colliding with or being drawn or forced into contact with any relatively fixed part or object.

(133)

If the platform, cage, box, yoke, lifting hook or analogous media of the cranes or hoists mentioned in subsection (134) (a), (c) and (d) cannot be lowered to the level of the lowest floor or surface served by them without unwinding the hoisting rope, chain, rack, thread or other agency to an unsafe or undesirable degree, limiting devices mentioned in subsections (131) and (132) shall also be provided to obviate the unwinding.

(134)

However, if the chief inspector is satisfied that such collision or contact or unwinding will not damage the crane, hoist or scaffolding, or part of it, or be in any way dangerous, the chief inspector may waive the following requirements of subsections (131) to (133):

(a)

the hoisting motions of overhead traveller cranes;

(b)

the hoisting and luffing motions of all mobile or caterpillar jib or derrick cranes;

(c)

the hoisting motions of hoists other than those used in building work, excavation work, or demolition work, for handling materials;

(d)

the hoisting motions of stacking machines;

(e)

the hoisting motions of fork-lift trucks including those equipped with trays, scoops, arms or jibs, or other media by which loads are handled;

(f)

the slewing motions of mobile cranes—

(i)

if continuous unidirectional slewing is not provided; or

(ii)

if the crane has not been designed for use with the jib or derrick in all positions.

(135)

Limit devices shall be self-resetting and shall be so devised that on their functioning, the mechanism, or motion they control will be brought to rest and remain safely at rest.

(136)

Power hoists for raising or lowering workers or for raising or lowering loads above workers in confined or partly confined areas shall have approved limiting devices as mentioned in subsection (131) to obviate both overwinding and overlowering, and all dangers attendant on them.

(137)

If any member of a crane or hoist or scaffolding is moved under power by a screw thread or rack, an approved limiting device shall be provided to prevent the thread or rack from being completely unwound from its nut or pinion.

(138)

If any crane, hoist, lift or scaffolding or part of it travels in any direction under power, and if the tractive or propulsive force is applied by any means other than the fractional adhesion of track wheels to track rails, a clearance of approved magnitude and extent shall be provided and maintained at and beyond each limit of travel as a safeguard against overrunning and consequent overloading, and to ensure the effective operation of the limiting devices prescribed by subsections (131) to (137).

(139)

Instead of the overrunning clearances, effective alternative devices may, if specifically approved by the chief inspector, be employed for the purposes aforesaid.

(140)

Except as prescribed by subsection (129), approved means, other than fixed guards, shall be provided to prevent ropes or chains from slackening on, or becoming displaced from or on their drums, sheaves, or other winding media.

(141)

If a crane, hoist, lift, scaffolding, or plant is driven by power and is of the following type, such means shall be so devised, and constructed that slackening of the rope or chain will automatically, and immediately, cause the drum, sheave or other winding medium to stop with the brake fully applied:

(a)

automatic or semiautomatic hoists having moving platforms, cages, boxes, hoppers, cradles, skips, kibbles, buckets, vessels, tines, monkeys, or yokes;

(b)

lifts;

(c)

stacking machines.

(142)

However, if the chief inspector is satisfied that the crane, hoist, lift or scaffolding, or plant is so devised, constructed and enclosed that absence of the safeguards required by subsection (141) would not result in danger to any person, the chief inspector may waive the requirements.

(143)

Hoists used in building work, excavation work, and compressed air work for raising or lowering workers, shall have detaching safety bells, or other approved devices by which in the event of the lifting cage, car, or vessel overrunning and closely approaching collision with the overhead structure the hoisting rope or chain will be automatically and instantly disconnected from the cage, car or vessel, and by which the cage, car, or vessel will remain safely suspended independently of the safety gear prescribed by subsections (96) and (97).

(144)

Hoisting ropes or chains disconnected as prescribed by subsection (143) shall be so guided and arranged that they can be wound freely back by and to their tractive mechanisms without danger and without fouling headbeams, sheaves, projections, or neighbouring buildings, structures, or plant.

(145)

No uncommon device, extra, or innovation capable of affecting ordinary, normal, or customary functioning shall be added to or incorporated in any member, component, part or attachment of any machinery, mechanisms, or gearing unless approval of the chief inspector has first been obtained in regard to it.

(146)

The slewing motions of caterpillar cranes and hoists shall be locked while the travelling motion is in use.

(147)

Interconnecting mechanisms of cranes, lifts, hoists, scaffolding or plant, shall be so devised and constructed that no motion can become inadvertently engaged or disengaged during operation of any other motion.

(148)

Members, components, parts or attachments of the frame structure of cranes, lifts, hoists or scaffoldings shall not be connected or interconnected by clamps or clamping devices, except if the specific approval of the chief inspector has first been obtained.

(149)

The chief inspector’s approval of any clamp or clamping device shall not be deemed to include approval of its general use, but only its use for the purposes and applications that are particularised in the approval.

(150)

If the luffing mechanism of a derrick or jib crane is driven by interconnection with the hoisting mechanism, the crane and mechanism shall be so designed that the working load is luffed in a line that is as nearly horizontal as is practicable.

(151)

In addition the crane and its mechanisms shall be so designed that there will not be any danger of the clutch being driven out of engagement while luffing.

(152)

Fork-lift trucks, or stacking machines, or appliances analogous to them, shall not be equipped or used with jibs capable of lifting or handling loads at greater horizontal radii from the masts of the trucks or machines than those measured horizontally from the masts to the midlength points of the tines, platforms, trays, or scoops with which the trucks or machines would ordinarily be equipped in conformity with this regulation, unless alternatively, the approval of the chief inspector has first been obtained.

(153)

Approved effective permanent facilities shall be provided by which persons may safely lubricate, tend, and inspect the machinery and other working parts or cranes, lifts, hoists, scaffoldings and plant.

(154)

The facilities shall include approved permanent safe means of access.

(155)

Approved permanent safe means of access shall be provided to the cabins, driving stations, and machinery houses of all cranes, hoists, scaffoldings and plant.

(156)

In order that persons may not be obliged to traverse dangerous zones unnecessarily, access facilities of cranes, hoists, scaffoldings or plant travelling on elevated tracks shall if practicable give access directly to driving cabins, or driving stations.

(157)

A clear unobstructed headroom clearance of not less than 6 feet shall be provided and maintained above the upper surfaces of main access platforms of every crane, hoist, scaffolding or plant that travels under power.

(158)

If secondary platforms function as walkways between other platforms the same headroom clearance shall be provided and maintained above them as above main platforms, or alternatively, the secondary platforms shall be roofed in an approved way.

(159)

Grabs, travelling carriages, or telphers, shall not project over, or otherwise overhang, any access platform, ladder or walkway.

(160)

Access facilities to cranes, lifts, hoists, scaffoldings, building works, excavation works, compressed air works and plant shall be free and shall be kept free of obstruction or partial obstruction, except if partial obstruction is specifically approved by the chief inspector.

(161)

Access facilities shall be so devised, constructed, placed, and fenced that persons using them are safe from injury by machinery, cranes, lifts, hoists, scaffoldings, plant or loads being handled, or by building or excavation work or compressed air work, or by electricity, explosives, hot or dangerous liquids or substances, gases, vapours or fumes, or by falls or by being crushed.

(162)

The owner or person in charge of any crane that travels under power shall prevent all persons entering on the elevated runway structure of the crane, and no person shall enter on the elevated structure unless, and until, approved effective measures have been taken to ensure the person’s safety.

(163)

If an accident has occurred in connection with any crane, lift, hoist, scaffolding, or plant, or in connection with building or excavation work, or compressed air work, or any roof, an inspector may take possession of any part, piece, or item that the inspector considers has been concerned, for close or radiographic examination, analysis or test.

(164)

Alternatively, the inspector may take possession of and preserve the part, piece, or item as an exhibit for production at any coronial inquiry.

(165)

Notwithstanding the provisions of section 4 the peripheral contours of the track wheels of cranes, hoists, scaffolding or plant travelling on railroad type tracks shall conform with diagram 127.

Diagram 127

(166)

The owner or person in charge of any crane or hoist, other than a hoist conforming with subsections (96) and (97), shall prevent all persons riding on the load, or on the lifting hook, or platform, or tines or box, or vessel, or other lifting medium, and no person shall so ride, except that the following persons may do so subject to the following limitations (if any):

(a)

a dogger whose name is exhibited in an approved notice at the main driving station of the crane concerned;

(b)

persons authorised in writing by the chief inspector, for the purposes as may be prescribed in the authority.

(167)

No crane, lift, hoist or scaffolding shall be constructed in whole or in part of, or include or incorporate, any second-hand material or part.

(168)

However, subsection (167) does not preclude the dismantling and re‑erection of the crane, lift, hoist, or scaffolding in accordance with the Act and this regulation.

(169)

Also,second-hand materials may be used—

(a)

if not subject to stress; or

(b)

if the material is amorphous; or

(c)

if specifically approved by the chief inspector.

(170)

All enclosed gearings used in connection with cranes, lifts, hoists, and scaffoldings, shall have readily accessible inspection apertures with covers that may be readily removed without dismantling or placing the gearing out of commission.

(171)

The apertures shall be as large as is practicable and shall be so placed that the gearings may be effectively and conveniently inspected.

(172)

Unless otherwise approved all joints within members of the frame or supporting structures of cranes, lifts, hoists, plant, or scaffolding shall be plated with splice plates on all surfaces, but this shall not be necessary if the joint is welded in an approved way.

(173)

If more specific provision is not made in this regulation, and unless the chief inspector otherwise directs, all cranes, hoists, plant and scaffolding and the members, components, parts and attachments of them and to them shall conform with the following Rules of Standards Australia, Crane and Hoist Code No C.B.2, 1938, and the rules shall be interpreted and applied in accordance with the code:

rule
No
subjectrule
No
subject
317Concrete-cement, etc481Track rail webs
319Welding482Track rail clearances
407Loads—temperature effect483Track rail fastening
408Loads—erection stresses484Track rail stops
429Latticing and plating of struts486Runway crane clearances
430*Struts—minimum lattice bar dimen-sions488Outside crane equipage
431Struts—angle of lattice bars501Grooving for drums and pulleys
432Struts—batten plates502Ungrooved rope drums
434Struts—spacing of bars and plates507Shaft keys, types of
435Struts—rivets in columns511Sheave diameters
437Effective span of members subject to bending521Track wheels, avoid overhang
438Effective depth of members subject to bending523Track wheels, size and depths
444Strength and ‘Z’ of members subject to bending524Track wheels, diameters
445Strength and ‘Z’ of plate girders525Track wheels, tread width
446Plate girder flange rivets540Holding brakes on manual hoists
447Distribution of wheel loads on plate girders542Pressure gauges, visible to driver
448Plate girder flange section543Engine exhausts
449Plate girder and stiffeners544Cylinder drain cocks, etc
451Plate girder stiffeners at loads548Controls handy and easy
452Plate girder stiffeners on both sides of web811Drilling
453Plate girder stiffener proportioning812Punching
456Truss web tension members813Reaming
458Camber of girders and trusses814Countersunk rivets
461Joint splice plate, symmetry of815Riveting method
462Joint splice plate, section of817Clearances for bolts
463Web joints818Washers
464Rivet shearing area820Shop painting
466Rivet minimum pitch821Painting of inaccessible parts
467Rivet maximum pitch822Field painting
468Rivet edge distance823Painting, general
469Rivets through packings824Bright or machined surfaces
470Rivets in tension825Surfaces to be concrete protected
471Rivet gauge lines1006No passengers on cranes
472Rivet effective diameter1007Cabin, location, size, etc
473Drainholes to prevent corrosion1008Warning devices
474Brickwork bearing pressures1009Cabin protection in hot places
475Concrete bearing pressures1121Driver, duties on leaving cabin
476Pier tops1122Driver must lock crane against wind
477Bearing pressures, eccentric1301Repair authorisation
478Piles1302Repair man, duties before repair
479Foundations (bearing pressures)1303Repair man, to prevent parts falling
480Track rail sizes

* It shall not be necessary to conform with rule 430, par 2.

(174)

Earth, clay, shale, sand, grit, powders, chippings, borings, spalls, punchings, clippings, swarf, offcuts or other aggregates or liquids shall not be used as counter or other balance, bias or operating weights unless encased in accordance with a design first submitted to and approved by the chief inspector.

(175)

Every portable counter, bias, balance or operating weight shall have permanently, clearly and distinctly stamped, engraved or embossed on them, its correct weight in pounds.

(176)

If a weight consists of detachable or demountable sections, each section shall be so marked with its own individual weight, only.

(177)

The figures and letters used in marking weights shall not be less than 1/2 an inch in depth.

(178)

No figures other than those stating the weight as mentioned in subsections (175) to (177) shall be marked on any portable weight.

(179)

Live counter, bias, balance or operating weights that are not of metal shall be encased, framed, or otherwise protected or fenced in a way approved by the chief inspector.

(180)

The chief inspector may, if the chief inspector considers appropriate, disallow the use of any such material or the chief inspector may require the use of an appropriate metal instead of it.

(181)

If a portable counter, bias, balance or operating weight has a permanent handle, the handle shall be of round section mild steel of not less than 5/8 of an inch in diameter and shall be so devised as to eliminate all corners, vees, or other features that might damage lashings or other ropes used in connection with it.

(182)

Drawings of all portable counter, bias, balance or operating weights that are of concrete, stone or encased materials shall be submitted to the chief inspector for approval before manufacture and the weights shall not be used unless manufactured in accordance with an approved design.

(183)

The thickness of a brake band shall not exceed 1/125 part of the diameter of the drum on which it wraps.

(184)

However, no brake band shall exceed 1/2 an inch in thickness.

(185)

No transverse fillet weld shall be made on any brake band.

(186)

Single rivets or single bolts shall not be used to connect end fittings to brake bands, or to make joints in brake bands.

(187)

If there is more than 1 row of rivet or other holes in a brake band, the least distance measured obliquely between any hole and the nearest hole that is in another transverse row shall not be less than 2/3 of the minimum distance between adjacent holes in any transverse row.

(188)

If brake shoes or brake linings are of timber, only selected timbers of approved types shall be used.

(189)

They shall be fastened in place in an approved way.

(190)

The depth of flanges of break drums, measured radially above braking surfaces, shall not be less than twice the combined thickness of brake band and brake lining.

(191)

If the lining consists of wooden blocks, it may for the purpose of fixing flange depths, be deemed to be 1/4 of an inch in thickness.

(192)

U-clips attached to brake bands to prevent their lateral displacement from break drums, shall overlap the edges of the drums by a distance at least equal to 3 times the combined thickness of brake band and lining.

(193)

If the lining consists of wooden blocks, it may, for the purpose of fixing the overlap, be deemed to be 1/4 of an inch in thickness.

(194)

Aluminium rivets or pegs shall not be used to secure brake linings.

(195)

Brake linings of metal, except approved sintered metal, shall not be used.

(196)

The linings of brake bands shall extend at least to the edges of the bands to which they attach.

(197)

The edges of brake bands, and brake linings, shall be cleanly finished and smooth.

(198)

Leather or combustible fabric brake bands may be used only if specifically approved.

(199)

Closing weights used in solenoid brakes shall not move through a total distance greater than 3 inches unless effectively cushioned to eliminate hammering and impact effects.

(200)

Stops shall be provided to ensure that the shoes of shoe type brakes do not trail on the drums when the brakes are open.

(201)

The angular movement of a pawl about its hinge pin while idling over its mating teeth shall not exceed 12°.

(202)

If practicable, pawls shall have springs to accelerate their speed of engagement.

(203)

The springs shall be of approved design.

(204)

Pawls shall not have devices for locking them in engaged or disengaged positions.

(205)

However, subsection (204) does not prevent the use of approved interlocking devices.

(206)

If a pawl has attached to it an operating grip, handle, or trigger, the attachment shall be so devised, and located that it may be safely used.

(207)

Apparatus including the grips, handles and triggers as mentioned in subsection (206) for disengaging and holding pawls in the disengaged position shall be devised and arranged to be actuated by a person located at the driving or operating position of the mechanism or machinery concerned.

(208)

The pawl disengaging and holding apparatus shall not be actuated by foot, but shall comprise a simple hand mechanism.

(209)

It shall be so devised and arranged that it will, when suitably actuated, return the pawl to the engaged position by reliable and effective means.

(210)

It shall be so devised and located that it shall not be necessary for a person to stoop or relax his or her grip on any crank handle while actuating the pawl mechanism.

(211)

Pawls shall be so designed that their active extremities alone, make contact with the mating teeth.

(212)

Pawls or the teeth with which they engage (or both) shall be so designed that the pawls tend to lock in engagement and so that the load holds the pawl in engagement.

(213)

The angle contained between the 2 lines joining the tip of a pawl to the respective centres of rotation of the pawl and its mating teeth shall not be less than 105° and not more than 120°.

(214)

If the pawl is used in tension, the angle contained between the 2 lines joining the tip of the engaged tooth of the rachet and the centres mentioned in subsection (213) shall not be less than 60° or more than 75°.

(215)

Gravity operated pawls shall be so balanced that if released while disengaged, they will immediately and automatically re-engage with their mating teeth.

(216)

Safety non-splintering glass or non-splintering non-inflammable plastic shall be used in all transparent wind or weather screens of driving stations, if liable to be struck by loads or by slings, hooks or other lifting media.

(217)

Petrol and other inflammable liquids shall be stored in robust metal tanks having screwed filling plugs and screw-down outlet valves.

(218)

The tanks shall be so located that they are not subject to undue heating, and all desirable provision shall be made to ensure that fumes do not become ignited and do not accumulate.

(219)

Tanks shall be well clear of all electrified wirings, switchgear, control gear and apparatus.

(220)

If practicable inflammable liquid tanks shall be located on the outer sides of driving stations.

(221)

They shall not be closely adjacent to access facilities.

(222)

If cranes, lifts, hoists, scaffolding or plant having internal‑combustion engines are required to operate indoors or in confined or poorly ventilated places, effective means shall be taken to remove all exhaust gases and to ensure all desirable ventilation.

(223)

Exhaust steam, hot water, and the exhaust gases from internal‑combustion engines, shall be effectively conveyed and directed away from driving stations and from crane and hoist crews.

(224)

If any jib or derrick crane or hoist is not designed to lift its maximum safe working load at all attainable postions of the jib or derrick without breach of the provisions of this regulation, it shall have an approved load-radius indicator, and the indicator shall be constantly maintained in good working order and condition.

(225)

The load-radius indicator previously mentioned shall function automatically, and be so devised and constructed that for each position in which the jib or derrick may be placed, it exhibits and indicates clearly and conspicuously to the crane driver at the main driving station of the crane the safe working load corresponding to the position, determined in accordance with this regulation.

(226)

The load markings on a load-radius indicator shall be of a permanent nature, and it shall be an offence to obliterate or to incorrectly mark or incorrectly graduate, the indicator, or to so alter the indicator that it reads or indicates incorrectly.

Stability

128 .

(1)

Every crane and hoist shall have and at all times retain at least the ratios of stability against overturning shown in table 128 as appropriate to its type, and to the loadings acting on it.

(2)

If more than 1 such ratio is shown, the stability shall be separately assessed with regard to each set of contributing circumstances.

Table 128

wind loads in accordance with section 123
type of crane or hoistreflive loads exclusive of wind load but inclusive of horizontal forcesdead loadscrane or hoist assumed in operationcrane or hoist assumed not in operation1 load equal to 30% of working load—acting vertically upwards at point of application of working loadratio of stability—minimum
stationary crane or hoist or any travelling crane or hoist other than undermentionedAinclude
include
include
include
omit
. .
. .
omit
include
omit
omit
omit
1.3
1.8
1.5
travelling slewing cranes and tower slewing cranesBinclude
include
include
include
include


include
omit
include
omit
omit
. .


. .
omit
. .
omit
omit
include wind acting from the rear.
include wind acting from front or from side
omit
omit
omit
include
omit


omit
1.3
1.0
1.4
1.0
1.5


1.0
repeat all shown for stationary cranes and add—
floating cranesCinclude
include
. .
. .
include
include
omit
omit

Reference B includes cranes travelling on horizontal, level tracks, without superelevation. If these conditions are not ensured, full allowance must be made for more adverse circumstances.

(3)

The ratio of stability of any crane or hoist shall be determined in each instance by dividing the moment of the loadings that stabilise the crane or hoist by the moment of the loadings that tend to overturn it, all the moments being measured about the point or line around which overturning takes place.

(4)

In assessing the overturning loadings, the provisions of section 125 shall be disregarded.

(5)

Unless and until approved by the chief inspector, rail clamps, outriggers or other devices for augmenting the stability of cranes or hoists shall be disregarded in assessing overturning moments.

(6)

If the dead load of any crane or hoist is insufficient to prevent the crane or hoist being blown along its tracks with all track wheels locked, or if the brakes are incapable of completely locking all the track wheels, approved means shall be adopted by which the crane or hoist may be secured against wind loadings.

(7)

In assessing the braking grip of wheels on track rails a coefficient of friction not greater than 0.1 shall be assumed.

(8)

Wind loadings in accordance with section 123 shall be assumed, but irrespective of whether the crane is in operation or not, the intensity of wind loading shall be assumed to be that appropriate when the crane is not operating.

Test loads

129 .

(1)

Except if the chief inspector otherwise requires, each test load shall weigh 11/4 times the working load of the crane, hoist or part of it that is to be tested.

(2)

No person shall apply any greater test load unless the person has first obtained the assent of the chief inspector.

(3)

Not more than 1 test load shall be raised, lowered or transported by or on any crane or hoist or lift or scaffolding at any 1 time.

(4)

If a greater number of simultaneous test loads are necessary the approval of the chief inspector shall be obtained before the loads are raised, lowered or transported.

Mechanical

130 .

(1)

The diameter of the shank of any forged steel lifting hook shall not, when measured at the bottom of the thread, be less than that determined by the formula—

t = 0.65 inches.

(2)

In subsection (1):

t means the diameter of the hook shank in inches.

w means the maximum tensile load in tons in the hook shank.

(3)

For subsection (1) the increases in load w otherwise prescribed by section 125 may be disregarded, except if the hoisting mechanism of the crane is within classification 4, in which case the compensating ratio shall be assumed to be 1.2, and the hook designed for the increased load.

(4)

If the shank of a lifting hook is not provided with a screw thread, the hook shall be proportioned as though it were so provided, but if instead of a screw thread the shank is recessed in an approved way to accommodate a split washer or cone, the tensile stress at the recessed part may exceed that permissible if a screw thread were used in the ratio 1.67:1.

(5)

Upset heads shall not be formed on hook shanks after the shanks have been inserted in their trunnions, shackles, swivels or other supports.

(6)

Notwithstanding the provisions of section 4, no lifting hook shall be of less computed strength than one of forged steel proportioned in accordance with diagram 130.1 and diagram 130.2, having regard to the bight diameter, C, which shall be determined from the formula—

C = 1.84

for hooks for loads not greater than 31/2 tons, or

C=1.5

for hooks for greater loads.

(7)

In subsection (6):

w—see subsection (2).

Diagram 130.1

Diagram 130.2

(8)

Except as may be provided in the following subsections, all lifting hooks shall be precisely of the form defined by diagram 130.1 and diagram 130.2.

(9)

Ramshorn lifting hooks shall be precisely of the form defined by diagram 130.3.

(10)

No ramshorn hook shall be of less computed strength than one of forged steel, proportioned in accordance with diagram 130.3, having regard to the shank throat diameter t, which shall be measured at the bottom of the thread.

Diagram 130.3

(11)

The stress in any rope drum shall be determined from the formula—

ƒ 2 + 2pounds per square inch.
(12)

In subsection (11):

ƒ means the maximum transverse stress in pounds per square inch.

p means the pitch of the rope grooves or least distance measured centre to centre between adjacent turns of rope on the drum.

t means the radial thickness of the drum.

T means the maximum tensile load in any 1 rope winding on the drum, in pounds.

(13)

For grooved drums t shall be measured at the bottom of the grooves; p and t shall be measured in inches.

(14)

The stress so determined shall not exceed—

(a)

4 800 pounds per square inch for cast iron drums; or

(b)

9 600 pounds per square inch for cast steel drums; or

(c)

12 000 pounds per square inch for mild steel drums.

(15)

In determining the stresses in a rope drum it shall not be necessary to increase the forces or moments producing the stresses in the ratios otherwise prescribed by section 125.

(16)

If a metal shaft of circular section is subject to simultaneous transverse and torsional stresses the resultant shearing stress shall be determined by the formula—

tons per square inch.

(17)

In subsection (16):

ƒ means the maximum transverse stress at the section under consideration.

ƒs means the maximum torsional stress at the same section.

(18)

If a metal shaft of circular section is subject to simultaneous transverse and torsional stresses the resultant tensile stress shall be determined by the formula—

0.375ƒ + 0.625tons per square inch.

(19)

In subsection (18):

ƒ—see subsection (17).

ƒs—see subsection (17).

(20)

The computed linear deflection of a metal shaft shall not exceed 1/1200 part of the span of the shaft.

(21)

If the shaft functions as a cantilever, the deflection shall not exceed 1/600 part of the length of the cantilever.

(22)

For the purpose of computing linear deflections the modulus of elasticity of mild steel shall be deemed to be 13 000 tons per square inch and it shall not be necessary to increase the forces producing deflections in the way otherwise provided by section 125.

(23)

If any shaft has a keyway, featherway, or similar recess greater in any sectional dimension than that provided by British Standard Specification No 46, part 1, 1929, or if a shaft is within classification 3 or 4 or is subject to alteration of stress under power and has any keyway, featherway or similar recess, the stress in the shaft shall be considered to be increased thereby in the ratio—

1

1 — — .

(24)

In subsection (23):

b means the breadth.

d means the depth of the keyway, featherway or similar recess.

D means the diameter of the shaft.

(25)

For subsections (23) and (24), all dimensions must be measured in the same units.

(26)

For the purposes of design only, spur gears that are not within the central 1/3 of the span of their supporting shafts, and cantilevered spur gears that are spaced at a greater distance than 1/2 of their own face width from the nearest support shall be classified in the next higher group than the mechanisms with which they are integral.

(27)

Spur gears of mechanisms within classification 4 shall not be mounted in positions that would subject them to such restriction.

(28)

If mounted on short heavy shafts and contained in rigid, close-fitting boxings that have been machined by methods ensuring correct alignment and meshing, spur gears with machined teeth may, if running in lubricant and completely protected against entry of foreign matter, be classified in the next lower group than the mechanisms with which they are integral.

(29)

This classification shall apply to spur gears of mechanisms within classifications 2, 3 or 4, and is solely for purpose of design.

(30)

Unless approved by the chief inspector spur, spiral or worm gears having other than machined teeth shall not be used in hoisting or luffing mechanisms within classifications 3 or 4, or in hand or power-operated chain or wire rope lifting blocks.

(31)

Notwithstanding the provisions of subsection (38) for purposes of design only, spur, spiral or worm gears used as follows may, if not otherwise in a lower classification, be considered to be within classification 2—

(a)

in travelling or traversing mechanisms of cranes or hoists where promoting or controlling movements in only horizontal paths, and not subject to wind loadings; and

(b)

in mechanisms driving continuous unidirectional conveyors that are provided with independent automatic devices to prevent reversal.

(32)

Spur teeth that are not machined shall be considered as simple cantilevers, each bearing at its free extremity a tangential bending force equal to the pitch circle load the spur gear is required to transmit, having due regard to the increases prescribed by section 125.

(33)

The stresses so determined shall not exceed the relevant and appropriate maximum prescribed by section 126, and modified by subsection (47).

(34)

If spur teeth are effectively supported by a single shroud extending in height to at least the pitch circle, tooth stresses may be considered to have been thereby reduced by 10%.

(35)

Effective double shrouds of such height may be considered to reduce tooth stresses by 33%.

(36)

These reductions shall not be made if the face of the spur gear concerned exceeds 3 times the circumferential pitch of the teeth for a single shroud, or 5 times the pitch for double shrouds.

(37)

Subject to the same limitations, an effective single shroud extending to the top of the teeth may be considered to reduce tooth stresses by 16%, and effective double shrouds of the same height by 50%.

(38)

Spur gears of the following materials shall not, for the purposes of design, be considered to be in a lower group than classification 2 if machined, or classification 3 if not machined:

(a)

cast metals, other than steel;

(b)

extruded metals;

(c)

synthetics, including impregnated fabrics and fibres;

(d)

leather;

(e)

timber, including vegetable fibres.

(39)

The transverse stress at the base of a machined straight involute tooth of a plain or helical spur gear shall be determined from the formula—

pounds per square inch.

(40)

In subsection (39):

F means the effective face of the spur gear measured in inches parallel to the axis of rotation of the gear.

P means the diametral pitch in the diametral plane of rotation.

W means the tooth load in pounds as referred to in subsection (45).

Z means a coefficient to be obtained from table 130.1, relevant and appropriate to the number of teeth of the gear and to the obliquity of the path of contact of mating teeth from planes tangential to the shortest line joining the centre of rotation of the gear to the like centre of its mating gear.

(41)

If the tooth is machined in accordance with Fellows standard 20° stub proportions, P shall be the diametral pitch in the diametral plane of rotation.

(42)

The transverse stress determined in accordance with subsection (39) shall not exceed the relevant and appropriate maximum prescribed by section 126 and modified by subsection (47).

Table 130.1 Coefficients Z relating to teeth of spur gearing

141/2° involute teeth or cycloidal teeth20° involute teeth20° involute stub teethFellow’s 20° stub teeth of undermentioned nominal diametral pitch
No of teeth4/5 5/7 6/8 7/9 8/10 9/11 10/12 12/14
100.1760.2010.261
11.192.226.289
12.210.245.3110.3020.3480.3200.3140.3020.3140.2920.289
13.223.264.324.318.361.336.332.317.327.308.302
14.236.276.339.330.374.352.348.332.339.320.314
15.245.289.349.339.386.364.361.346.348.330.324
16.255.295.360.348.396.374.370.355.354.340.333
17.264.302.368.358.405.383.380.364.366.349.342
18.270.308.377.368.411.390.390.374.374.358.349
19.277.314.386.374.414.398.398.383.380.364.355
20.283.320.393.380.425.405.405.390.386.371.361
21.289.326.399.386.431.411.411.396.392.377.366
22.292.330.404.391.436.417.417.402.397.382.371
23.296.333.408.396.441.422.422.407.402.387.377
24.302.337.411.401.446.427.427.411.405.392.381
25.305.340.416.405.449.432.432.417.409.396.386
26.308.344.421.409.455.436.436.421.413.401.389
27.311.348.426.414.458.440.440.425.417.405.392
28.314.352.430.417.461.443.444.427.421.409.396
29.316.355.434.421.465.446.448.430.424.412.399
30.318.358.437.425.468.449.452.433.427.415.402
32.322.364.443.430.471.455.458.440.431.419.408
33.324.367.445.432.474.458.460.443.432.422.411
35.327.373.449.436.480.463.465.449.438.427.415
37.330.380.454.440.484.468.468.453.442.433.419
39.335.386.457.443.488.471.472.456.445.438.423
40.336.389.459.446.490.475.474.458.446.440.425
45.340.399.468.455.500.484.484.464.455.446.433
50.346.408.474.461.506.490.490.471.461.452.439
55.352.415.480.465.510.495.496.477.467.458.444
60.355.421.484.471.515.500.500.483.471.465.449
65.358.425.488.476.518.503.503.487.474.468.452
70.360.429.493.480.521.506.506.490.477.471.455
75.361.433.496.484.525.509.509.493.480.474.458
80.363.436.499.488.528.512.512.496.483.477.461
90.366.442.503.492.532.517.516.499.487.481.466
100.368.446.506.496.536.521.521.503.490.484.471
150.375.458.518.509.546.534.531.515.503.496.484
200.378.463.524.515.553.540.536.521.509.503.509
300.382.471.534
Rack.390.484.550.543.578.562.553.540.534.528.521
(43)

The strength of the ‘straight’ type involute tooth of a bevel spur gear shall be deemed to be less than that of the tooth of a plain spur gear of the same material, diametral pitch, pitch diameter, face, and number of teeth, in the ratio—

(44)

The strength of the involute tooth of a worm wheel shall be deemed equal to that of a plain spur gear of the same material, diametral pitch, pitch diameter, face, and number of teeth.

(45)

Except if the chief inspector otherwise approves, each tooth of a spur gear shall be considered to bear a load equal to the pitch circle load the spur gear is required to transmit, having due regard to the increases prescribed by section 125.

(46)

Alternatively to the method prescribed by section 130 (39) the strength of the machined straight involute tooth of a plain or helical spur gear may be determined by the procedure prescribed by British Standard Specification No 436-1940, ‘Machine Cut Gears, Helical and Straight Spur’, provided that the approval of the chief inspector is first obtained in relation to all allowances to be made and margins to be preserved.

(47)

To make allowance for dynamic effects the limiting permissible stresses prescribed by section 126 shall for power-driven gear teeth be further reduced in the ratio—

600for metallic teeth, or200 + for nonmetallic teeth
600 + V200 + V
(48)

In subergulation (47):

V means the speed of meshing of the gear teeth measured at their pitch circle in feet per minute.

(49)

For the purpose of determining pressures on lubricated bearing journals or surfaces between which relative movement occurs, the force and moment increases prescribed by section 125 may be disregarded.

(50)

The maximum intensity of bearing pressure between a gunmetal bush or bearing and the plain parallel journal of a mild steel shaft revolving relatively to it, and being a machine shaft of the mechanism of a crane or hoist, or lift or scaffolding, shall not exceed that recommended by Standards Australia Crane and Hoist Code No CB2-1938, rule 510 as appropriate and relevant to the use, speed, clearances and system or conditions of lubrication of the bearing.

(51)

The maximum intensities of bearing pressures between other lubricated journals or surfaces shall not exceed those shown in table 130.2, relevant and appropriate to the rubbing speeds, materials and conditions or way of use.

Notes referring to tables

Intermediate values may be interpolated—

* Maximum permissible pressures at higher speeds shall not exceed those prescribed for 2 inch diameter shafts by Standards Australia Crane & Hoist Code No C.B.2—1938, rule 510.

‡ Maximum permissible pressures at higher speeds shall not exceed by more than 25% those prescribed for 2 inch diameter shafts by Standards Australia Crane & Hoist Code No C.B. 2—1938, rule 510.

§ Maximum permissible pressures at higher speeds shall not exceed by more than 15% those prescribed for 2 inch diameter shafts by Standards Australia Crane & Hoist Code No C.B. 2—1938, rule 510.

† Maximum permissible pressures at higher speeds shall not exceed by more than 45% those prescribed for 2 inch diameter shafts by Standards Australia Crane & Hoist Code No C.B. 2—1938, rule 510.

M.S. means mild steel

Med. S. means steel having a surface hardness of not less than 200 Brinell.

H.S. means steel having a surface hardness of not less than 550 Brinell.

C.S. means mild cast steel.

G.M. means gunmetal.

W.M. means white metal

P.B. means phosphor bronze having a surface hardness not less than 190 Brinell.

C.I. means cast iron.

Table 130.2 Maximum permissible intensities of bearing pressures for plain parallel lubricated bearings, in pounds per square inch (if more specific provision is not made elsewhere in this regulation)

material in
bush ormaximum rubbing speed of journal on bush or bearing in feet/min
type of Bearingjour-nalbear-ing6102030405060801001503004005001 500note
sheave pins, track wheel axles, winding drum spindles, pivots, jib hinges, trunnions, and other plain parallel bearings analogous theretoM.S.


M.S.
M.S.
M.S.M.S.
M.S.


H.S.
C.I.
G.M.
W.M.
1 800


2 200
2 600
4 000
4 000
800


1 400
2 000
3 600
3 750
200


800
1 250
2 800
3 150
100


450
850
2 200
2 600
. . .


. . .
650
1 700
2 100
. . .


200
500
. . .
1 750
. . .


. . .
. . .
1 100
1 350
. . .


100
. . .
700
900
. . .


. . .
300
. . .
700
. . .


. . .
. . .
. . .
‡480
. . .


. . .
100
*260
. . .
. . .


. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .


. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .


. . .
15
. . .
. . .
sheave pins, track wheel axles, winding drum spindles, pivots, jib hinges, trunnions, and other plain parallel bearings analogous theretoM.S.
H.S.
H.S.
H.S.
M.S.
H.S.
C.I.
P.B.
or
W.M.
3 000
7 000
5 000
6 000
. . .
5 300
3 600
5 650
. . .
4 300
2 700
4 900
. . .
3 750
2 250
4 400
. . .
3 350
2 000
4 000
. . .
3 100
. . .
3 650
. . .
2 900
1 750
3 400
. . .
2 600
. . .
3 000
. . .
2 400
1 400
2 800
. . .
2 000
1 100
2 500
. . .
1 150
400
2 230
. . .
. . .
0
. . .
. . .
0
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
50
Med.S.
Med.S.
Med.S.
C.I.
W.M.
P.B.
3 120
4 600
4 600
2 400
4 300
4 140
1 500
3 620
3 220
1 020
2 990
2 530
780
2 410
1 960
600
2 010
. . .
. . .
1 550
1 265
. . .
1 035
800
360
800
. . .
. . .
†550
. . .
120
. . .
§300
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
20
. . .
. . .
C.I.
C.I.
C.I.
C.I.
G.M.
W.M.
1 800
. . .
3 500
1 500
500
2 750
1 000
. . .
1 900
700
. . .
1 500
500
. . .
1 200
400
. . .
1 000
350
. . .
800
. . .
300
600
300
. . .
*450
. . .
. . .
. . .
100
100
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
15
15
. . .
(52)

The maximum intensities of bearing pressures between the surfaces of lubricated plain thrust bearings shall not exceed those shown in table 130.3, relevant and appropriate to the rubbing speeds, materials and way of use.

Table 130.3 Maximum permissible intensities of bearing pressures for lubricated plain thrust bearings, in pounds per square inch (if more specific provision is not made elsewhere in this regulation). Intermediate values may be interpolated

materials inmaximum peripheral rubbing speed in feet/min—
contact10204080100150200500note
M.S on G.M.1 500850320110100806050
M.S. on W.M.1 8001 100460170160150120100
Med.S. on P.B.2 5001 65075017016515514580
Med.S. on W.S.2 5001 8801 000300200190180110Pressures
given are for intermittent running
4 0002 6001 500600500460410150
7504001106050403010
(53)

The maximum intensities of bearing pressures between lubricated plain sliding surfaces shall not exceed those shown in table 130.4, relevant and appropriate to the rubbing speeds, materials and way of use.

Table 130.4 Maximum permissible intensities of bearing pressures for lubricated plain sliding surfaces, in pounds per square inch (if more specific provision is not made elsewhere in this regulation). Intermediate values may be interpolated

materialsmaximun rubbing speed in feet/min—
in contact2093001 200Snote
10088491 760Pressures given are for continuous but reciprocating motions. The bearing pressure for a unidirectional slide shall not exceed one half of that provided for a corresponding but reciprocating slide
W.M. on C.I.3002641475 280
(54)

If the diameter of the journal is less than 11/4 inches, the maximum intensity of bearing pressure shall not exceed that obtained by multiplying the pressure shown in table 130.2 by the coefficient shown in table 130.5, appropriate to the diameter of the journal.

Table 130.5 Reduction coefficients for bearing pressures for lubricated bearings of which the journals are less than 11/4 inches in diameter

diameter of journal in inchescoefficientdiameter of journal in inchescoefficient
1.1250.70.50.3
1.00.50.25 or less0.25
0.750.35
(55)

For the purpose of determining loads on hard steel precision ball or roller bearings of at least equal quality to those complying with British Standard Specification No 292—1927, the force and moment increases prescribed by section 125 may be disregarded.

(56)

The basic load of a ball or roller bearing shall not exceed that relevant and appropriate to the particular speed, size, type and construction of bearing, as tabulated for a 500 hours critical test life by an approved ball or roller bearing maker or an approved representative of the maker in an approved catalogue of the maker or representative.

(57)

Approved ball and roller bearing makers and approved catalogues include—

(a)

The S.K.F. Ball Bearing Co., Australia Proprietary Limited, Catalogue having registered number 1203 over A.N. 50; or

(b)

The Ransome and Marles Bearing Co. Limited, England, Catalogue ‘Publication No 28, August, 1946’; or

(c)

The Bearing Service Company of Australia Proprietary Limited, Catalogue entitled ‘B.S.C. Engineering Manual’, 2nd Edition, 1951; or

(d)

Ball Bearings Proprietary Limited, Catalogue entitled ‘Hyatt Roller Bearings’ having registered number D8-8; or

(e)

G. Vaccari & Company, Melbourne, Catalogue entitled ‘R.I.V. General Catalogue’, serial number 51-03-141A.

(58)

The maximum load on a hard steel precision ball or roller bearing of the quality prescribed by subsection (55) shall not exceed that obtained by dividing the basic load by a life factor of—

(a)

1.75 if the bearing is within classification 1; or

(b)

2.25 if the bearing is within classification 2; or

(c)

2.75 if the bearing is within classification 3; or

(d)

3.5 if the bearing is within classification 4.

(59)

Ball or roller bearings of a lower quality than those conforming with British Standard Specification No 292—1927 shall not be used unless the written approval of the chief inspector is first obtained.

(60)

The bearings shall not be used in contravention of any condition or stipulation made by the chief inspector in the chief inspector’s approval.

(61)

The approval of the chief inspector in relation to any maker, or any catalogue of any maker of ball or roller bearings, may be conditional.

(62)

If the outer race of a self-aligning radial ball bearing rotates, the basic load shall be reduced to 90% of the value prescribed by subsection (56).

(63)

If the outer race of any other type of radial bearing rotates the basic load shall be reduced to 75% of the value prescribed by subsection (56).

(64)

Bush roller chains, and other types of parallel or flat link chains, including Renolds, Morse and Coventry types, shall not be loaded beyond 1/5 part of that load that would produce a permanent elongation of 21/2% of the length of the chain.

(65)

For subsection (64) the increases in applied load prescribed by section 125 may be disregarded, except if the chain is within classification 4, in which case the compensating ratio shall be assumed to be 1.2.

(66)

Because of its lateral inflexibility this type of chain shall not be used as a load chain to suspend loads.

Materials

131 .

(1)

No crane, hoist, lift, scaffolding, or plant, or member, component, part, or attachment of it shall be either in part or in whole of any material, composition or substance, or use or employ any fluid, unless—

(a)

the physical and chemical properties of the material, composition, substance or fluid are shown in, and are in accordance with, a standard specification approved and promulgated by Standards Australia and the use is not disapproved by the chief inspector; and

(b)

a specification setting out its physical and chemical properties, as well as fully detailed and fully dimensioned drawings showing how it is to be utilised and employed, has first been submitted to the chief inspector and approved by the chief inspector; and

(c)

the chief inspector has been advised, in writing, of the physical and chemical properties of the material, composition, substance, or fluid, as in the state in which it is to be placed into commission.

(2)

However, the following materials may if not disapproved by the chief inspector, or subject to any more specific provision made elsewhere in this regulation, be deemed to conform with subsection (1):

earthrubbersalt
claytimberair
sandpaperwater
stonefuelssolvents
bricklubricantsdetergents
vitrified claycoolantspaints
porcelaingraphiteenamels
glassasphaltvarnishes
asbestosbitumenlacquers
leathertar
(3)

Stressed timbers of cranes, hoists, lifts, scaffolding and plant shall conform to the requirements of the Australian Standard Grading Rules for sawn and hewn timbers of select grade, Standard Number (E) 0.54—1942.

(4)

Jarrah, karri and wandoo shall conform to the requirements of Australian Standard Grading Rules for such timbers of select grade, Standard Number 0.10 to 45—1948.

(5)

The rules mentioned in subsections (3) and (4) being those promulgated by Standards Australia.

(6)

If sizes or dimensions of timbers or other materials are prescribed or otherwise cited in this regulation, they shall mean actual sizes, as distinct from nominal or reputed sizes.

(7)

Unless otherwise stated all bolts, setbolts, setscrews, tapbolts, screws etc referred to in this regulation shall be of steel.

(8)

Timbers shall not be painted with any opaque or partly opaque paint or preparation, or be encased or enclosed in any way that will obscure the timber or interfere with ready inspection of it.

(9)

If practicable, bolts in timber shall be spaced at staggered pitches.

(10)

If practicable, effective stitch bolts shall be employed transversely to the bolts of all main connections of, or to, timber members.

(11)

If the lower ends of timbers enter metal sockets, adequate drain holes shall be provided.

(12)

The sockets shall be tapered and the timbers shall fit tightly in them.

(13)

If metal is to be bolted or otherwise secured to the surface of timber, approved bituminous paper or felt sheeting shall be inserted within and throughout the full area of the joint.

(14)

Bolts passing through timber shall have washers under heads and nuts, except if equivalent metal work renders washers unnecessary.

(15)

Unless otherwise approved, timbers shall be joined by employing simple butt joints only.

(16)

Unfilled holes or notches in timber shall be filled by tightly fitting timber plugs to prevent weathering and decay, and the breaking away of adjoining timber.

(17)

The filling of any hole or notch as mentioned in subsection (16) shall not be deemed to restore or increase the strength or any dimension of the timber.

(18)

No laminated or glued timber shall be employed unless approved, or unless so used that its failure would not be productive or conducive of danger to life or limb.

(19)

Cast iron shall not be used in the following applications or for the following purposes, unless the specified approval of the chief inspector has first been obtained:

(a)

the foot lugs or jibs or derricks of power cranes of all types, or the jib or derrick supporting lugs of the cranes;

(b)

soleplates, spiders, or slewing race pinions or slewing racewheels of power derrick or power jib cranes or the brackets carrying slewing race pinions of the cranes;

(c)

masthead castings of derrick or jib cranes;

(d)

straight spur gears of chain blocks;

(e)

main frame or cheek castings of winches used in connection with scaffolding;

(f)

pawls;

(g)

dog or toothed clutches;

(h)

cranks or crank handles;

(i)

hooks or their trunnions or yokes;

(j)

structural beams or cantilevers, or loadbars or yokes subject to primary transverse stress.

(20)

Diecast metals or alloys shall not be used for any purpose unless specifically approved by the chief inspector.

(21)

All steel castings subject to primary transverse stress shall be radiographically examined by an approved authority, and if defects are observed, the casting concerned shall not be placed into commission unless the chief inspector specifically approves.

Fencing—general

132 .

(1)

The following members, components, parts or attachments of scaffoldings, cranes, hoists, plant, lifts or gear shall be effectively guarded so that they shall not be dangerous to persons nearby or persons driving, examining, testing, lubricating, tending, cleaning or adjusting the scaffoldings, cranes, hoists, plant, lifts or gear:

(a)

toothed wheels of builders’ power hoisting winches;

(b)

friction wheels of builders’ power hoisting winches;

(c)

toothed wheels of the longitudinal travelling mechanism of power-driven overhead travelling cranes if exposed above or partially above access platforms, access facilities or end carriages;

(d)

toothed wheels of locomotive type power cranes and power cranes having an analogous arrangement of machinery if the wheels revolve in close proximity to crane frame structures;

(e)

toothed wheels of, and adjacent to, the mixing vessels of power-driven concrete mixers and like mixers, including positions at which the wheels revolve in close proximity to the frame structures of the mixers;

(f)

those members, components, parts or attachments that are within reach of access facilities, floors, the ground, or other working surfaces and that revolve and are of irregular, radially variable, intermittent, broken or gapped contour or have projecting keys, setscrews, bolt ends, nuts, pins (including split pins), bosses, dogs, lugs, ribs, fins, arms or the like because of which they may directly or indirectly engage the person or clothing.

(g)

ends of revolving shafts, spindles, pins or axles that are within reach and that project more than 2 inches beyond their supports;

(h)

transmission belting and transmission chains that are within reach;

(i)

power-driven revolving shafts, spindles, pins or axles if exposed at or near accessholes, hatchways, doorways, gateways or like facilities, or if exposed in such positions with regard to access facilities that persons are likely to make contact with them;

(j)

power-driven shafts, spindles, pins, axles, drums, couplings, toothed wheels, rollers or the like revolving above the upper surfaces of floors, platforms, walkways, pathways and the like wherever an unobstructed minimum clearance of 21/2 inches does not at all times exist between the revolving member and the surface;

(k)

power-driven spoked wheels and wheels having web apertures if the wheels revolve in close proximity to the frame structures of cranes, engines or gear;

(l)

power-driven fans or blowers, including cooling fans of internal-combustion engines;

(m)

hoods or cowlings that may be readily removed or displaced shall not be deemed to be effective guards;

(n)

all members, components, parts of attachments liable to attain a temperature in excess of 140° Fahrenheit or that are liable to discharge flame, gas, vapour or liquid exceeding that temperature.

(2)

In subsection (1) (f), ordinary, plain, concentric spur or worm gearing shall not be deemed to be of irregular, radially variable, intermittent, broken or gapped contour.

(3)

The guards shall be constantly maintained in position in a state of complete effectiveness.

(4)

If so situated that a person may climb or rest on it each guard shall be capable of sustaining, without permanent distortion, a weight of 170 pounds placed in any position on it, together with a simultaneous force of 50 pounds applied horizontally in the same or any other position.

(5)

Protruding or projecting levers, handles, rods, links, bolts, spikes, pins, or other members of less than 2 square inches sectional area shall be so guarded or fenced that they will not endanger the eyes of persons in the vicinity.

Jointers

132A .

(1)

No jointer that is plant shall be used for overhead planing unless—

(a)

it is fitted with a cylindrical cutter block the slots of which are not more than 5/8 of an inch in width and not more than 7/16 of an inch in depth or are of a greater width or depth that is approved; and

(b)

the edges of the table that form the slot or opening in which the cutter block revolves are kept as close to the block as is possible, consistently with the proper working of the machine.

(2)

In this section:

jointer means the woodworking machine commonly known as a jointer, surface planer or buzzer.

Electrical

133 .

(1)

In this section:

out of reach means 8 feet above the nearest floor or other working surface, or object on which a person might reasonably step or stand without climbing. An object may be regarded as out of reach if it is 7 feet above the nearest edge of a floor or working surface, and at the same time displaced 21 inches laterally outwards from the edge, or 6 feet above and 30 inches laterally, or 5 feet above and 40 inches laterally, or 4 feet above and 48 inches laterally.

(2)

Except if provision is made elsewhere in this regulation the electrical wiring and equipment of all cranes, lifts, hoists, scaffolding, plant and gear as also that used in building, excavation and compressed air works shall conform with the S.A.A. Wiring Rules.

(3)

Electrified conductors, terminals, fittings and apparatus within reach of access facilities, floors, platforms or other working surfaces, or stairs or ramps, or stacks of materials or goods on which persons may readily climb, or within reach of any part of any crane, lift, hoist, scaffolding, or plant, to which the driver or an attendant is liable to resort for the purposes of inspecting, lubricating, or tending, shall be safely enclosed or safely fenced.

(4)

For subsection (3), the dielectric of the conductor, terminal, fitting or apparatus shall not be considered to be a safe enclosure or fence.

(5)

Subsection (3) shall not apply to flexible cords, or, as far as the bridge platforms are concerned, to the bare conductors between or on the bridge beams of overhead traveller cranes.

(6)

Flexible cords shall not, in damp places, be within reach unless boxed or enclosed in an approved way.

(7)

No indoor electrified bare conductor, terminal, fitting or apparatus shall be set at a less distance above ground level, or above the level of any floor, platform or other working surface, or stair or ramp or any readily accessible equipment than 12 feet.

(8)

However, if the type of goods or materials or equipment being handled in the vicinity is such that inadvertent contact might be expected with the electrified members, the distance shall be increased to at least 16 feet.

(9)

If approved, collector wires or conductors may be of steel.

(10)

All parts of electrically operated cranes, hoists, scaffolding and plant that are of metal shall, in earthed situations, be effectively earthed.

(11)

However, subsection (10) shall not necessitate earthing of isolated metal parts of timber appliances if the parts cannot reasonably become electrified.

(12)

Unless fixed in position and free from working movements, earthing conductors shall be flexible.

(13)

All earthing conductors shall be effectively protected against mechanical damage.

(14)

Flexible earthing conductors of copper or bronze shall not contain any wire of greater diameter than 1/100 part of an inch.

(15)

Each earthing conductor of every iceworks crane or hoist shall be of at least 1/10 of 1 square inch in section area, and each crane track rail shall be separately earthed.

(16)

Cranes or hoists used for supporting objects that are being electrically welded shall be effectively earthed with an earthing conductor not less in area than 1/10 of 1 square inch.

(17)

Cranes or hoists, other than caterpillar or mobile cranes or hoists, shall not be set up or built or set or placed in position in proximity to any electrified equipment or apparatus unless effective permanent fencing or other approved safeguard has first been provided and fixed to ensure the safety of persons using, or working in connection with, the crane or hoist.

(18)

Caterpillar, mobile or portable cranes, hoists or plant in the proximity of electrified equipment or apparatus shall be effectively earthed in a way that will ensure the safety of persons using or working in connection with the cranes, hoists or plant.

(19)

If cranes or hoists are required, unavoidably, to handle loads in close proximity to electrified conductors, as may occur in the erection of city buildings, all loads shall be controlled by dry tail ropes of fibre or other dielectric material, and thereby prevented from approaching or being blown within 5 feet of any electrified conductor.

(20)

Pendant switches attached to flexible conduit or other flexible supports shall not be employed in damp places.

(21)

Plug sockets for flexible conductors or flexible cords shall be wired identically, so that identical phases will be selected by the pins of the plugs when inserted in different sockets.

(22)

The identity of active and neutral connections shall be preserved in a like way.

(23)

Electrical emergency limiting devices prescribed by section 127 (131) to (135) shall be wired in series with the motors concerned, and shall directly, mechanically and without recourse to relays, interrupt the whole current to it.

(24)

Approved effective permanent facilities shall be provided by which persons may safely inspect, tend and adjust all electrical equipment.

(25)

The facilities shall include approved permanent safe means of access.

(26)

The circuit breakers of cranes, hoists, scaffolding and plant shall be located at the main driving stations of them, closely adjacent to the controls, and shall be so devised and fixed that the driver may, in emergency, instantly open them.

(27)

Manual circuit breakers shall be so devised that if opened by remote push-button or switch they cannot be manually closed, either momentarily or otherwise, until the remote push-button or switch concerned has been manually reset.

(28)

The principal isolating switch of every electric crane or hoist that travels on elevated tracks shall be a simple manually operated series switch and shall be set closely adjacent to the foot of the ladder or stair that gives access to the crane or hoist.

(29)

If access to the crane or hoist is obtained from an adjacent floor or analogous permanent elevated surface, the switch shall be set closely adjacent to the position at which the driver is to embark and disembark.

(30)

The principal isolating switch shall manually isolate all downshop conductors from the incoming supply of electrical current.

(31)

It shall be plainly marked ‘Crane Switch’ or ‘Hoist Switch’ according to its purpose, and at least 2 square feet of the immediate background behind the switch shall be painted a distinctive bright yellow colour.

(32)

In addition to the isolating switch, emergency push‑buttons or switches shall be set not more than 6 feet above the principal floor or floors served and at such positions that the crane or hoist cannot travel a greater distance than 100 feet from its position when immediately adjacent to the nearest emergency switch.

(33)

The emergency switches shall, when operated, isolate all downshop conductors from the incoming supply of electrical current, and shall be so devised that the conductors cannot again be electrified until the emergency switch concerned has been manually reset.

(34)

If the floor served by the crane or hoist is so obstructed that speedy access to all emergency switches is not assured, additional emergency switches shall be fixed so that the distance of travel of the crane or hoist is reduced to 50 feet or to any other distance that the chief inspector may direct.

(35)

The electrical switches and control and protective equipment of each crane, lift, hoist, scaffolding or item of plant shall be clearly and distinctively marked and partitioned off from all other electrical switches and control or protective equipment.

(36)

To avoid interference with access facilities and so that they may be more readily observed by the driver, the downshop conductors supplying electrical energy to any crane or hoist that travels on elevated tracks shall be adjacent to that track that is most remote from the main driving station of the crane or hoist.

(37)

Collectors shall be so devised that downshop or other conductors cannot become displaced from them, and vice versa.

(38)

If static access platforms, other than small platforms provided solely as a means by which persons may embark or disembark, are fixed in connection with any travelling crane, hoist or scaffolding, a simple manually operated series switch shall be provided on the crane, hoist or scaffolding within easy reach of the static platform.

(39)

The switch shall, when opened, isolate the travelling motion of the crane, hoist or scaffolding from the incoming supply of electric current.

(40)

Slots provided in floors, platforms, wharf deckings, or analogous surfaces or in other readily accessible places for electrical collectors of travelling cranes or hoists shall not exceed 11/2 inches in width.

(41)

The bare conductors under them, or adjacent to them, shall be so placed that they are at least 11/2 inches clear of any straight rod that may be inserted through the slot.

(42)

Control pendants of electric cranes and hoists shall be so devised and arranged that the person operating them is able to conveniently stand at least 6 feet from the suspended load.

(43)

Markers or yokes suspended on pendant cords shall be of a type and fixed at a height that they will not injure persons who may collide with or be struck by them.

(44)

Downshop and other bare conductors may be supported by and on approved single insulators.

(45)

End straining or tensioning screws shall not be locked or otherwise rigidly attached to their supports, but shall be free to align themselves with the conductors.

(46)

Locknuts, or other locking devices shall be employed but in a way that will permit such freedom.

(47)

If collector wires or conductors of an overhead traveller crane are on a bridge platform of them, the ends and other points of entry to the platform shall be fenced with approved gates, each bearing an approved warning notice.

(48)

Unless an approved safety fence is erected on the platform, no other equipment, mechanism or apparatus that may require inspection or attention shall be placed on the platform on which collector wires or conductors are located.

(49)

Electrical switch or control or protective gear shall not be placed on the bridge platforms of overhead traveller cranes or of gallows or gantry cranes unless the approval of the chief inspector has first been obtained.

(50)

Switches and controllers actuated by pendants shall be so devised and constructed that in the event of 1 pendant becoming detached, the weight of the other will not prevent the switch or controller returning to the neutral or open position.

(51)

Pendant controls shall not be employed if they may foul or become otherwise jammed or entangled in any obstruction.

(52)

Electric lights and the conductors supplying them with current shall not if used within reach in excavation work, or in earthed situations, be at a higher potential than 32V alternating current or 50V direct current above earth or the earthed situation.

(53)

However, subsection (52) shall not apply if the conductors are in metal conduit and the lights fixed permanently in position.

(54)

Electrified conductors used in building, excavation or compressed air works shall be fixed overhead and if practicable out of reach.

(55)

If within reach, they shall be in metal or approved rubber conduit.

(56)

If it is necessary to lay conductors on or closely adjacent to floors, they shall be in metal conduit.

(57)

Rubber conduit shall in such case be used only in approved circumstances if damage is not to be expected.

(58)

Subsection (54) to (57) shall not prevent the use of approved flexible cords for portable lights, tools and portable plant provided the conductors are of the least reasonable working length that can be used.

(59)

Electrified bare conductors, fittings or apparatus shall not be within reach of windows, openings or edges of floors of other working surfaces at building, demolition, excavation or compressed air works.

(60)

Electrified conductors, fittings and apparatus under wharves shall be effectively fenced for the protection of persons in boats or climbing under the wharves.

(61)

Electrified conductors and apparatus shall at all times be at least 6 feet clear of vessels containing gas under pressure.

Stiff-leg derrick cranes

134 .

(1)

The main members of a stiff-leg derrick crane shall be considered to be on its left-hand side if they are to the left of a vertical plane extending through the top and bottom pivots, and passing through a point halfway along a line joining the 2 backstay foot anchorages, the direction of vision being from the last mentioned point towards the pivots.

(2)

In determining which members or parts are on the left, and which on the right-hand side, the jib shall be deemed to be in the plane so defined.

(3)

If 1 backstay of a crane is shorter in length than the other, the shorter stay shall be on the left-hand side of the crane.

(4)

Jibhead bridles shall be of approved fabricated construction or of flexible steel wire rope having in each part or single not less than 6 strands, each containing not less than 19 wires.

(5)

Approved connections shall be made between rope bridles and jibhead pins.

(6)

If any rope is in more than 1 part or single, the loads in the respective parts or singles shall be effectively equalised.

(7)

Ropes and their sheaves and bridles shall be so devised and constructed that they do not foul the crane members or parts, or any obstructions, particularly during slewing or luffing.

(8)

The mast bridle collar shall be bolted through the top pivot by means of a tight-fitting bolt.

(9)

The nut of the bolt shall be secured by a split pin.

(10)

All other collars on the top pivot shall be secured in the same way as the mast bridle collar.

(11)

The maximum total ‘slack’, or combined longitudinal take-up clearance, of all members encircling the top pivot shall not exceed 1/16 of an inch.

(12)

The total diametral clearance of any gland on the top pivot or on any sleeper pin, or of any member on an anchorage pin, shall not exceed when worn 1.5/10 of an inch.

(13)

Bolts, or pins with nuts, shall be used to secure bridles, and backstays to top pivot fittings.

(14)

The nuts shall be secured with split pins.

(15)

Unless secured by approved locking plates, the pins of all sheaves shall be secured by nuts having split pins.

(16)

Pins securing bottom glands to sleepers or to foundations shall have nuts secured by split pins.

(17)

Race pinions, and their shafts, shall be secured by keep plates in addition to keys or splines.

(18)

Keys or feathers shall not be used in connection with sliding pinions or sliding clutches, unless the keys or feathers are formed as an integral part of, and in 1 piece with, the shaft.

(19)

The soleplates of all derrick cranes shall be effectively fastened down to prevent uplifting.

(20)

Effective positive devices shall be employed to prevent all masts from lifting from their bottom pivots.

(21)

Topmost ends of backstay timbers shall have metal weatherings to exclude moisture.

(22)

Regular inspections shall be made of all members, components, parts and attachments of derrick cranes that shall at all times be kept in good order and condition.

(23)

Particular attention must be given to connections and fastenings, especially if members are of timber.

(24)

In addition to any moving flexible earthing conductor that may be used, electric derrick cranes shall be effectively earthed from the soleplate or other static part of the framework.

(25)

The racewheels and pinions and other parts of the slewing mechanisms shall be kept in such adjustment that lost motion at the jibhead shall not exceed a total of 2 feet, measured horizontally.

(26)

The controls of derrick cranes shall be grouped conveniently at the left-hand side of the main driving station, and the station shall be so devised and constructed that while at the controls the driver has a good view of the load.

(27)

The counterbalance weights of derrick cranes shall be so devised, constructed and attached that they do not subject the backstays or sleepers or pivots to bending actions.

(28)

If the sleepers or backstays of a derrick crane are lashed down, the lashings shall be of a type that may be readily tightened by shortening from time to time without the use of wedges.

(29)

Packings greater in thickness than 3 inches shall not be used under cranes depending on lashings, unless approved.

(30)

If derrick cranes are mounted on trucks or bogies, a rigid spar, or other rigid member, shall be secured between the 2 backstay foot trucks or bogies to ensure their correct spacing and relationship.

(31)

Permanent blockings shall be fixed under each truck or bogie, to ensure that in the event of its derailment or axle failure, the crane members will not descend or fall more than 11/2 inches.

Caterpillar cranes and mobile cranes

135 .

(1)

Subject to subsections (3) and (4), if the jib is of the cantilevered type an approved limiting device shall be provided by which overluffing is prevented, and by which, in addition, the jib is prevented from being lowered on the lifting hook or block or analogous medium, or the hook, block or medium from being wound into contact with the jib.

(2)

The limiting device shall be effective and shall be constantly maintained in good working order and condition.

(3)

If the chief inspector so directs, or if it is advisable not to equip any caterpillar or mobile crane with the limiting devices mentioned in subsection (1), or those prescribed by section 127 (131) to (135), the crane shall instead of it be equipped with approved devices by which the loads in the crane ropes or other hoisting or luffing media shall be effectively limited in magnitude to an approved amount.

(4)

Alternatively, the crane shall be so designed and constructed that the loads will be automatically limited as previously mentioned.

(5)

Hydraulic or fluid pressure rams used in connection with hoisting or luffing shall have at their fluid outlet connection a restricting or throttling device that will, in the event of breakage of the pipe conveying fluid, effectively prevent the load, or the jibhead from descending at a greater speed than 100 feet per minute.

(6)

Correctly prepared blocks or approved stops shall be provided by which the elastic action of the road wheel springs may be restricted or eliminated if desirable.

(7)

If necessary or advisable, jacks shall be provided for adjusting the crane chassis to level the jib hinges.

(8)

The jacks shall be complete with all auxiliary equipment necessary or advisable for their safe and effective operation.

(9)

Jacks shall be so devised and constructed that they will strongly resist lateral and longitudinal movements of the crane.

(10)

Each jack shall incorporate a dynamically irreversible screw thread adjustment as to length and shall have a foot of sufficient area and strength to ensure against settlement into ordinary dry soil surfaces.

(11)

A low arm or rail shall be provided at the off side of the driver’s seat to prevent the driver sliding under the crane or losing control should it tilt or overturn laterally.

(12)

If the driver operates the crane from a position in which the driver might be injured by the jib, derrick or load, should either fall or rebound, an approved structure shall be provided for the driver’s protection.

Gravity operated overwinding limit devices

Electrical

136 .

(1)

A gravity operated limit device consists of an electric switch opened by a weight attached directly or indirectly to a crank, drum, sheave or quadrant controlling the switch spindle.

(2)

A weight of greater predominance, attached in a somewhat similar way, holds the switch in the closed position until raised by some moving part of the mechanism that the limiting device is required to control.

(3)

As the predominant weight is raised, the opening weight takes effect.

(4)

The effective radius at which the switch opening weight acts shall be neither less than 4 inches nor more than 15 inches, measured from longitudinal axis of switch spindle, to centre of gravity of opening weight.

(5)

The torque developed by the opening weight shall not be less than 100 pounds-inches at the switch spindle at all times, irrespective of the position of the switch actuating quadrant, or crank, or opening weight.

(6)

When the switch is equipped with ‘hammer’ or ‘impulse’ weights to open, or assist in opening it, the abovementioned torque shall be increased by 11/4 times the maximum torque required at the switch spindle to raise and trip the ‘impulse weights’.

(7)

Approved resilient pads or stops shall be provided at both limits of travel of the opening weight to relieve the switch components of undue impact.

(8)

The switch actuating cord, as also all other cords employed, shall be galvanised flexible steel wire cord, not less than 3/4 of an inch in circumference and shall lead directly from the striking mechanism to the opening mechanism, without guides of any kind.

(9)

If the use of a diverting, or deflector, sheave is unavoidable, 1 only may be used to deflect the actuating cord in the desired direction, provided that—

(a)

the sheave is not less than 4 inches in diameter at the bottom of the rope groove; or

(b)

the sheave has a symmetrical rope groove at least 1 inch deep, with sides enclosing a total angle of 60°; or

(c)

the sheave is bored at least 1/64 of an inch larger in diameter than the pin on which it is to work and if practicable fitted with a self-lubricating bush; or

(d)

the sheave shall not be fitted with any form of rope guard but shall work freely on a pin securely fastened in a rigid position on the adjacent structure, and sufficient clearances shall be allowed to ensure that the steel cord will not catch or jam in the event of it becoming frayed or displaced from the sheave; or

(e)

free, or floating, sheave blocks attached to ropes shall not be used to deflect actuating cords.

(10)

All freely suspended weights shall have at least 1 additional approved safety cord, chain, or device, attached to them, to prevent the weight falling in the event of failure of its normal supports.

(11)

Suspended weights shall not have guides, or be enclosed in casings.

(12)

Suspended switch-closing, or ‘striking’ weights, above lifting hooks or other analogous media, shall be loosely connected to the hoisting ropes, or otherwise restrained, by approved means, to prevent undue relative displacement.

(13)

Knife switches shall not be used.

(14)

If the torque required at the switch spindle to open the switch, when in normally good condition and free of all actuating mechanisms, exceeds or may feasibly exceed 10 pounds-inches, additional opening torque of approved magnitude shall be provided.

(15)

Layshafts or intermediate shafts shall not be used, but this shall not prevent extension of the switch spindle in an approved way.

Fork-lift trucks

137 .

(1)

A fork-lift truck means a short-wheelbase mobile truck or carriage having at the front end a rigid vertical steel frame or mast, usually telescopic, and commonly capable of being inclined from the vertical a few degrees fore or aft.

(2)

On or between the members of the mast a trolley moves in a vertical or near-vertical path, and carries projecting horizontal tines by means of which loads are raised and lowered.

(3)

Instead of tines, other lifting media such as a jib, pole, platform, scoop, or bucket may be used.

(4)

The basic safe working load for which a fork-lift truck is rated shall be determined as though the load were placed on the tines with its centre of gravity at a horizontal distance from the vertical faces of the tines equal to 1 inch plus 1/2 of the length of the longest pallet for which the tines are designed.

(5)

The vertical height of the centre of gravity of the load shall be assumed to be 30 inches above the tines.

(6)

Fork-lift trucks shall have approved robust overhead framings and grids to protect drivers against falling objects.

(7)

Grid apertures shall not be greater than 6 inches by 3 inches, but shall be sufficiently small to reject objects or articles of the least size handled by the truck, and must not, except if approved, reject anything less than a ball 1 inch in diameter.

(8)

To promote good vision, grid apertures shall be rectangular, and crimped meshings shall be used only if approved.

(9)

Guards shall be provided to prevent drivers’ feet from being injured by moving members of the mast, or the trolley or lifting equipment.

(10)

An effective back guard shall be provided and fixed to the mast trolley to function as a back apron, and to prevent projecting loads from engaging the mast or lifting chains or mechanisms, or from becoming displaced.

(11)

The guards shall project at least 9 inches beyond each side of the mast structure.

(12)

Fork-lift trucks shall, when bearing loads, be used only on hard level surfaces.

(13)

If it is necessary for a fork-lift truck to negotiate a ramp or other incline, the mast end of the truck shall at all times be uphill.

(14)

While transporting loads, the tines or other analogous media shall not be raised above the level of the mast hinges.

(15)

While equipped with jibs, the masts shall be kept in the vertical position.

(16)

Reference should be made to section 127 (152) in regard to jibs.

(17)

Masts shall not be inclined forward, away from trucks, except when the tines are near floor level, or when the truck is close to the stack of goods or materials being handled.

(18)

Hooks of jibs of fork-lift trucks shall be so suspended that they can be freely displaced in any direction through an angle of at least 30° from the vertical.

(19)

Only approved load markings and notices shall be exhibited on fork‑lift trucks.

(20)

The forward movement or inclination of the mast of a fork-lift truck shall not exceed 4° from the vertical.

(21)

The backward movement, towards the truck, shall not exceed 6° from the vertical.

Commercial type hoists

138 .

(1)

A commercial type hoist means a power-driven hoist winding or unwinding ropes, chains or other flexible media by which loads are raised or lowered from 1 floor or working surface to another.

(2)

The natural lateral oscillations of the loads are either entirely unconstrained or loosely constrained by flexible guides or by gravitationally induced pressure against skids.

(3)

Whether or not flexible guides or skids are employed, it is essential that the load be free to swing laterally and pass any 12 inch diameter obstruction that may enter its path.

(4)

In addition to other notices, brands or markings that may be prescribed elsewhere in this regulation, every such hoist shall be clearly, conspicuously and permanently branded with the name of its manufacturer, and with an appropriate and distinctive serial number.

(5)

All stations from which the hoist can be controlled shall be so placed or equipped that a driver at it can at all times clearly see the load.

(6)

If there is more than 1 control station, the controls at each station shall have a master control that must be actuated before the controls become operable.

(7)

On actuation of the master control at any station the controls of all other stations shall automatically become inoperable.

(8)

Landing flaps or rolling platforms shall not be used unless specifically approved.

(9)

The upper surfaces of landing flaps shall be inclined upwards towards their outer edges at an angle of not less than 15° to the horizontal.

(10)

Rolling platforms shall be securely fenced to prevent persons falling through floor openings or well holes, and shall be so devised that they do not at any time leave exposed openings.

(11)

Wherever practicable, means shall be provided by which persons may safely land or ship loads without having to closely approach the edges of floors or other working surfaces.

(12)

Well holes and floor openings shall be securely fenced and provided with toe boards not less than 4 inches in depth.

(13)

However, fencings and toe boards may be temporarily removed at 1 side only while loads are being landed or shipped, and that on completion of the operation, the fencings and boards shall be promptly replaced.

(14)

If well holes or floor openings have trapdoors, the doors shall be in pairs, and shall open upwards.

(15)

Each door shall in opening swing through an angle approximately 100° and shall constitute a fence or guard not less than 3 feet high for the opening otherwise exposed.

(16)

The ends of the opening shall, while the doors are open, be fenced as provided by subsections (12) and (13).

(17)

The edges of floors or working surfaces adjacent to which loads are raised or lowered shall be securely fenced.

(18)

However, fencings may be temporarily removed only while loads are being landed or shipped, and that on completion of the operation the fencings shall be promptly replaced.

(19)

If loads are to pass through openings, the least horizontal dimension of any of the openings shall be not less than the greatest horizontal length or diagonal or diameter of the load, or of the platform, box, yoke or vessel containing the load, whichever is the greater, plus 2 feet.

Tower hoists for constructional, building, demolition, or excavation works

139 .

(1)

A hoist tower means a vertical tower of rectangular section, within which loads are raised or lowered by means of a guided platform, guided bucket, or other convenient guided medium.

(2)

The tower is maintained in an upright position by guys or struts, or more commonly by being secured to an adjacent building or structure.

(3)

Each of the 4 sides, or faces, of the tower shall comprise a simple truss of plain orthodox design, capable of resisting transverse forces.

(4)

Neither the horizontal width nor the horizontal depth of a hoist tower shall exceed 6 feet, or be less than 5 feet.

(5)

All hoist towers shall be constructed of members not less in strength, rigidity and reliability than those prescribed by table 139, and no tower shall exceed the relevant and appropriate height prescribed, nor shall any panel of it be of any greater panel length.

Table 139 Tower hoists for constructional, building, demolition or excavation works (for hoisting materials only), maximum heights and panel length and minimum dimensions of members

maximum height of tower in feetform of section of horizontal bracings IIdimen-sions of
section of horizontal bracings II
form of section of diagonal bracings IIdimen-sions of section of diagonal bracing IIform of section of top horizontal whalings # dimen-sions of section of top horizontal whalings #form of section of head-beamsdimen-sions of section of head-beamsform of section of tower base whalingsdimen-sions of section tower base whalings
guyedsupported‡material†max panel lengthform of section of verticaldimensions of section of vertical
200200pine timber *60rect-angularone 4 × 4 or two 5 × 2rect-angular5 × 2rect-angular5 × 2rect-angular10 deep × 31/2 widerect-angular hard-woodtwo 6 deep × 4 widerectangular5 deep × 2 wide
200200mild steel60angle3 × 3 × 5/16angle21/2 x 21/2 x 1/4angle or 2 flats21/2 x 21/2 x ¼
Two 2 × 1/4
channel7 deep × 3 widechannel6 deep × 3 widechannel or angle4 deep ×
2 wide
3 × 3 × 5/16
100 §200mild steel60round tube *1.9 outside diameter × 0.192 wall thicknessround tube *1.9 outside diameter × 0.192 wall thicknessround tube *1.9 outside diameter × 0.192 wall thicknessdittodittodittodittoround tube **1.9 outside diameter × 0.192 wall thickness
120 §200alum-inium alloy *60round tube *1.9 outside diameter × 0.176 wall thicknessround tube *1.9 outside diameter × 0.176 wall thicknessround tube *1.9 outside diameter × 0.176 wall thicknessor
to be framed in an approved way
dittodittoround tube **1.9 outside diameter × 0.176 wall thickness

* These must be of approved type and quality and material.

† This may be measured as a vertical distance from centre to centre of the horizontal braces referred to in note II below.

‡ Provided tower is fully supported against wind and other lateral forces by being braced in an approved way to a building or structure equivalent to it.

§ This height may be increased by 30 feet if the major load or reaction applied by headbeams to tower is divided equally between 2 main verticals.

II ie, internal bracings forming the web system of the tower, as distinct from the external bracings referred to in ‡ above.

# ie, the particular whaling carrying greatest load from the headbeams, other whalings may be 6 in × 3 in pine timber. If practicable, however, the headbeams should be supported directly by the runners or by the corner posts or verticals of the tower, and in such case smaller whalings could be used.

** The vertical tubes shall in addition have approved feet or base plates.

Unless otherwise stated, all dimensions are in inches.

(6)

No person shall set up, or build, or set or place in position any hoist of greater size, or speed, or for bearing greater loads, or of different construction than prescribed in this section, until the person has submitted drawings of it to the chief inspector and obtained the chief inspector’s approval.

(7)

The combined weight of the safe working load and the platform, bucket, or other medium by means of which it is raised or lowered shall not exceed 1 ton.

(8)

No person shall attach to or impose on any hoist tower, or any part of it, any load other than that borne by the platform, bucket, or medium analogous to it, and no person shall attach to any hoist tower or to any part of it any device capable of imposing such load, unless approved by the chief inspector.

(9)

However, subsection (8) shall not prevent the use of a dynamic counterbalance weight as prescribed in this section.

(10)

The speed at which any load is raised or lowered shall not exceed 600 feet per minute.

(11)

If dynamic (flying) counterbalance weights are employed, they shall not balance more than 70% of the unladen weight of the platform, bucket, or other medium by means of which loads are raised or lowered.

(12)

The corner posts or verticals of every hoist tower shall be braced together with horizontal braces and by it divided into panels each not greater in vertical height than 5 feet.

(13)

Every such panel shall contain 1 rigid, or alternatively 2 flexible braces, fixed diagonally to provide against shearing forces, and to complete the web system of the 4 trusses comprising the tower.

(14)

If, for purposes of access, it is necessary to omit any diagonal brace, the panel thus weakened shall be adequately strengthened by other bracing at least equivalent to that omitted.

(15)

No bolt less in diameter than 5/8 of an inch shall be used to connect or interconnect the members of a hoist tower, or to attach guides or runners to it.

(16)

Not less than 6 such bolts shall be effectively used in each splice made in the posts or verticals of every hoist tower, 3 being above, and 3 below the joint.

(17)

Each splice in the verticals of towers of metal or alloy tubes shall be designed for the full comprehensive load, and alternatively a tensile load of not less than 2 tons.

(18)

Every hoist tower shall be effectively supported laterally, at a level of not more than 30 feet above its base, and after that at levels not more than 30 feet apart, so that no greater length of tower than 30 feet remains unsupported.

(19)

In addition, the top of the tower shall be so supported if more than 20 feet above the next lower lateral supports, and in any case if carrying a hopper or tipping bucket or analogous device.

(20)

The lateral supports shall comprise at each such level not less than 4 flexible or extra flexible steel wire rope guys, each not less in circumference than 11/2 inches and each having an ultimate tensile value of not less than 57/10 tons.

(21)

Each guy rope shall have not less than 6 strands and each such strand shall have at least 19 wires.

(22)

All guys shall be effectively secured to the corner posts or verticals of the tower.

(23)

Alternatively, at the levels previously mentioned, the tower shall be effectively braced in an approved way to an adjacent building or other structure self-evidently capable of affording the tower complete support.

(24)

In plan view all guys shall appear as straight line continuations or extensions of the diagonals of a section of the tower.

(25)

A closely boarded platform of planks not less in thickness than 11/2 inches if pine timber and 11/8 inches if hardwood, shall be provided and fixed adjacent to the tower-head rope-sheaves as prescribed by section 127 (153) and (154).

(26)

The platform shall be protected on sides and ends by guardrails conforming with section 154.

(27)

If access to the platform cannot be safely obtained from the platform or bucket of the hoist, safe access ladders and platforms in accordance with section 154 shall be provided and fixed.

(28)

The hoist tower shall be effectively enclosed and shall be kept so enclosed, by close-fitting timber boarding not less than 3/4 of an inch in thickness or by 18-gauge wire netting having a mesh not greater than 2 inches, or by black or galvanised steel sheeting of thickness not less than 24 gauge, positively fixed to the outside of the tower frame to a height of not less than 6 feet above the level of every floor surface, scaffolding, platform or stairway adjacent to the hoist tower.

(29)

The verticals of hoist towers of metal shall not be subjected to transverse (bending) forces, and no rope deflector block or other device or attachment capable of applying such forces shall be fixed or applied to the verticals, or used.

(30)

Guardrails conforming with section 154 shall be provided and fixed across all openings giving access to the interior of all hoist towers.

(31)

The rails shall be so pivoted at at least 1 side of the opening that access is obtained by raising the rail or rails, which may be suitably counterbalanced.

(32)

Brackets or stops shall be provided which shall prevent guardrails being lowered below horizontal.

(33)

Guardrails shall be set 12 inches back from the tower face served by them.

(34)

No person shall raise or otherwise displace any guardrail unless the hoist platform is stationary and level with the floor or surface served by the rail, and all rails shall be replaced in the safe horizontal position before the platform moves from the floor or surface.

(35)

The horizontal clearance between the front or back edge of a hoist platform and the adjacent interior face of the tower bracings shall not exceed 2 inches.

(36)

An efficient and safe signalling arrangement shall be provided for the purpose of transmitting signals to the hoist driver as to when to raise and to lower the hoist platform or vessel, and also as to when to stop all motion of the hoist.

(37)

The signalling system shall be arranged so that its operation must be intentional on the part of the operator.

(38)

A warning bell, the sound of which will be distinctly and continuously heard when the platform is moving in any position of its travel, shall be fitted to every hoist platform.

(39)

No person other than a worker engaged in bona fide maintenance work shall ride on the hoist platform, bucket, or other medium by means of which loads are raised or lowered.

(40)

No person shall instruct, permit, or allow any other person so to do.

(41)

However, subsections (39) and (40) shall not apply for hoists designed and constructed in accordance with this regulation for raising or lowering workers.

(42)

A notice stating that persons are prohibited from riding on the platform or other lifting medium shall be fixed and kept so fixed in such a position on the hoist platform or medium that it can be clearly read by a person standing at least 3 feet away from the edge of the hoist platform, bucket, or other lifting medium.

(43)

However, subsection (42) shall not apply for hoists designed and constructed in accordance with this regulation for raising or lowering workers.

(44)

Every hoist winch shall have legibly painted, and kept so painted on it, a number for purposes of identification and record.

(45)

The safe working load shall be painted in positions where it will be clearly discerned by the hoist driver and by persons loading the hoist.

(46)

All openings in floors, walls, or other parts of the building or structure through which a hoist operates shall be fenced with guardrails conforming with section 154.

(47)

The rails shall be set 12 inches back from the adjacent edges of the openings.

(48)

All winch control levers, and the controls of the engine or electric motor driving the winch, shall be so grouped that every such control lever and control is within workable reach of the person acting as driver in charge of the hoist from the position that the person takes up when driving the hoist.

(49)

The maximum throw of the control lever of a friction hoist winch shall not exceed 60°.

Whip or sheerleg hoists for constructional, building, demolition, or excavation works

140 .

(1)

A whip hoist means a simple sheerlegs or other approved frame, set at the brink of an elevated platform or surface, or of a hole, and carrying rope and sheave equipment by means of which loads are raised or lowered.

(2)

The loads commonly consisting of barrows of building material, and being steadied and guided to some extent by being allowed to slide or drag against skidboards or equivalent devices during ascent and descent.

(3)

Each leg of the sheerlegs shall, if of pine timber, be not less in section than 5 inches by 3 inches.

(4)

It shall be of sufficient length to extend at least 12 inches above the top connecting bolt.

(5)

The horizontal distance between the lower ends of the legs of the sheerlegs shall not be greater than 7 feet 6 inches, and the vertical height of the top connecting bolt of the sheerlegs shall not be less than 14 feet above the level at which that horizontal distance is measured.

(6)

Alternatively or if a large sheerlegs is required, the angle contained between either leg and the horizontal shall not be less than 75°.

(7)

Sheerlegs shall be symmetrical in construction.

(8)

The top connecting bolt mentioned in subsection (4) shall not be less in diameter than 3/4 of an inch and the nut shall be locked.

(9)

The legs of the sheerlegs shall rest on a base plank not less in section than 12 inches in horizontal width by 2 inches thick.

(10)

The legs shall be prevented from spreading, and from moving towards the edges of the base plank by hardwood battens 3 inches by 2 inches in section, bolted to the base plank by bolts not less in diameter than 1/2 inch.

(11)

In addition the legs shall be prevented from lifting over the battens by wire rope lashings passing through holes drilled not less than 6 inches above the lower ends of the legs.

(12)

The topmost hoisting block shall be suspended on a 11/2 inch circumference steel wire rope snotter having not less than 6 strands each containing not less than 24 wires, and the snotter shall lie or rest in the topmost V formed between the legs, above the top connecting bolt.

(13)

The back guy shall be of steel wire rope at least 13/8 inches in circumference, having not less than 6 strands each containing not less than 19 wires.

(14)

It shall be secured to the sheerlegs at their intersection, by at least 2 full turns and 2 approved wire-rope grips.

(15)

Alternatively, this fastening may comprise 2 full turns and a spliced eye.

(16)

The front, or lazy guy, shall be of rope of the same construction as the back guy, not less in circumference than 11/8 inches, fastened as previously mentioned.

(17)

Alternatively, the front guy may be of approved fibre rope not less in circumference than 21/2 inches.

(18)

The guys shall be so adjusted that the total fore and aft movement of the topmost bolt of the sheerlegs shall not exceed 30 inches in any circumstances.

(19)

Smooth skids not less in horizontal width than 45 inches shall be provided and fixed in such a way that they guide the barrow or other lifting medium and its load smoothly from level to level.

(20)

Landings for barrows, or loads, shall be not less than 9 feet in width by 14 feet in length, and shall be provided with handrails at the idle sides.

(21)

The hauling rope shall lead or pass from the top block in a direction as nearly as practicably parallel to 1 of the legs of the sheerlegs, and then through a guide or deflector block secured to the foot of the leg, or to a point closely adjacent to it, before passing to the winch.

(22)

Guardrails shall be provided and so fixed, that persons not actively engaged in the hoisting operations are restrained from entering within 15 feet of the skids, and no person unless so engaged shall so enter.

Part 12 Plant and gear

General

141 .

(1)

All plant and gear and every part of it shall be of sound material, good construction, adequate strength, free from patent defects and be suitable and safe for the purpose for which it is intended.

(2)

If in this part reference is made to any of the rules, codes or specifications of Standards Australia or the British Standards Institution, each shall be interpreted as intended by the rules, codes or specifications.

(3)

Unless elsewhere more specifically prescribed by this regulation all hooks, rings, egg links, intermediate links, shackles, Bordeaux connections, rope clips, rope sockets, eyebolts, rigging screws, turnbuckles, swivels, and analogous media that conform in all respects with the requirements of a standard specification promulgated by Standards Australia shall be deemed to be within classification 3 of section 122.

(4)

If the media are to be used in connection with any crane, lift, hoist, scaffolding or plant within classification 4 of section 122, they shall be further increased in strength by not less than 181/2% .

Ladders

Definitions

142 .

(1)

In this section:

ladder means an appliance usually consisting of 2 side rails or stiles joined at regular intervals by cross pieces called steps, rungs or treads, on which a person may rest or step in ascending or descending.

single ladder means a non-self-supporting portable ladder, non‑adjustable in length consisting of but 1 section and its size is designated by the overall length of a side rail.

extension ladder means a non-self-supporting portable ladder adjustable in length, consisting of 2 or more sections being in guides or brackets so arranged to permit length adjustment and its size being designated by the maximum extended working length of the ladder measured along the side rails.

stepladder means a self-supporting portable ladder, non-adjustable in length, having flat steps or treads and hinged back legs and its size being designated by the overall length of the ladder measured along the front edge of the side rails.

trestle ladder means a self-supporting portable ladder consisting of 2 sections hinged at the top to form equal angles with the base and its size is designated by the length of the side rails measured along the front edge.

fixed ladder means a ladder that is permanently attached to a building or structure.

General

(2)

Timber used in a ladder shall not be painted.

(3)

If a timber preservative is used it shall be and remain transparent on the timber.

(4)

Ladders shall be kept clean and free from dirt, moisture or splashing of paint or materials.

(5)

Ladders with broken, split, or otherwise defective or loose components shall not be used, or kept or placed where they may be used.

(6)

All timber shall be dressed on all sides and shall have all corners rounded and free from splinters or slivers.

(7)

Where nails or screws are required in a connection, at least 2 shall be used unless otherwise prescribed in this section.

(8)

Unless otherwise approved all materials shall comply with this regulation.

(9)

Every ladder and every part of it shall be of sound material, good construction, adequate strength, free from patent defects, and be suitable and safe for the purpose for which it is intended.

Materials

(10)

All timber used in the construction of ladders shall be of Oregon or other approved timber.

(11)

All timber shall comply with the provisions of ‘select grade for scantlings’ provided in the Australian Standard Grading Rules (Emergency Series) for Sawn and Hewn Structural Timbers, No (E) O.54-1942, promulgated by Standards Australia, as amended in June, 1944.

(12)

In addition, the slope of the grain shall not exceed 1 inch in 20 inches and no defect shall occur except in the middle 3rd of the timber cross-section.

(13)

Brash (Carrotty) timber shall not be used.

(14)

Low density timber of weight less than 30 pounds per cubic foot shall not be used.

Single laddersladders not to exceed 30 feet in length

(15)

Single ladders exceeding 30 feet in length shall not be used unless otherwise approved.

Single ladders—side rails (stiles)dimensions

(16)

The dimensions of side rails shall be not less than those provided in table 142.1:

Table 142.1 Dimensions of timber single ladders

ladder length
(in feet)
side rails (stiles) least dimensions
(in inches)
14 and under21/2 × 13/8
15 to 2231/4 × 13/8
22 to 3033/4 × 13/4

Single ladders—side rails (stiles)drilling for rungs

(17)

All holes for rungs shall be accurately bored through the centre-line of the wide face of each side rail.

(18)

If practicable rungs shall not fit through the full thickness of side rail.

(19)

The holes for rungs shall be 1/16 of an inch deeper than the rung tenon but there shall be at least 1/4 of an inch of solid timber between the bottom of the hole and the outside face of the side rail.

Single ladders—side rails (stiles)spacing between side rails

(20)

The width between inside faces of side rails shall be not less than 101/2 inches and shall not be more than 14 inches, unless otherwise approved.

Single ladders—side rails (stiles)spacing of rungs

(21)

All rungs shall be equally spaced.

(22)

The spacing shall be not less than 81/2 inches or more than 101/2 inches measured centre to centre unless otherwise approved.

(23)

The distance from the bottom of the side rails to the centre of the nearest rung shall be the same as the spacing of the rungs.

Single ladders—rungs—material

(24)

All rungs shall be of spotted gum or other timber of at least equivalent strength and suitability.

(25)

All timber so used shall be well-seasoned, straight-grained, free from sap wood, knots and other defects.

Single ladders—rungs—dimensions

(26)

Rungs shall be 11/8 inches diameter reduced at each end to form tenons 7/8 of an inch diameter.

(27)

Rungs shall extend at least 3/4 of an inch into side rails and if practicable shall finish 5/16 of an inch from the outer face of side rails.

Single ladders—rungs—attachment of rungs to side rails

(28)

Rung tenons shall be a tight fit in the side rails and the shoulders shall fit accurately against the side rails.

(29)

Each rung tenon shall be prevented from turning by means of a nail at least 0.104 inches diameter (12 gauge), driven through the narrow edge of the side rail and passing completely through the rung tenon.

Single ladders— ties—side rail to side railmaterial

(30)

Ties shall be of steel or other approved material.

Single ladders— ties—side rail to side raildimensions

(31)

Ties of steel shall be not less than 1/4 or more than 3/8 of an inch diameter and shall be fitted with washers at each end made of at least 0.05 inches thickness (18 gauge steel), twice the diameter of the tie rod hole in each side rail.

Single ladders— ties—side rail to side railspacing of ties

(32)

A tie shall be fitted at the top and bottom rungs.

(33)

Intermediate ties shall be fitted to at least every 6th rung.

(34)

Ties shall be equally spaced if practicable and shall be fitted immediately below their adjacent rungs, pass through the centre-line of the wide face of each side rail and be well rivetted over washers at their ends to prevent spreading of the side rails.

Extension laddersextension ladders not to exceed 50 feet in length

(35)

An extension ladder exceeding 50 feet in length shall not be used unless otherwise approved.

Extension ladders—side rails (stiles)—dimensions

(36)

Side rails shall have dimensions not less than those provided in table 142.2.

Note Table 142.2 is after s (66).

Extension ladders—side rails (stiles)—drilling for rungs

(37)

All holes for rungs shall be accurately bored through the centre-line of the wide face of side rails.

(38)

If practicable rungs shall not fit through the full thickness of side rail.

(39)

The holes for rungs shall be 1/16 of an inch deeper than the rung tenon but there shall be at least 1/4 of an inch of solid timber between the bottom of the hole and the outside face of the side rail.

Extension ladders—side rails (stiles)—spacing of rungs

(40)

All rungs shall be equally spaced.

(41)

The spacing shall be 12 inches measured centre to centre.

Extension ladders—side rails (stiles)—spacing between side rails

(42)

The width between inside faces of side rails shall be not less than 101/2 inches and not more than 15 inches.

Extension ladders—side rails (stiles)—reinforcing of side rails

(43)

The tension edge of each side rail shall be grooved and fitted with galvanised steel reinforcing wire or its approved equivalent.

(44)

Wire of size not less than 0.128 inches diameter (10 gauge) shall be used for extension ladders of 32 feet or under and wire of size of not less than 0.16 inches diameter (8 gauge) shall be used for extension ladders over 32 feet in length.

(45)

This wire shall be so fitted that when the ladder is straight the wire is sufficiently tensioned to keep it taut at the bottom of the groove.

(46)

The wire shall be stapled in the groove and anchored at each end in an approved way.

Extension ladders—side rails (stiles)—overlap of side rails when fully extended

(47)

The overlap of each side rail in the fully extended position shall be not less than that in table 142.2.

Note Table 142.2 is after s (66).

Extension ladders—rungs—material

(48)

All rungs shall be made of spotted gum or other approved timber of equivalent characteristics and suitability.

(49)

The timber so used shall be well-seasoned, straight-grained, free from sapwood, knots and other defects.

Extension ladders—rungs—dimensions

(50)

Rungs shall be 11/8 inches diameter reduced at each end to form tenons 7/8 of an inch diameter.

(51)

Rungs shall extend at least 3/4 of an inch into side rails and if practicable shall finish 5/16 of an inch from the outer face of side rail.

Extension ladders—rungs—attachment of rungs to side rails

(52)

Rung tenons shall be a tight fit in the side rail and the shoulders shall fit accurately against the same.

(53)

Each rung tenon shall be prevented from turning by means of a nail at least 0.092 inches diameter (13 gauge) driven through the narrow edge of the side rail and passing completely through the rung tenon.

Extension ladders—safety lock fittings and side rail guides

(54)

Every extension ladder shall be fitted with an approved lock and guide brackets that shall effectively allow the ladder to be extended, retracted and locked in any position.

(55)

The lock shall be reliable in principle, simple in detail and capable of safe operation in any extended position of the ladder.

(56)

It shall be so arranged that it will maintain the sections of the ladder in the relative position to each other that the rungs of the sections overlapping in every stage of extension shall form double treads.

Extension ladders—extension ropes and pulleys

(57)

All extension ladders longer than 14 feet when fully extended shall be provided with extension ropes that shall be fibre rope of approved quality not less than 1 inch circumference.

(58)

Extension ladders longer than 34 feet when fully extended shall be fitted with 2 fibre ropes.

(59)

The ropes shall be effectively anchored and maintained.

(60)

Pulleys shall be fitted to properly accommodate the extension ropes, and shall have axles not less than 1/4 of an inch in diameter.

(61)

The pulleys shall be fitted to either side(s) or centre of ladder.

Ties—side rail to side rail—material

(62)

Ties shall be of steel or other approved material.

Ties—side rail to side rail—dimensions

(63)

Ties, if of steel, shall be 1/4 of an inch diameter and shall be fitted with washers at each end at least 0.05 inches thickness (18 gauge steel), twice the diameter of the tie rod hole in each side rail.

Ties—side rail to side rail—spacing of ties

(64)

A tie shall be fitted at the top and bottom rungs if practicable.

(65)

Intermediate ties shall be fitted to at least every 6th rung.

(66)

Ties shall be equally spaced if practicable and shall be fitted immediately below their adjacent rungs, pass through the centre-line of the wide face of each side rail and be well rivetted over washers at their ends to prevent spreading of the side rails.

Table 142.2 Dimensions of timber extension ladders

ladder length
fully extended
(in feet)
minimum overlap
of side rails
(in feet)
side rails (stiles)
least dimensions
(in inches)
26 and under221/4 x 11/4
28 to 30221/2 x 13/8
32 to 34421/2 x 13/8
36 to 46423/4 x 13/4
48 to 50631/4 x 13/4

Stepladders not to exceed 18 feet in length

(67)

A stepladder exceeding 18 feet in length shall not be used unless otherwise approved.

Side rails (stiles) and back legs—dimensions

(68)

Side rails and back legs shall have dimensions not less than those provided in table 142.3.

Note Table 142.3 is after s (117).

Side rails (stiles) and back legs—spacing and spread between side rails

(69)

The width between inside faces of side rails measured at the top tread shall be not less than 111/2 inches, and shall be not more than 13 inches.

(70)

This distance shall increase towards the lower treads at a rate of not less than 11/2 inches and not more than 13/4 inches per foot length of side rail.

Side rails (stiles) and back legs—spacing and spread between back legs

(71)

Spacing and spread between back legs shall be the same as for side rails.

Side rails (stiles) and back legs—spread between side rails and back legs

(72)

In the fully-opened position, the spread between side rails and back legs shall be not less than 8 inches or more than 9 inches per foot length of side rails.

Stepladders—restraining rope

(73)

The spread between side rails and back legs shall be restrained by means of first quality fibre rope not less than 3/4 of an inch in circumference fitted between each back leg and its respective side rail.

(74)

These ropes shall be effectively anchored at 1 end through the centre of the wide face of each side rail immediately below the tread 2nd from the bottom, and at the other end through the centre of the wide face of each back leg at the same level.

(75)

Alternatively, other approved means of restraining the side rails and back legs may be used.

Stepladders—bracing for back legs—battens

(76)

Back legs shall be battened together with battens of timber or other approved material.

(77)

If of timber, they shall have dimensions not less than those provided in the table after subsection (117).

(78)

Back legs shall be battened together at the hinge and also at the level of the 2nd tread from the bottom.

(79)

Stepladders over 8 feet in length shall have extra battens fitted and equally spaced.

(80)

In no case shall the distance between adjacent battens exceed 6 feet.

(81)

Battens shall be screwed, nailed or bolted.

Stepladders—bracing for back legs—diagonal bracing

(82)

Doubled diagonal bracing of timber or other approved material shall be screwed, nailed, or bolted to the back legs between and against adjacent battens.

(83)

The bracing, if of timber or mild steel, shall have dimensions not less than those provided in table 142.3.

Note Table 142.3 is after s (117).

Stepladder—treads—material

(84)

Treads shall be constructed of timber.

Stepladders—treads—dimensions

(85)

Treads shall have dimensions not less than those provided in table 142.3.

Note Table 142.3 is after s (117).

Stepladders—treads—spacing

(86)

Treads shall be equally spaced from the bottom of side rails to the top of top step.

(87)

The spacing shall be not less than 10 inches or more than 12 inches top to top of treads.

(88)

Treads shall be parallel and level when the stepladder is in position for use.

Stepladders—treads— attachment of treads to side rails

(89)

Treads shall be recessed into the side rails or secured to them in an approved way.

(90)

If the treads are recessed into the side rails, the recesses in the rails for the treads shall be not more than 1/4 of an inch deep or less than 3/16 of an inch deep and shall properly accommodate their treads.

(91)

Treads so fitted shall be double screwed to the side rails at each end using wood screws of 0.189 inches diameter (10 gauge) not less than 11/2 inches or more than 13/4 inches long.

(92)

The screws shall be screwed into the centre-line of the tread at each end.

Stepladders—bracing for treadsmaterial

(93)

Bracing for treads shall be of timber or other approved material and shall be screwed or nailed in position.

Stepladders—bracing for treadsdimensions

(94)

Bracing for treads shall have dimensions not less than those provided in table 142.3.

Note Table 142.3 is after s (117).

Stepladders—bracing for treadsattachment of bracing to treads

(95)

The backs of treads shall be braced each side adjacent to the side rails with a bracing strip fitted in a direction parallel with the side rails.

(96)

The bracing strips shall be so fitted that distance between them measured along a tread shall be not less than 101/2 inches.

(97)

The distance between the outside face of a side rail and the inner edge of adjacent bracing strip shall not exceed 4 inches.

Stepladders—top step—material

(98)

The top step at the extreme top of the stepladder shall be constructed of timber.

Stepladders—top step—dimensions

(99)

The top step shall be not less than 15 inches long, 41/2 inches wide, and 13/16 of an inch thick, or more than 16 inches long, 5 inches wide and 1 inch thick.

Stepladders—back support plate for top step—material

(100)

The back support plate shall be of timber or other approved material.

Stepladders—back support plate for top step—dimensions and fitting

(101)

The back support plate, if of timber, shall be not less than 15 inches long, 31/2 inches wide and 13/16 of an inch thick.

(102)

This plate shall properly accommodate the strap hinges if they are used and shall with the side rails properly support the top step.

Stepladders—hinges

(103)

Stepladders whose length is 8 feet or less shall have the back legs hinged by means of 2 (two) 6 inch steel strap hinges or other approved method.

(104)

The strap hinges shall be of not less than 0.062 inches thickness (16 gauge steel) and shall be secured by bolts or wood screws, both bolts or screws to be not less than 0.149 inches diameter (7 gauge) 3/4 of an inch long.

(105)

Cast hinges shall not be used.

(106)

Stepladders whose length exceeds 8 feet shall have their back legs hinged direct to the side rails.

(107)

For this purpose, the back legs shall be so arranged that they lie on the outside of their respective side rails, wide face to wide face.

(108)

The hinge shall consist of 2 bolts not less than 3/8 of an inch or more than 1/2 an inch in diameter, each bolt connecting a back leg and its adjacent side rail each side.

(109)

Each hinge bolt shall pass through the centre-line of the wide faces of adjacent members, shall be in line and be fitted not less than 3 inches from the ends of side rails and back legs and nuts shall be properly riveted over.

(110)

Metal bearing plates of at least 0.05 inches (18 gauge) thickness shall be fitted to each face of each back leg and side rail on which the hinge bolts shall bear.

(111)

A clearance hole 1/16 of an inch greater in diameter than the hinge bolt shall be drilled in the side rails and back legs for this purpose.

Stepladders—ties—side rails to side rails—material

(112)

Ties shall be of steel or other approved material.

Stepladders—ties—side rails to side rails—dimensions

(113)

Ties, if of steel, shall be not less than 1/4 or more than 3/8 of an inch in diameter and be fitted with washers at each end at least 0.05 inches thickness (18 gauge steel) twice the diameter of the tie rod hole in each side rail.

Stepladders—ties—side rails to side rails—spacing and attachment of ties

(114)

Ties shall be fitted to all stepladders whose lengths exceed 5 feet.

(115)

Ladders over 5 feet in length shall have at least 2 ties.

(116)

One tie shall be fitted at the bottom tread, ties shall be equally spaced if practicable, and the maximum distance between ties or tie and top step shall not exceed 5 feet.

(117)

Ties shall be fitted immediately below their adjacent treads, pass through the centre-line of the wide face of each side rail and be well riveted over washers at their ends to prevent spreading of the side rails.

Table 142.3 Dimensions of timber stepladders

least dimensions of components (in inches)
diagonal bracing for back legs
ladder length
(in feet)
side rails (stiles)back legstreadsbattens for back legstimber mild steelbracing for treads
8 and under3 × 123/4 x 3/431/2 x 13/1623/4 x 3/413/4 x 5/163/4 x 1/813/4 x 5/16
9 to 1231/4 x 13 × 131/2 x 13/1623/4 x 3/413/4 x 5/163/4 x 1/813/4 x 5/16
13 to 1833/4 x 131/4 x 13 x 123/4 x 3/413/4 x 5/163/4 x 1/813/4 x 5/16

Trestle ladders—trestle ladders not to exceed 16 feet in length

(118)

A trestle ladder exceeding 16 feet in length shall not be used unless otherwise approved.

Trestle ladders—side rails (stiles)—dimensions

(119)

Side rails shall have dimensions not less than those provided in table 142.4.

Note Table 142.4 is after s (150).

Trestle ladders—side rails (stiles)—spacing and spread between adjacent side rails

(120)

The width between inside faces of side rails measured at the top rung shall be not less than 15 inches or more than 21 inches for trestle ladders up to and including 8 feet in length, and not less than 19 inches or more than 21 inches for trestle ladders over 8 feet in length.

(121)

This dimension shall increase towards the lower rungs at the rate of not less than 11/2 inches and not more than 13/4 inches per foot length of side rails.

Trestle ladders—side rails (stiles)—spread between the pairs of side rails in the fully opened position

(122)

In the fully opened position the spread between the pairs of side rails shall be not less than 4 inches or more than 8 inches per foot length of side rails.

Trestle ladders—side rails (stiles)—holes in side rails for rungs

(123)

All holes for rungs shall be accurately machined so that all rungs pass through the centre-line of the wide faces of the side rail.

(124)

If practicable rungs shall not fit through the full thickness of side rails.

(125)

The holes for rungs shall be 1/16 of an inch deeper than the rung tenon, but there shall be at least 1/4 of an inch of solid timber between the bottom of the hole and the outside face of the side rail.

Trestle ladders—side rails (stiles)—spacing of rungs

(126)

All rungs shall be equally spaced.

(127)

The spacing shall be not less than 20 inches or more than 24 inches centre to centre.

(128)

Rungs spacing in pairs of side rails shall be staggered so that when the trestle ladder is in the closed position the rungs will present an equal spacing of 1/2 that on either pair of side rails.

(129)

The top rung on either pair of side rails shall not be closer to the top than 6 inches.

Trestle ladders—restraining rope

(130)

The spread between the pairs of side rails shall be restrained by means of first quality fibre rope not less than 3/4 of an inch in circumference.

(131)

These ropes shall be effectively anchored at 1 end through the centre of the wide face of each side rail at the same level and at about the 2nd rung from the bottom.

(132)

Alternatively, other approved means of restraining the side rails may be used.

Trestle ladders—rungs—dimensions

(133)

Rungs shall have dimensions not less than those set out in table 142.4.

Note Table 142.4 is after s (150).

(134)

In addition, the cross-section shall be reduced at each end to form a shoulder for tenons, whose cross-section shall be not less than 3/4 of an inch wide and 11/2 inches deep, and not more than 7/8 of an inch wide and the depth of the rung.

(135)

Tenons shall be not less than 1 inch long and if practicable shall finish at least 5/16 of an inch from the outer face of side rails.

Trestle ladders—rungs—attachment of rungs to side rails

(136)

Rung tenons shall be a tight fit in the side rail and the shoulders shall fit accurately against them.

(137)

Each tenon shall be secured by means of 2 nails at least 0.104 inches diameter (12 gauge) driven through the narrow edge of the side rail passing completely through the tenon.

Trestle ladders—hinges

(138)

Trestle ladders shall have their pairs of side rails hinged together at the top by means of hinges constructed of steel not less than 11/4 inches wide and not less than 1/4 of an inch thick.

(139)

The securing bolts shall be 5/16 of an inch diameter.

(140)

The hinge pins shall be of steel not less than 5/16 of an inch in diameter and shall be in line.

(141)

Alternatively, other approved means of hinging may be used.

(142)

Cast hinges shall not be used.

Trestle ladders—hinges—trestles 12 feet or less

(143)

Trestle ladders 12 feet or less in length shall have hinges not less than 10 inches long each side of the hinge pin, and each side secured to side rails with 2 bolts.

Trestle ladders—hinges—trestle ladders more than 12 feet

(144)

Trestle ladders more than 12 feet in length shall have hinges not less than 14 inches long each side of hinge pin, and each side secured to side rails with 3 bolts.

Trestle ladders—ties—side rail to side rail—material

(145)

Ties shall be of steel or other approved material.

Trestle ladders—ties—side rail to side rail—dimensions

(146)

Ties if of steel shall be not less than 3/8 of an inch or more than 7/16 of an inch diameter and be fitted with washers of at least 0.062 inches thickness (16 gauge steel) twice the diameter of the tie rod hole in the side rail, and 1 end of each tie rod shall be screwed and fitted with a standard nut.

Trestle ladders—ties—side rail to side rail—spacing and attachment of ties

(147)

Ties shall be fitted to both pairs of side rails in all trestle ladders.

(148)

One tie shall be fitted at the bottom rung and 1 at the top rung.

(149)

The distance between ties shall not exceed 4 feet.

(150)

Ties shall be fitted immediately below their adjacent rungs, pass through the centre-line of the wide face of each side rail, and be well riveted over at their ends to prevent spreading of side rails.

Table 142.4 Dimensions of timber trestle ladders

least dimensions (in inches)
ladder length (in feet)side rails (stiles)rungs
14 and under 21/2 x 13/821/2 x 13/8
14 to 16 23/4 x 13/423/4 x 13/4

Trestle ladders—handrails

(151)

Provision shall be made in the construction of all trestle ladders exceeding 10 feet in length for the attachment of approved uprights and handrails.

Fixed Ladders

(152)

Fixed ladders shall, unless indoor, be of steel.

(153)

If of timber, the ladders shall conform with this section.

(154)

If of steel, ladders shall have stiles not less in section than 2 inches deep by 1/4 of an inch in thickness.

(155)

The rungs of steel fixed ladders shall be not less than 3/4 of an inch in diameter and shall not be spaced further apart than 10 inches, measured centre to centre.

(156)

They shall be strongly fixed and prevented from rotating.

(157)

Stiles of steel fixed ladders shall be not less than 15 inches apart.

(158)

Ladders shall be set at an angle approximating 15° from the vertical.

(159)

A ladder shall not lean over a person climbing.

(160)

The clearance at the back of the rungs shall not be less than 6 inches, and no obstruction shall be within 30 inches of the face of the ladder.

(161)

There shall be not less than 3 inches clearance between the outside of each stile and the nearest permanent object at the side.

(162)

Ladders shall conform with section 127 (156) and (159) to (161).

(163)

No ladder shall be of greater length than 20 feet.

(164)

Rest platforms shall be provided at the upper ends of each length, and the platforms shall be not less than 18 inches in width by 22 inches in length, and shall have handrails at outer ends and both sides.

(165)

If it is necessary for a ladder to pass closely through a hole in a platform or floor surface, the edge of the hole that is parallel to the ladder rungs shall be padded on the underside with rubber or other resilient material to prevent injury to persons ascending.

(166)

Ladders, or the stiles of the ladders, shall continue for a distance of at least 45 inches above the upper surface of the platform or landing served.

(167)

They shall have adequate lateral support.

(168)

If practicable the rungs of ladders shall, in plan view appear to be at an angle of 90° to the adjacent edge of the platform or surface served.

(169)

Ladders shall be strongly bolted or welded in position.

(170)

All ladders from which a person or object might otherwise fall a distance of 20 or more feet shall be enclosed in an approved way with heavy gauge steel meshing.

(171)

The approximately vertical sides of the mesh opening shall not exceed 5 inches in depth.

Chain for use in connection with cranes, lifts, hoists, scaffolding, plant, gear, or building work, excavation work, or compressed air work

143 .

Definitions

(1)

In this section:

material—unless otherwise stated all chain referred to in this section shall be of mild steel or wrought iron, and the material shall conform with the requirements of the relevant specification referred to in subsections (15) to (19).

size of chain means the diameter of the material of which the chain is made, measured after the chain has been fabricated.

normalising means heat treatment carried out in a furnace so designed that the chain is heated through and brought up to the normalising temperature of 1 650° Fahrenheit, uniformly throughout its mass, the conditions of heating being such that a reducing atmosphere is maintained, and the chain afterwards being removed from the furnace and allowed to cool freely in still air.

annealing means heat treatment carried out in a furnace so designed that the chain is heated through and brought up to the annealing temperature of 1 110° to 1 200° Fahrenheit, uniformly throughout its mass, the conditions of heating being that a reducing atmosphere is maintained, and the chain afterwards being removed from the furnace and allowed to cool freely in still air.

General

(2)

Chain with bent or otherwise deformed links shall not be used.

(3)

Knotted chains shall not be used.

(4)

Suitable packing shall be provided and used to prevent chain links coming into contact with sharp edges of loads of hard material.

(5)

Chains shall not be exposed to temperatures in excess of 500° Fahrenheit.

(6)

Chains constructed of material less than 5/16 of an inch diameter shall not be used for load-carrying purposes unless otherwise approved.

(7)

Chains that have been lengthened, altered or repaired, shall, before being reused, be subjected to a load equal to their safeworking load and closely examined as to suitability for further use.

(8)

No chain shall be used that has been subjected to a severe shock.

(9)

No chain shall be heat-treated after being placed into commission.

(10)

No chain sling shall be used if the included angle measured between any 2 legs exceeds 150°, or if the angle formed between any sling leg and the line of action of the pull exceeds 75°.

(11)

Screw threads used in conjunction with chains shall be prevented by positive means from unscrewing.

(12)

No chain shall be used if any of its links are locked, or stretched, or are without free movement.

(13)

When a load is supported on more than 1 fall, single or part of chain, the load shall be distributed equally by statically determinate automatic means between the falls, singles or parts.

(14)

Every chain and every part of chain shall be of sound material, good construction, adequate strength, free from patent defects, and be suitable and safe for the purpose for which it is intended.

Design, construction, use and safe working load

(15)

Mild steel chains shall comply with the provisions of the British Standards Specification No 590, 1935, as revised in 1949, promulgated by the British Standards Institution, England.

(16)

Wrought iron chain shall comply with the provisions of the British Standard Specification No 394, as amended in 1944, or British Standard Specification No 465, 1932, promulgated by the British Standards Institution, England.

(17)

However—

(a)

every chain shall be classified numerically in conformity with the table entitled ‘Classification of Chain for Purposes of Design, Construction and Use’ after subsection (19); and

(b)

in the event of uncertainty or dispute the classification may be determined by the chief inspector; and

(c)

no chain shall be subjected to any greater load than that shown in table 143.1 as relevant and appropriate to its size and classification or way of use.

(18)

No chain shall be used if of other design or other material than provided in the British Standard Specifications published by the British Standards Institution, England, stated in subsections (15) and (16), without first being approved.

(19)

A chain shall not be subjected at any time to any greater load than is provided for that chain in this section, unless otherwise approved.

Table 143.1 Classification of chain (for purposes of design, construction and use)

classification
of chain
classification of crane, hoist, lift, plant or scaffolding in connection with which the chain is usedchain used for other
purposes
1classifications 1 and 2building, excavation or compressed air work
2classifications 3 and 4

Maximum safe working loads for chains—Classification 1

safe load for 2-leg sling arranged as indicated
size of
chain
safe load for 1 single fall (part)
of chain
inchestonscwtstonscwtstonscwtstonscwtstonscwtstonscwts
5/16012131101701206
3/8017113191401709
7/1613242011313012
1/211021821222110016
9/161183133621411810
5/82741141362714
11/1621751041941217110
3/43861151841638115
13/16407156185134021
7/841281871961041228
15/16561059471056215
16011121088106032
11/166161331116912616310
11/871214141341015712319
13/16810168141412081048
11/49818416613698417
15/161072001719141310757
13/811721181913161117518
17/161282319219171012868
11/21310261238192131070

Maximum safe working loads for chains—Classification 2

safe load for 2-leg sling arranged as indicated
size of
chain
safe load for 1 single fall (part)
of chain
inchestonscwtstonscwtstonscwtstonscwtstonscwtstonscwts
5/1601001901701401005
3/801417141001407
7/1601911711317019010
1/215282311515013
9/161113021424111016
5/81183133621411810
11/16264940352614
3/42155641531821518
13/16356551341235114
7/83157561056315119
15/16468679624624
141899810619418211
11/165101013911716510217
11/86412010158156434
13/166151301114911615310
11/471314151351016713319
15/1689166141311198947
13/89618016213396416
17/161021910171014610255
11/21102151921511110514

Maximum safe working load for chain used in chain blocks*—Classification 1

size of chainsafe working load per fall (part) of chain
(inches)tonscwts
5/16013
3/8019
7/1616
1/2113
9/1622

* The overall width of the links of this chain must not exceed 31/4 times the size of the chain.

Maximum safe working load for chain used in chain blocks*—Classification 2

size of chainsafe working load per fall (part) of chain
(inches)tonscwts
5/16011
3/8016
7/1611
1/2110
9/1620

* The overall width of the links of this chain must not exceed 31/4 times the size of the chain.

Drums, sheaves and quadrants for chain

(20)

If chain is wound over or on drums, or over or on sheaves or quadrants that are not correctly pocketed, the drums, sheaves, and quadrants shall be grooved in an approved way and shall be not less in diameter than 24 times the size of the chain concerned.

Swivel hooks for chain

(21)

Lifting hooks, lifting eyes, attached to single falls (parts) of chain other than chain slings, shall be freely rotable under all conditions of loading, and if the load exceeds 2 tons shall be of the ball or roller thrust-bearing type.

(22)

Provision shall be made to exclude dust and other foreign matter from thrust bearings.

Guards for chain

(23)

Guards shall be provided to prevent persons’ hands or other parts of their body being injured by the chains and sheaves or gypsies of hook blocks or bottom blocks of power cranes or power hoists.

Heat treatment

(24)

Chains shall be heat-treated after manufacture before being used.

(25)

Mild steel chain shall be ‘normalised’, wrought iron chain shall be ‘annealed’.

(26)

No chain shall be normalised or annealed after use except as provided in subsection (27).

(27)

When chain is required, the affected parts shall be normalised or annealed as aforesaid before reuse.

Periodic inspection

(28)

No person shall use any chain or any attachment of it unless every link and the attachments of it have been thoroughly cleaned and subjected to close, detailed examination at the intervals that are necessary or advisable to ascertain whether flaws, cracks, or other defects exist and to ensure that defective chains or attachments are not used.

(29)

A chain shall not be used if its links or attachments have flaws, cracks, or other defects liable to affect its safe use, or if the wear on any link or attachment exceeds 10% of the dimension measured.

Testing of chain

(30)

No person shall use any chain a part of which has not been tested in accordance with this section, or in relation to which the provisions of this section about the submitting of a test certificate or copy of the certificate have not been complied with.

(31)

Every person acquiring a chain for use shall within 24 hours of acquiring the chain, submit to the chief inspector a test certificate, correct in all particulars for a part of the chain, and the certificate shall be in accordance with schedule 2, form 14, and shall be signed by the manufacturer or vendor of the chain.

(32)

The manufacturer or vendor of a chain shall test at least 1 part of each 1 000 feet of chain made, or disposed of, by the manufacturer or vendor.

(33)

If the chain is electrically welded mild steel chain, the test shall comprise a breaking test of a 36 inch gauge length of chain and shall be carried out as prescribed by British Standard Specification No 590-1949 for electrically welded mild steel chain, promulgated by Standards Australia.

(34)

The test shall include determination of the energy absorption factor.

(35)

If the chain is of wrought iron, all of the tests prescribed by British Standard Specifications Nos. 465-1932 and 394-1944 shall be carried out.

(36)

Chains shown by the tests mentioned in subsection (35) to be deficient shall not be used.

(37)

No chain that is to be used shall be subjected to any proof or test load that exceeds by more than 25% the safe working load for the chain prescribed by this regulation.

(38)

If a chain has been made into shorter lengths than 1 000 feet and any person acquires for use any shorter length, the person shall, within 24 hours of acquiring the shorter length of chain, submit to the chief inspector a document that is a true copy of the test certificate correct in all particulars issued for the 1 000 feet length of chain mentioned in subsection (32) and signed by the manufacturer or vendor.

(39)

The document shall be accompanied by a statutory declaration of the manufacturer or vendor that it is a true copy of the original test certificate issued for the 1 000 feet length of chain.

(40)

The original test certificate must be signed by the person witnessing the test and the person must be the responsible testing officer of a licensed proving house, the testing officer of a government department or of a university or other approved engineering school, or the testing officer of a manufacturer of chain who has a testing machine on the manufacturer’s premises approved for testing samples of the completed chain.

Steel wire ropes for use in connection with cranes, lifts, hoists, scaffolding, plant, gear, or building work, excavation work, or compressed air work

144 .

General

(1)

Reverse bends that are detrimental to the life of a running rope shall be avoided if practicable.

(2)

Suitable packing shall be provided and used to prevent wire rope coming in contact with sharp edges of loads or hard material.

(3)

Steel wire rope shall not be exposed to temperatures exceeding 200° Fahrenheit.

(4)

Steel wire rope of circumference less than 5/8 of an inch shall not be used for load carrying purposes unless otherwise approved.

(5)

Kinked ropes shall not be used.

(6)

Ropes shall be stored under cover in a clean, dry place and be raised clear of the ground.

(7)

In no case shall the rope be in contact with ashes, clinker or coke.

(8)

The ropes in store shall be examined periodically and the protective coating renewed when required.

(9)

When a load is supported on more than 1 fall, single or part of rope, the load shall be distributed equally by statically determinate automatic means between the various falls, singles or parts.

(10)

No rope shall be used for load carrying purposes that has been subjected to a severe shock or that has been unduly stretched.

(11)

No rope sling shall be used if the included angle measured between any 2 legs exceeds 150° or if the angle formed between any sling leg and the line of action of the pull exceeds 75°.

(12)

Rope slings before being used, and if repaired or altered before being reused, shall be subjected to a load equal to their safe working load and closely examined about suitability for use or reuse as the case may be.

(13)

Ropes having less than 6 strands, or having any strand containing less than 19 wires shall not be wound on drums or over or on sheaves, rollers, or quadrants, or used in any way as running ropes.

(14)

Screw threads used in conjunction with wire ropes shall be prevented by positive means from unscrewing.

(15)

If rope is used to support workers, it shall not be less than 11/8 inches circumference and 3/8 of an inch diameter—if hand operated, or 15/8 inches circumference and 1/2 an inch diameter—if power operated.

(16)

Every steel wire rope and every part of it shall be of sound material, good construction, adequate strength, free from patent defects, and be suitable and safe for the purpose for which it is intended.

(17)

Rope of lang lay shall not be used unless the ends are fixed to prevent unlaying of the rope.

Design, construction, use and safe working load

(18)

All steel wire rope shall comply with the provisions of Australian Standard Specification No B.9-1938, promulgated by Standards Australia.

(19)

However—

(a)

every steel wire ropes shall be classified numerically in conformity with table 144.1; and

(b)

in the event of uncertainty or dispute the classification may be determined by the chief inspector; and

(c)

no wire rope shall be subjected to any greater load than that shown in table 144.1 as relevant and appropriate to its circumference, construction, and classification, or way of use, provided that—

(i)

if it is of a grade of steel of greater or lesser minimum ultimate tensile value than 80 tons per square inch—the tabulated load shall be increased or decreased in the ratio:

; and

(ii)

if the rope is used solely as a static guy rope—the tabulated load may be increased by 50%; and

(iii)

if the rope comprises the main cable of a cableway—a further increase in load may be approved by the chief inspector; and

(d)

no steel wire rope shall be used if of other design or other material than provided in the British Standard Specifications promulgated by the British Standards Institution, England, or Australian Standard Specification No B9—1938 promulgated by Standards Australia, without first being approved.

Table 144.1 Classification of steel wire rope for purposes of design, construction and use

classification
of rope
classification of crane, hoist, lift, plant, or scaffolding in connection with which the steel wire rope is usedropes used for other purposes
1classifications Nos 1, 2 and 3building, excavation or compressed air work
2classification No 4

Maximum safe working load for steel wire rope—Classification 1

Minimum ultimate tensile value of steel of which rope is constructed = 80 tons per square inch construction: 6 strands each containing 12 wires

safe load for 2-leg sling arranged as indicated
circum-
ference
of rope
approx.
diameter
of rope
safe load for 1 single fall (part) of rope
inchesinchestonscwtstonscwtstonscwtstonscwtstonscwtstonscwts
5/83/16021/20504031/2021/2011/2
3/41/4031/2070605031/202
7/89/32041/20908061/2041/2021/2
15/1606012010081/20603
11/83/8080150130110804
11/413/32 01001901701401005
13/87/16 0111101901601106
11/215/32 01417141001407
15/81/2 017113191401709
13/49/16 01911711317019010
17/819/32 122211811112011
25/8 15282311515013
21/811/16 18214282018015
21/423/32 1123221525112017
23/83/4 11631032211116019
21/213/16 1193153821511910

Maximum safe working load for steel wire rope—Classification 2

Minimum ultimate tensile value of steel of which rope is constructed = 80 tons per square inch construction: 6 strands each containing 12 wires

safe load for 2-leg sling arranged as indicated
circum-
ference
of rope
approx.
diameter
of rope
safe load for 1 single fall (part) of rope
inchesinchestonscwtstonscwtstonscwtstonscwtstonscwtstonscwts
5/8 3/16 0204031/2030201
3/4 1/4 0306050403011/2
7/8 9/32 04071/207051/20402
15/16 05010081/20705021/2
11/83/8 061/20121/201109061/2031/2
11/413/32 081/20161/20141/2012081/2041/2
13/87/16 091/20181/20161/20131/2091/205
11/215/32 012131101701206
15/81/20141/21815100141/2071/2
13/49/16 0161111813016081/2
17/819/32 0181/2116112160181/2091/2
25/8 112011611011011
21/811/16 142621114140121/2
21/423/32 172122711817014
23/83/4 110218212221100151/2
21/213/16 1133421727113017

Maximum safe working load for steel wire rope—Classification 1

Minimum ultimate tensile value of steel of which rope is constructed = 80 tons per square inch construction: Six strands each containing nineteen wires

safe load for 2-leg sling arranged as indicated
circum-
ference
of rope
approx.
diameter
of rope
safe load for 1 single fall (part) of rope
inchesinchestonscwtstonscwtstonscwtstonscwtstonscwtstonscwts
5/8 3/16 031/2070605031/202
3/4 1/4 051/20101/2091/208051/203
7/8 9/32 070131/201201007031/2
15/16 091/2018016013091/205
1/8 13/8 011110190151/201106
11/413/32 0141/21715100141/207
3/8 17/16 0161/211219130161/2081/2
11/215/32 101181141810010
5/8 11/214262111414012
13/49/16 172122711817014
7/8 119/32 11232215251120161/2
25/8 11731134212117019
21/811/16 213193112182111
21/423/32 264940352614
23/83/42125041031421217
21/213/16 216584184021719
23/47/8 3861251841638115
315/16 438679614324
31/411/16509138137150212
31/211/85181181058751831
33/413/166141301113910614310
411/471214131331015712318
41/413/8810169141512181048
41/217/1691318141615131491350
43/411/21014201418111531014511
515/8111622162091614111662
51/4111/1613325922171813133616
51/213/41482716241920714879
53/4113/161513304272222151382
617/81743352916247174818

Maximum safe working load for steel wire rope—Classification 2

Minimum ultimate tensile value of steel of which rope is constructed = 80 tons per square inch construction: 6 strands each containing 19 wires

safe load for 2-leg sling arranged as indicated
circum-
ference
of rope
approx.
diameter
of rope
safe load for 1 single fall (part) of rope
inchesinchestonscwtstonscwtstonscwtstonscwtstonscwtstonscwts
5/8 3/16 0306050403011/2
3/4 1/4 041/2081/208061/2041/2021/2
7/8 9/32 060111/20101/2081/20603
15/16 080151/20140110804
1/8 13/8 091/20181/20161/20131/2091/205
11/413/32 012131101701206
3/8 17/16 01417140191/201407
11/215/32 0171131914017081/2
5/8 11/2101191151810010
13/49/16 13242011213012
7/8 119/32 172122711817014
25/8 1113021424111016
21/811/16 115373029115018
21/423/32 1193153721511910
23/83/42445316322413
21/213/16 2741141372715
23/47/8 2175104194121719
315/16 31061561419310116
31/411/164482765194424
31/211/8509138137150212
33/413/1651311091680513219
411/468128112916836
41/413/873131612810273314
41/217/168215131411198244
43/411/2901781512121490413
515/891919417514191953
51/4111/161122191941514112515
51/213/4122237201917212265
53/4113/16134251022171814134617
617/8141028025220101410710

Maximum safe working load for steel wire rope—Classification 1

Minimum ultimate tensile value of steel of which rope is constructed = 80 tons per square inch construction: 6 strands each containing 24 wires

safe load for 2-leg sling arranged as indicated
circum-
ference
of rope
approx.
diameter
of rope
safe load for 1 single fall (part) of rope
inchesinchestonscwtstonscwtstonscwtstonscwtstonscwtstonscwts
5/8 3/16 0306050403011/2
3/4 1/4 041/2081/208061/2041/2021/2
7/8 9/32 060111/20101/2081/20603
15/16 080150140111/20804
1/8 13/8 011110190151/2011051/2
11/413/32 01315130181/201307
3/8 17/16 016111181301608
11/215/32 01911711317019010
5/8 11/21223118111120111/2
13/49/16 15282311515013
7/8 119/32 192162102119015
25/8 11436219281140171/2
21/811/16 118313362141180191/2
21/423/32 2242314302212
23/83/42741141362714
21/213/16 2145541431721418
23/47/8 346451141134113
315/16 3157661157315119
31/411/164118167176841127
31/211/854101907754212
33/413/165181181058751831
411/46171351118914617311
41/413/871314161351017713319
41/217/168101610141512181048
43/411/291318131614131391350
515/81012209187150101259
51/4111/161112228202168111260
51/213/41212248211717171212610
53/4113/16140271245191614075
617/8153296265219153716

Maximum safe working load for steel wire rope—Classification 2

Minimum ultimate tensile value of steel of which rope is constructed = 80 tons per square inch construction: 6 strands each containing 24 wires

safe load for 2-leg sling arranged as indicated
circum-
ference
of rope
approx.
diameter
of rope
safe load for 1 single fall (part) of rope
inchesinchestonscwtstonscwtstonscwtstonscwtstonscwtstonscwts
5/8 3/16 021/205041/2031/2021/2011/2
3/4 1/4 04071/207051/20402
7/8 9/32 05091/2081/20705021/2
15/16 070131/201201007031/2
1/8 13/8 091/20181/20161/20131/2091/205
11/413/32 011110190151/2011051/2
3/8 17/16 0131/216130190131/207
11/215/32 016111181301608
5/8 11/201911711317019010
13/49/16 112111611011011
7/8 119/32 15282311515013
25/8 192162102119015
21/811/16 11232215251120161/2
21/423/32 116310322111160181/2
23/83/420317392172011
21/213/16 264940352614
23/47/8 2145441431621418
315/16 3362594933113
31/411/16317796135931720
31/211/848810713644826
33/413/16509138137150212
411/45151129198351530
41/413/869129114936937
41/217/1673131612810273314
43/411/283151514211108345
515/881917615101213819413
51/4111/1691518171618131691551
51/213/4101220101871501012511
53/4113/16111622162091614111662
617/8121524122221811215612

Maximum safe working load for steel wire rope—Classification 1

Minimum ultimate tensile value of steel of which rope is constructed = 80 tons per square inch construction: 6 strands each containing 37 wires

safe load for 2-leg sling arranged as indicated
circum-
ference
of rope
approx.
diameter
of rope
safe load for 1 single fall (part) of rope
inchesinchestonscwtstonscwtstonscwtstonscwtstonscwtstonscwts
15/16 081/2016015012081/2041/2
1/8 13/8 0111/212100161/20111/206
11/413/32 01315121/20181/201307
3/8 17/16 0151/211017120151/208
11/215/32 01911711317019010
5/8 11/213222011313012
13/49/16 1621126118160131/2
7/8 119/32 110218212221100151/2
25/8 1153932210115018
21/811/16 20317392172011
21/423/32 264940352614
23/83/42941545392916
21/213/16 2145441331621418
23/47/8 366851541436114
315/16 407156195134021
31/411/164118167186941127
31/211/8571079671257215
33/413/166412010158166434
411/472131512710272314
41/413/88215131411198244
41/217/168181741581212818412
43/411/210019617614310053
515/811321111961515113515
51/4111/161272317218171012768
51/213/413625142311816136617
53/4113/16141328625720141413711
617/81613102716221416186

Maximum safe working load for steel wire rope—Classification 2

Minimum ultimate tensile value of steel of which rope is constructed = 80 tons per square inch construction: 6 strands each containing 37 wires

safe load for 2-leg sling arranged as indicated
circum-
ference
of rope
approx.
diameter
of rope
safe load for 1 single fall (part) of rope
inchesinchestonscwtstonscwtstonscwtstonscwtstonscwtstonscwts
15/16 070131/20120100704
1/8 13/8 090171/20151/20130905
11/413/32 011110190151/2011051/2
3/8 17/16 01315130181/2013061/2
11/215/32 0161111813016081/2
5/8 11/20191/2118114180191/2010
13/49/16 1222118111120111/2
7/8 119/32 1621025117160131/2
25/8 110218212221100151/2
21/811/16 11436219281140171/2
21/423/32 1193153721511910
23/83/4213193112182111
21/213/16 2547318342513
23/47/8 2165841731921619
315/16 3761051641537115
31/411/16317796135931720
31/211/84108147166741027
33/413/1655103927955214
411/46011121088106032
41/413/86171341118914617311
41/217/1671014101301012710318
43/411/289168141311198948
515/89818316613698417
51/4111/16108202180141410858
51/213/411421121981517114516
53/4113/16127231721717912768
617/81310261238192131070

Ratio of drum (barrel) or sheave diameter to rope

(20)

When power operated and for rope speeds not greater than 120 feet per minute, the diameter of a drum (barrel) roller, sheave or quadrant measured at the surface on which the rope operates (where ungrooved) or at the bottom of the groove (where grooved) shall be not less than that provided in table 144.2 as relevant and appropriate to the construction of the rope concerned.

(21)

For each increase in rope speed of 60 feet per minute, above 120 feet per minute, 71/2% shall be added to the diameter of the drum, barrel, roller, sheave or quadrant.

(22)

The ratio of drum, barrel, roller, sheave or quadrant diameter to rope diameter when hand operated shall be not less than 10, when measured at the surface on which the rope operates.

Table 144.2

rope construction
number
of strands
number of wires in each strandnoteminimum diameter of drum,
barrel, roller, sheave or quadrant expressed in terms of ‘d’ the diameter of the rope concerned
4 23d.
6
6
6
6 19d.
6
637 161/2 d.
661 151/2 d.
610flattened strand33d.
625flattened strand27d.
627flattened strand25d.
819flattened strand171/2 d.
177non-spin20d.
347non-spin161/2 d.

Equalising sheaves

(23)

Equalising sheaves and analogous media shall have diameters at the bottoms of the grooves not less than 15 times the diameter of the ropes concerned.

Angle of lead of rope to and from drums or sheaves—for grooved drums or sheaves

(24)

The maximum lead angle shall be such that there is no danger of the rope being drawn out of its bed in the groove and shall not exceed 5° (1 in 12) each side of a plane perpendicular to the axis of rotation of the drum or sheave.

Angle of lead of rope to and from drums or sheaves—for ungrooved drums

(25)

The maximum lead angle shall be such that there is no danger of the rope ‘bunching’ on the drum and failing to lay correctly on it, and shall not exceed 3° (1 in 19) each side of a plane perpendicular to the axis of rotation of the drum.

Grooving of drums

(26)

If drums are grooved the grooves shall be machined and the contour at the bottom of the grooves shall be circular over an angle of 120°.

(27)

The radius of the grooves shall be as shown in table 144.3.

Table 144.3 Radius of grooves in rope drums

for ropes up to and including 2 inches circumferenceradius of rope plus 1/32 of an inch
for ropes of 21/8 to 23/4 inches circumference inclusiveradius of rope plus 3/64 of an inch
for ropes of 3 to 31/2 inches circumference inclusiveradius of rope plus 1/16 of an inch
for ropes of 33/4 inches circumference and largerradius of rope plus 3/32 of an inch
(28)

Grooves shall have a depth of not less than 1/3 of the diameter of the rope and shall be so pitched that there is a clearance of not less than 1/32 of an inch for ropes up to 11/2 inches diameter and not less than 1/16 of an inch for ropes over 11/2 inches diameter, between the parts of the rope when coiled on the drum.

(29)

The grooves shall be smoothly finished and all sharp edges removed.

Ungrooved drums for rope

(30)

Ungrooved drums shall have flanges extending 1 rope diameter above the surface of the outer layer of rope when the maximum designed number of turns are wound on it, but in no case shall the total depth of the flange measured from the face of the empty drum be less than 3 rope diameters.

(31)

Subsection (30) shall not imply that an additional flange is to be provided when a wheel that is attached to the drum will serve to form 1 of the flanges.

Rope pulleys and quadrants

(32)

Rope pulleys and quadrants shall be machine grooved to a depth not less than 11/2 times the diameter of the rope used on it and the grooving shall comply with the provisions of subsections (26) to (29).

(33)

The included angle of flare between the 2 sides of the grooving of a pulley or quadrant shall be not less than 42° and not more than 52°.

(34)

When ropes are prevented from leaving their grooves, the grooves may be not less in depth than the diameter of the rope concerned.

(35)

Lifting block pulleys shall be provided with suitable guards to keep the ropes in the grooves.

Swivel hooks

(36)

Lifting hooks and lifting eyes attached to single falls (parts) of steel wire rope other than rope slings, shall be freely rotatable under all conditions of loading and if the load exceeds 2 tons shall be of the ball or roller thrust bearing type.

(37)

Provision shall be made to exclude dust and other foreign matter from thrust bearings.

Guards

(38)

Guards shall be provided to prevent persons’ hands or other parts of their body being injured by the rope or pulleys of hook blocks or bottom blocks in power-operated cranes or hoists if the blocks are used for loads of less than 5 tons.

(39)

Guards shall be provided if there is a danger that ropes will become displaced from pulleys, or quadrants.

Rope anchorages

(40)

Eye splices, sockets, and rope anchorages shall be capable of withstanding 90% of the guaranteed breaking strength of the rope or ropes to which they are attached.

(41)

Rope anchorages shall be readily accessible at all times.

(42)

There shall be at least 2 full turns of each rope, remaining on the drum or barrel when the hook or other lifting or hauling medium is fully lowered or unwound.

Splicing

(43)

Eye splices shall have at least 3 tucks with each whole strand of the rope, and 2 tucks with 1/2 of the wires cut out of each strand, made in each case, under and over against the lay of the rope.

(44)

The splice shall be tightly drawn and neatly made.

(45)

Thimbles shall be used if ropes are spliced to hooks, shackles, rings, swivels, pins, eyes, and analogous fittings.

Periodic inspection of rope

(46)

No person shall use any wire rope or any attachments of it unless the rope and the attachments of it have been subjected to close detailed examination at the intervals that are necessary or advisable to ensure that defective ropes or attachments are not used.

(47)

No steel wire rope shall be used if it is excessively worn, corroded, or otherwise defective, or if in any length equal to 8 diameters of the rope the number of visible broken wires exceeds 10% of the total number of wires in the rope.

Identification and testing of steel wire rope

(48)

No person shall use any steel wire rope unless the person holds a purchaser’s docket or other document, issued to the person and signed by the person from whom he or she purchased or obtained the use of the rope, clearly and legibly setting out in the English language the length of rope to which the docket or document applies, the size, construction and lay of the rope, the maker’s guaranteed minimum breaking tensile strength of the rope, the maker’s identification number of the coil from which the rope was obtained, and the date of purchase or acquisition of the rope.

(49)

Every person using any steel wire rope shall when so required by an inspector immediately produce to the inspector, and allow the inspector to examine and copy, the docket or document required by subsection (48) to be held by the person for that rope.

(50)

Every person who uses or has in his or her possession for use any steel wire rope shall, if requested by the chief inspector so to do, produce to the chief inspector or to an inspector named in the request, at a reasonable place specified in the request and within a reasonable time not exceeding 4 weeks after the receipt of the request, a test certificate for the rope or of rope of which it formed a part, which certificate shall be in accordance with Australian Standard Specification No M4—1955, appendix K, ‘Steel Wire Ropes for Winding and Hauling Purposes in Mines’ of Standards Australia, and the person shall, if necessary for compliance with the request, cause the appropriate test to be made.

(51)

Unless the chief inspector directs the production of the original certificate, the production of a true copy of it, if bearing a statement signed by the maker or a vendor of the rope that it is a true copy, shall be a sufficient compliance with the request.

(52)

Any person who in any test certificate given for steel wire rope knowingly makes or signs any false statement, or who knowingly makes or signs a false statement that any document is a true copy of the certificate, commits a breach of this regulation.

Fibre rope for use in connection with cranes, lifts, hoists, scaffolding, plant, gear, or building work, excavation work, or compressed air work

145 .

General

(1)

All fibre rope and every part of it shall be of sound material, good construction, adequate strength, free from patent defects and be suitable and safe for the purpose for which it is intended.

(2)

Suitable packing shall be provided and used to prevent fibre rope coming in contact with sharp edges of loads, etc.

(3)

Fibre rope shall not be exposed to extremes of temperature either in or out of use.

(4)

Fibre ropes of circumference less than 11/2 inches shall not be used for load carrying purposes unless otherwise approved.

(5)

If fibre rope is held by hand under load, it shall be not less than 2 inches circumference.

(6)

Kinked ropes shall not be used.

(7)

Ropes shall be kept clean, stored under cover in a clean dry place, and be raised clear of the ground.

(8)

In no case shall the rope be in contact with ashes, clinker or coke.

(9)

Ropes shall be kept clear of acids and other deleterious chemicals and their fumes.

(10)

Ropes shall be examined each time before being used.

(11)

If a load is supported on more than 1 fall or single part of rope, the load shall be equally distributed by statically determinate automatic means between the various falls, singles or parts.

(12)

No rope shall be used for load-carrying purposes that has been subjected to a severe shock or that has been unduly stretched.

(13)

No rope sling shall be used if the included angle measured between any 2 legs exceeds 150°, or if the angle formed between any sling leg and the line of action of the pull exceeds 75°.

(14)

Rope slings before being used, and if repaired or altered, before being reused shall be subjected to a load equal to their safe working load and closely examined to ensure suitability for use or reuse as the case may be.

(15)

Fibre rope shall not be exposed to temperatures exceeding 150° Fahrenheit.

(16)

Fibre ropes that are excessively worn or have been adversely affected by weather or by water shall be discarded.

Design, construction, use and safe working load

(17)

All fibre rope shall comply with the provisions of Australian Standard Specifications No (E) L.507—1941, or No (E) L.508—1941, promulgated by Standards Australia, unless otherwise approved.

(18)

However—

(a)

every fibre rope shall be classified numerically in conformity with table 145; and

(b)

in the event of uncertainty or dispute the classification may be determined by the chief inspector; and

(c)

no fibre rope shall be subjected to any greater load than that determined by multiplying the least ultimate tensile value of the rope by the fraction mentioned in subsections (21) and (22) relevant and appropriate to its classification and way of use.

(19)

For subsection (18) (c), the least ultimate tensile value of a rope that is in the best condition may be deemed equal to the minimum breaking load or strength of that rope prescribed by Australian Standard Specification No (E) L.507—1941, for sisal rope or No (E) L.508—1941, for Manila rope, whichever is relevant and appropriate, the specifications being those promulgated by Standards Australia.

(20)

For worn rope the ultimate tensile value shall be deemed to be 1/2 of that determined in accordance with subsection (18) (c).

(21)

Ropes within classification 1 of table 145.

(22)

Ropes within classification 2 of table 145.

(23)

Unless first approved by the chief inspector no fibre rope shall be used of other design or other material than that provided in Australian Standard Specifications mentioned in subsection (19).

Table 145 Classification of fibre rope for purposes of design, construction and use

classification numberclassification of crane, hoist, lift, plant
or scaffolding in connection with which the fibre rope is used
rope used for other purposes
1classification No 1, 2 and 3building work, excavation work, or compressed air work
2classification No 4

Ratio of drum (barrel) or sheave diameter to rope diameter

(24)

The diameter of any drum, barrel, roller, sheave or quadrant measured at the surface on which the rope operates shall be not less than 5 times the diameter of the rope concerned if hand-operated, or 10 times the rope diameter if power-operated.

Guards

(25)

Guards shall be provided to prevent ropes becoming displaced from sheaves, rollers or quadrants.

Rope anchorages

(26)

Each rope anchorage shall be capable of withstanding 75% of the ultimate tensile strength of the rope attached to it.

(27)

Rope anchorages shall be readily accessible at all times.

(28)

There shall be at least 2 full turns of each rope remaining on the drum or barrel when the hook or other lifting or hauling medium is fully lowered or unwound.

Splicing

(29)

Eye splices shall have at least 3 tucks with each whole strand of the rope, made under and over against the lay of the rope, and followed by effective dog-knotting.

(30)

The splice shall be tightly drawn and neatly made.

(31)

Thimbles shall be used if ropes are spliced to hooks, shackles, rings, swivels, pins, eyes or analogous media.

Periodic inspection of rope

(32)

No person shall use any fibre rope or any attachment of it unless the rope and the attachments have been subjected to close detailed examinations at the intervals that are necessary or advisable to ensure that defective ropes or attachments are not used.

Airlocks

146 .

Every airlock shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the provisions of the Australian Standard Rules for the Design, Construction, Inspection and Operation of Boilers and Unfired Pressure Vessels and their Appurtenances published by Standards Australia, as revised in 1942.

Bordeaux connections

147 .

Bordeaux connections for connecting wire rope to crane chain, and fittings used in a like way shall comply with the provisions of British Standard Specification No 461—1932, promulgated by the British Standards Institution, England, except as may be otherwise provided in this regulation.

Sockets for wire ropes

148 .

Sockets for wire rope and fittings used in a like way shall comply with the provisions of British Standard Specification No 463—1946, promulgated by the British Standards Institution, England, except as may be otherwise provided in this regulation.

Thimbles for wire and fibre rope

149 .

Thimbles for wire and fibre rope shall be of approved design and construction.

Steel eye bolts

150 .

(1)

Steel eye bolts and analogous fittings shall comply with the provisions of British Standard Specification No 529, parts 1 and 2, 1944, promulgated by the British Standards Institution, England, except as may be otherwise provided in this regulation.

(2)

The maximum load in the threaded part of an eye bolt shall not exceed that prescribed by section 126 (38) having due regard to the classification of the eye bolt.

(3)

Eye bolts without collars shall, unless otherwise approved, be used only for direct axial loading.

Mild steel rigging screws, and stretching screws and turnbuckles

151 .

(1)

Mild steel rigging screws, and stretching screws and turnbuckles and analogous fittings shall comply with the provision of British Standard Specification No 716—1937, promulgated by the British Standards Institution, England, except as may be otherwise provided in this regulation.

(2)

The maximum load in the threaded section of any tensile male component of these fittings shall not exceed that prescribed by section 126 (38) having due regard to classification.

Mild steel shackles

152 .

Mild steel shackles and analogous fittings shall comply with British Standard Specification No 825—1939, promulgated by the British Standards Institution, England, except as may be otherwise provided in this regulation.

Rings, links alternative to rings, egg links and Intermediate links

153 .

Rings, links alternative to rings, egg links and intermediate links, and analogous fittings shall comply with the provisions of British Standard Specification No 781—1938, promulgated by the British Standards Institution, England, except as may be otherwise provided in this regulation.

Handrails

154 .

(1)

Except if otherwise provided—

(a)

handrails shall be fixed at a height of 3 feet above the working platforms or surfaces served, and shall be strongly supported at points not further apart than 8 feet; and

(b)

handrails shall be of not less strength and rigidity than the following alternative members:

(i)

if of timber—pine timber not less than 3 inches in depth by 2 inches in horizontal width; or

(ii)

if of steel—steel water pipe of 1 inch diameter nominal bore, having a wall thickness not less than 0.144 of an inch; or

(iii)

if of rolled mild steel—rolled mild steel angle section 13/4 inches by 13/4 inches by 1/4 of an inch.

(2)

Unless otherwise approved, handrail stanchions or standards shall be welded or bolted in place, with bolts each not less than 3/8 of an inch in diameter and having washers under heads and nuts.

(3)

Handrails shall be strongly secured to standards by—

(a)

steel U-strips not less than 1 inch in width and 1/16 of an inch in thickness, strongly spiked or screwed in place; or

(b)

bolts as for standards; or

(c)

approved cleats or approved lashings; or

(d)

by adequate full-strength welding.

Rope clips

155 .

Rope clips shall not be used unless—

(a)

they are of approved design and construction; and

(b)

they are used only for the purpose and in the way approved.

Gin blocks used with fibre rope

156 .

Frames

(1)

The frame shall be either—

(a)

a malleable iron or steel casting, or other approved material; or

(b)

a fabricated wrought steel frame constructed as follows:

(i)

the vertical part of the frames shall be formed from flat rectangular mild steel bar with horizontal rope guards (also of flat rectangular mild steel bar) welded by an approved process to the vertical part of the frame; and

(ii)

all sharp corners and edges shall be dressed to prevent the chafing of the rope.

Clearances

(2)

The openings in the frame shall be adequate to prevent contact with and chafing the rope.

(3)

The total clearance between the sheave and the frame shall not exceed 1/16 of an inch.

(4)

The clearance between the hole in the crosshead and shank of the hook, between the axle pin and the holes in the frame, between the axle pin and the hole in the sheave and between the side of the cotter pin and the frame shall not exceed 1/64 of an inch.

Lift boxes

157 .

Materials

(1)

All timber used in the construction of lift boxes shall comply with the provisions of ‘Standard Grade for Scantlings’ set out in the Australian Standard Grading Rules (Emergency Series) for Sawn and Hewn Structural Timbers, No (E) 054—1942, as amended in June, 1944.

(2)

Lift boxes for loads not exceeding 3 tons shall be made of oregon timber 2 inches thickness, or alternatively of hardwood 11/2 inches thickness.

(3)

Every lift box shall be fitted with 2 carrying straps 3 inches by 5/8 of an inch mild steel each passing under the bottom and up both sides of the box.

(4)

These straps shall be secured to the timber with bolts 1/2 an inch diameter.

(5)

The end of each strap at the top of the box shall have a hole formed in it to accommodate the lifting tackle.

Part 13 Precautions and measures to be taken for securing the safety of persons in connection with roofs sheathed with asbestos cement or other brittle material

158 .

(1)

In this section:

large regulation sheets means corrugated asbestos cement sheets of material not less than 1/4 of an inch in thickness, having corrugations 17/8 inches and over in depth, the pitch of the corrugations being more than 3 inches but not more than 53/4 inches measured centre to centre of adjacent crests or troughs.

longitudinal wires means the safety mesh wires parallel to the corrugations of the roof sheathing.

roof means the roof, or part of it, of any building or structure, except of a private dwelling house and its outhouses, the upper surface of which roof makes an angle of less than 50° with the horizontal.

safety mesh means a meshwork of steel wires of size and arrangement required by this section.

small section sheets means corrugated asbestos cement sheets of material not less than 7/32 of an inch in thickness, having corrugations less than 17/8 inches in depth, the pitch of the corrugations being 3 inches or less measured centre to centre of adjacent crests or troughs.

transverse wires means the safety mesh wires at right angles to the corrugations of the roof sheathing.

(2)

No person shall place, lay or fix, or cause to be placed, laid or fixed, on any roof structure, or part of a roof structure, any roof sheathing of asbestos cement or other brittle material unless safety mesh has first been securely fixed in the way provided in this regulation over the area to be sheathed.

(3)

However, the chief inspector may, by written notice, exempt from this requirement any roof—

(a)

if the chief inspector is satisfied that generally the roof construction is such that it would provide the same degree of safety as would any other roof on which safety mesh has been fixed; or

(b)

in which the members immediately supporting corrugated asbestos cement sheathing are spaced—

(i)

not more than 1 foot 6 inches apart measured centre to centre for small section sheets; or

(ii)

not more than 2 feet apart measured centre to centre for large section sheets; or

(c)

vertically below which a substantial and closely boarded floor or like structure is located at a distance not greater than 8 feet, measured from the highest part of the roof.

(4)

Corrugated asbestos cement sheathing for roofs shall be mature and free from cracks and defects liable to impair its strength.

(5)

The distance between purlins or other immediate supports for corrugated asbestos cement roof sheathing shall not when measured centre to centre exceed—

(a)

4 feet 11/2 inches for a large section sheet, measured in the direction of the corrugations; or

(b)

3 feet for small section sheets, measured as mentioned in paragraph (a); or

(c)

the distance approved in writing by the chief inspector for sheets differing in section from those mentioned in paragraphs (a) and (b).

(6)

No person shall place, lay or fix asbestos cement sheets on any roof structure unless the person is wearing sandshoes or other approved footwear.

(7)

Safety mesh shall be constructed entirely of steel wire the ultimate tensile strength of which is not less than 35 tons per square inch.

(8)

The wire shall be zinc galvanised so that the weight of the zinc coat in ounces per square foot shall not be less than the value, appropriate to the tensile strength of the wire, as provided in British Standard Specification 443, 1939, table 2, for the testing of the zinc coating on galvanised wires, promulgated by the British Standards Institution, London, England, as amended in February, 1945.

(9)

Each mesh shall be rectangular in shape and shall not exceed 12 inches in length and 6 inches in width.

(10)

The wires forming each mesh shall be strongly secured, one to the other, at each corner of the mesh.

(11)

The diameter of the wire with which each type of safety mesh is formed shall be as provided in the table after subsection (13).

(12)

Safety mesh shall be fixed to purlins or other anchorages at the spacings set out in the table after subsection (13) in any 1 of the following ways:

(a)

if the purlins or other anchorages are of timber the longitudinal wires shall—

(i)

be bent down and fixed to the sides of the purlins or other anchorages with galvanised steel staples of the gauges, lengths and spacing as set out in table 158; or

(ii)

be fixed to the tops of them with galvanised steel staples of the gauges, lengths and spacing as set out in table 158; or

(b)

the longitudinal wires of the safety mesh shall be passed once completely around the purlin, or other anchorage, the tail of each wire being twisted twice tightly around the main part of the same wire; or

(c)

the longitudinal wires of the safety mesh shall be secured to the purlins or other anchorages with 10 gauge (0.128 of an inch diameter) galvanised steel wire loops by passing the centre of the tying wire around the longitudinal wire at a point of intersection of a transverse wire, so that a transverse wire shall be between that point and the end of the longitudinal wire, passing both ends of the tying wire once completely around the purlin, or other anchorage, the 2 tails of the tying wire being then drawn in opposite directions over the 2 strands of the tying wire and twisted together with at least 3 complete turns.

(13)

All staples shall be driven in such way that a cross wire is between the end of the wire and the staple or the end of the wire is bent back and twisted twice around the same wire, so that individual wires cannot be drawn from the staple.

Table 158

diameter of wire in meshmesh dimensionsgauge of
staple
fastening
to side of purlin: length of staple
fastening
to top of purlin: length of staple
spacing of staples or other fastenings
inchinchess.w.g.inchesinchesinches
0.12812 × 61011/411/212
0.1046 × 611111/46
0.0924 × 411111/48, 4*
0.0803 × 311111/46

* Pairs of wires at 12-inch centres, ie wires alternately at 8-inch and 4-inch centres.

(14)

Safety mesh shall be deemed not to conform to the requirements of this section unless a complete specification and the samples of mesh, as may be required, have been submitted to the chief inspector and approved by him or her.

(15)

Safety mesh shall be fixed immediately and closely under the roof sheathing, without other intervention, and so that it rests on each of the roof members; it shall be free from perceptible sag.

(16)

The longitudinal wires shall pass above and across all roof members that immediately support the roof sheathing.

(17)

All the transverse wires shall be located above the longitudinal wires.

(18)

If the longer sides of a mesh exceed 6 inches, the safety mesh shall be so disposed that the lesser sides are parallel to the corrugations.

(19)

If a break of continuity in the longitudinal wires occurs, the wires shall be effectively joined to preserve continuity.

(20)

In addition, the longitudinal wires at the adjoining or overlapping edges of adjacent lengths of safety mesh shall be strongly fastened together at intervals not greater than 3 feet.

(21)

Adjacent lengths of safety meshing shall not, when fixed, be more than 1 inch apart.

(22)

Without limiting subsections (1) to (21), the apertures resulting from junctions or connections of safety mesh shall not exceed those prescribed for the construction of the mesh, or be otherwise oriented.

(23)

No person shall carry out or cause to be carried out any roof sheathing work unless safety mesh has first been fully fixed as a margin around all positions where the work is to be carried out.

(24)

If not otherwise limited by the boundaries of the roof structure, or boundaries incidental to the application of this section, this margin shall be at least 20 feet in width.

(25)

Safety mesh shall not be used if it is likely to be affected by corrosive agencies but purlins or battens spaced as provided in subsection (3) (b) shall be used in its place.

(26)

Safety mesh or its fastenings or supports that has been reduced in strength by corrosion or other agency to less than 90% of the strength indicated by this section shall on reduction be renewed by the owner of the building, to comply with this section.

(27)

Safety mesh shall not be considered as affording support to the roof sheathing.

(28)

The owner of any building (other than a private dwelling house), or any structure, having any roof sheathing of asbestos cement or other brittle material, shall provide and fix on each individual slope, curve, or flat of roofing of it, the warning or danger notices in the positions, and way prescribed in this section.

(29)

The owner shall preserve and maintain the notices in good condition, and in a clean and legible state.

(30)

The warning notices shall bear the words—

Warning

Stand or walk only on lines of nails or screws in

< this > direction

in heavy block lettering in black on a sharply contrasting yellow background.

(31)

The words ‘Warning’ and ‘This’ shall be at least 13/4 inches in height, and the remainder of the lettering shall be at least 11/8 inches in height.

(32)

The word ‘This’ shall be placed centrally between 2 heavy straight black arrows as indicated in subsection (30).

(33)

The word ‘Warning’ shall be heavily underlined in black.

(34)

The warning notices shall not be less than 121/2 inches in width and 14 inches in depth and shall be of steel not less in thickness than 18 English Imperial Legal Standard Gauge (0.048 of an inch).

(35)

All of the wording and its background shall be executed in vitreous (‘porcelain’) enamel and the back and other part of the notice shall, if not otherwise enamelled, have at least a grip coat of vitreous enamel.

(36)

Warning notices shall be strongly fixed in upright positions directly on and not more than 3 inches above the sheathings of the roofs, closely adjacent to all points of access to the roofs.

(37)

In the same way they shall also be fixed closely adjacent to all valleys and other points where persons might reasonably be expected to enter on the roofs.

(38)

They shall be so placed that they constitute plain and clearly visible warning to persons about to enter on the roofs.

(39)

Each notice shall be so placed and so oriented, that the arrows on them are directly above and point along the line of nails, screws, bolts, or other fastenings that secure the roof sheathing to its immediate supports.

(40)

Each notice shall be so placed and so oriented that it clearly indicates those lines that mark the positions and directions of uninterruptedly continuous supporting members of the roof sheathing.

(41)

No person shall fix a warning notice on a roof until the person has first ensured that there is an uninterruptedly continuous supporting member along each line of nails, screws, or other fastenings after which to be indicated by the notice, and if any such member is not uninterruptedly continuous the person shall cause it to be made so before fixing the notice.

(42)

If any supporting member of the sheathing of any roof is incapable of safely supporting a concentrated load of 300 pounds acting vertically downwards and so placed as to be of most adverse effect, no person shall fix a warning notice as previously prescribed.

(43)

Instead, danger notices shall be strongly fixed, as prescribed in this section for warning notices.

(44)

Danger notices shall bear the words—

Danger

Keep off this roof

in heavy block lettering in red on a white background.

(45)

The word ‘Danger’ shall be at least 13/4 inches in height and shall be heavily underlined in red.

(46)

The remainder of the lettering shall be at least 13/8 inches in height.

(47)

The danger notices shall not be less than 12 inches square and shall in all other respects conform with the requirements of this regulation for warning notices.

Part 16 Miscellaneous and penalties

General penalty

164 .

(1)

When any matter or thing is by this regulation required, directed or forbidden to be done, or if any authority is given by this regulation to any person to require, direct or forbid any matter or thing to be done, and the matter or thing so required or directed to be done remains undone, or the matter or thing so forbidden to be done is done, in every such case every person offending against the requirement, direction or prohibition, commits an offence against this regulation.

(2)

Any person guilty of a breach of this regulation shall, if no other penalty is expressly provided in this regulation for the breach, be liable to a penalty not exceeding $100.

Schedule 3 Method of treatment of silica paint for the purpose of ascertaining the percentage of free silica present

Research tools for this sectionPro

The statute text is free to read above. View Pro plans to unlock the case-law research tools for each provision.